Fiber Service Platform 3000R7

(FSP 3000R7)

Hardware Description
Document Version 7.1.5 (June 2007)
Product Release 7.1.5
HWD_Cover.fm
Copyright © 2001-2007 ADVA AG Optical Networking. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by
ADVA AG Optical Networking ("ADVA"), the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org), Teodor
Danciu (http://jasperreports.sourceforge.net), and/or other open source software. Some software was cre-
ated using ORBacus for Java by Object-Oriented Concepts, Inc.

Trademarks
The terms ADVA and FSP 3000R7 are trademarks or registered trademarks of ADVA in the United States,
Germany and/or other countries. All other company, product, or service mentioned in this document may
be trademarks or service marks of ADVA or their respective owner.

Patents
The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of AD-
VA. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents.

Disclaimers
The content of this document could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors, and is subject
to change at any time without notice. Reliance on this content is at the relying party's sole risk and will
not create any liability or obligation for ADVA. Any references in this document to non-ADVA publications
and/or non-ADVA Internet sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an
endorsement of those publications and/or Internet sites. The materials within those publications and/or
Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA information, product or service, and use of those
publications and/or Internet sites is at your own risk.

THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IN-
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL ADVA, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR
ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE. THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT, UNLESS A
SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OR THE APPLICABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHER-
WISE.

ADVA AG Optical Networking

Headquarters
Campus Martinsried
Fraunhoferstr. 9 A
82152 Martinsried/Muenchen
Germany
Phone +49(0)89-890665-848
Fax +49(0)89-890665-22848
www.advaoptical.com
HWD_Cover.fm

ii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Table of Contents

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Purpose and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii
Safety Symbol and Message Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Obtaining Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Documentation CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Ordering Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Contact ADVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
EMC, Laser Safety and Compliance Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
WEEE Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

Document Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

Acronyms & Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii

Chapter 0 Introduction

Chapter 1 Shelves and Components

1.1 SH7HU Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 PSU/7HU-DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3 PSU/7HU-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.4 FAN/Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5 SH1HU/2DC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.6 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
HWDTOC.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 2 Core Type Channel Modules

2.1 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.4 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.5 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
2.6 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
2.7 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
2.8 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
2.9 WCC-PC1N-2G7U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
2.10 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
2.11 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
2.12 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Chapter 3 Access Type Channel Modules

3.1 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
3.4 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
3.5 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
3.6 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
3.7 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
3.8 WCA-PCN-2G5U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
3.9 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
3.10 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.11 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
3.12 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

Chapter 4 Enterprise Type Channel Modules

4.1 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
4.4 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Chapter 5 Pluggable Transceivers

5.1 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Chapter 6 Management and Switch Modules

6.1 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
6.2 NCU (NCU2E Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
6.3 SCU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.4 VSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
6.5 RSM-OLM#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
6.6 RSM-SF#1510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
6.7 RSM-SF#1310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
HWDTOC.fm

iv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Table of Contents

6.8 OSCM-V#1630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

6.9 2OSCM-V#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Chapter 7 Optical Filter Modules

7.1 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.5 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.6 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.7 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.8 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.9 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.10 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.11 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.12 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.13 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.14 1CSM+#G1310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.15 1CSM+#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
7.16 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.17 OSFM+#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
7.18 PSM-95/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7.19 1PM/SM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.20 1PM/MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
7.21 2PM/SM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
7.22 2PM/MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Chapter 8 Optical Amplifiers

8.1 EDFA-C-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2 EDFA-L-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3 EDFA-C-S18-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4 EDFA-C-D20-GC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.5 EDFA-C-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.6 EDFA-L-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Chapter 9 Dispersion Compensation Modules

9.1 DCM-P/xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3 DCG-M/xxx/SSMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4 DCF1HU-P Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Chapter 10 Dummy Modules

HWDTOC.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 v

Table of Contents

Appendix A Electrical Cables

A.1 Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.1 AC Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.1.1 AC Power Cords for Operation in Continental Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.1.1.2 AC Power Cable for Operation in UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.1.1.3 AC Power Cord for Operation in North America. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.1.2 DC Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.1.3 Earthing Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.2 Serial and Ethernet Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.2 Serial Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.3 USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.2.4 Ethernet Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.2.4.1 Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.2.4.2 Crossover Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

Appendix B SCU-Intercom-Kit

Index

HWDTOC.fm

vi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 List of Figures

Fig. 1-1: SH7HU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fig. 1-2: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fig. 1-3: Fiber Finger Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Fig. 1-4: Front Cover Attached to the SH7HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Fig. 1-5: Labeling the SH7HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Fig. 1-6: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Fig. 1-7: Example of an SH7HU Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Fig. 1-8: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Supply Values Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Fig. 1-9: Example of the ESD and Laser Safety Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Fig. 1-10: PSU/7HU-DC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Fig. 1-11: PSU/7HU-AC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Fig. 1-12: FAN/Plug-In Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Fig. 1-13: Labeling the Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fig. 1-14: Example of a Fan Unit Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fig. 1-15: Example of a Fan Unit Bar Code Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fig. 1-16: SH1HU/2DC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Fig. 1-17: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Fig. 1-18: Front Panel of the SH1HU/2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Fig. 1-19: Labeling the SH1HU/2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fig. 1-20: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fig. 1-21: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fig. 1-22: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fig. 1-23: ESD and Laser Safety Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fig. 1-24: Example of Placing the ESD and Laser Safety Label on the Rack . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fig. 1-25: SH1HU-P/DCM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Fig. 1-26: SH1HU-P/DCM Equipped with Two DCM-P/40s (Cascade Connection) . . . . . . . 1-24
Fig. 1-27: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Fig. 1-28: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Fig. 2-1: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Fig. 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fig. 2-3: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-4: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-5: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-6: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fig. 2-7: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Fig. 2-8: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-9: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-10: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-11: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Fig. 2-12: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
HWDLOF.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 vii

List of Figures

Fig. 2-13: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Fig. 2-14: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Fig. 2-15: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Fig. 2-16: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Fig. 2-17: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Fig. 2-18: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Fig. 2-19: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Fig. 2-20: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Fig. 2-21: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Fig. 2-22: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Fig. 2-23: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Fig. 2-24: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Fig. 2-25: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Fig. 2-26: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Fig. 2-27: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Fig. 2-28: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Fig. 2-29: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Fig. 2-30: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Fig. 2-31: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Fig. 2-32: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Fig. 2-33: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Fig. 2-34: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Fig. 2-35: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Fig. 2-36: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Fig. 2-37: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Fig. 2-38: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Fig. 2-39: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Fig. 2-40: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Fig. 2-41: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Fig. 2-42: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fig. 2-43: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fig. 2-44: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fig. 2-45: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Fig. 2-46: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Fig. 2-47: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Fig. 2-48: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U-2G5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Fig. 2-49: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Fig. 2-50: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Fig. 2-51: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Fig. 2-52: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Fig. 3-1: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Fig. 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fig. 3-3: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-4: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-5: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-6: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fig. 3-7: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fig. 3-8: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fig. 3-9: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
HWDLOF.fm

viii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 List of Figures

Fig. 3-10: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Fig. 3-11: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fig. 3-12: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fig. 3-13: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fig. 3-14: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Fig. 3-15: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Fig. 3-16: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Fig. 3-17: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Fig. 3-18: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Fig. 3-19: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fig. 3-20: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fig. 3-21: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Fig. 3-22: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Fig. 3-23: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fig. 3-24: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fig. 3-25: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Fig. 3-26: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Fig. 3-27: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Fig. 3-28: WCA-PCN-2G5U Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Fig. 3-29: WCA-PCN-2G5U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Fig. 3-30: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fig. 3-31: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fig. 3-32: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fig. 3-33: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Fig. 3-34: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Fig. 3-35: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Fig. 3-36: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Fig. 3-37: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Fig. 3-38: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Fig. 3-39: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Fig. 3-40: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Fig. 3-41: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Fig. 3-42: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Fig. 3-43: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Fig. 3-44: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Fig. 3-45: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fig. 3-46: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fig. 3-47: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fig. 3-48: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Fig. 3-49: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Fig. 3-50: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Fig. 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Fig. 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Fig. 4-3: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fig. 4-4: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fig. 4-5: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fig. 4-6: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Fig. 4-7: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Fig. 4-8: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
HWDLOF.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 ix

List of Figures

Fig. 4-9: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Fig. 4-10: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Fig. 4-11: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fig. 4-12: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fig. 4-13: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fig. 4-14: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Fig. 4-15: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Fig. 4-16: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Fig. 5-1: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Fig. 5-2: Example of an Electrical SFP Transceiver Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fig. 5-3: Example of a Package Label (SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V/SM/LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fig. 5-4: Example of an SFP Transceiver (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fig. 5-5: Example of an XFP Transceiver (XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fig. 5-6: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Fig. 5-7: SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Fig. 6-1: Example of NCU-A Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

Fig. 6-2: Example of an NCU-A Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Fig. 6-3: Example of an NCU-A Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Fig. 6-4: NCU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Fig. 6-5: Example of an NCU Module Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Fig. 6-6: Example of an NCU Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Fig. 6-7: SCU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Fig. 6-8: Example of an SCU Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Fig. 6-9: Example of an SCU Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Fig. 6-10: VSM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Fig. 6-11: Operation Scheme of a VSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Fig. 6-12: Example of a VSM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Fig. 6-13: Example of a VSM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Fig. 6-14: Example of a VSM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Fig. 6-15: RSM-OLM#1630 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Fig. 6-16: Operating Scheme of an RSM-OLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Fig. 6-17: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Fig. 6-18: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Fig. 6-19: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Fig. 6-20: RSM-SF Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Fig. 6-21: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Fig. 6-22: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Fig. 6-23: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Fig. 6-24: RSM-SF Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Fig. 6-25: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Fig. 6-26: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Fig. 6-27: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Fig. 6-28: RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-SF#1510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Fig. 6-29: OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Fig. 6-30: Operating Scheme of an OSCM-V#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Fig. 6-31: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Fig. 6-32: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Fig. 6-33: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
HWDLOF.fm

x FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 List of Figures

Fig. 6-34: 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Fig. 6-35: Operating Scheme of a 2OSCM-V#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Fig. 6-36: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Fig. 6-37: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Fig. 6-38: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Fig. 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Fig. 7-2: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Fig. 7-3: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fig. 7-4: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fig. 7-5: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fig. 7-6: 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Fig. 7-7: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Fig. 7-8: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Fig. 7-9: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Fig. 7-10: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Fig. 7-11: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Fig. 7-12: 4GSM-#D01-#D16 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Fig. 7-13: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fig. 7-14: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fig. 7-15: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fig. 7-16: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Fig. 7-17: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Fig. 7-18: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Fig. 7-19: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Fig. 7-20: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Fig. 7-21: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Fig. 7-22: 1GSM+#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Fig. 7-23: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Fig. 7-24: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Fig. 7-25: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Fig. 7-26: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Fig. 7-27: 4CSM-#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Fig. 7-28: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Fig. 7-29: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Fig. 7-30: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Fig. 7-31: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Fig. 7-32: 4CSM+#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Fig. 7-33: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Fig. 7-34: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Fig. 7-35: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Fig. 7-36: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Fig. 7-37: 40CSM-#D02-#D32 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Fig. 7-38: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fig. 7-39: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fig. 7-40: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fig. 7-41: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fig. 7-42: 1CSM+#D01-E/W Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Fig. 7-43: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Fig. 7-44: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
HWDLOF.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xi

List of Figures

Fig. 7-45: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44

Fig. 7-46: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Fig. 7-47: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Fig. 7-48: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Fig. 7-49: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Fig. 7-50: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Fig. 7-51: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Front View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Fig. 7-52: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Fig. 7-53: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Fig. 7-54: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Fig. 7-55: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Fig. 7-56: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Front View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Fig. 7-57: 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Fig. 7-58: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Fig. 7-59: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Fig. 7-60: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Fig. 7-61: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Fig. 7-62: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58
Fig. 7-63: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Fig. 7-64: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Fig. 7-65: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Fig. 7-66: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Fig. 7-67: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Fig. 7-68: Operating This
Scheme
pageofintentionally
the 1CSM+#G1310
left blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61
Fig. 7-69: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
Fig. 7-70: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
Fig. 7-71: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
Fig. 7-72: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
Fig. 7-73: 1CSM+#C1510 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Fig. 7-74: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Fig. 7-75: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Fig. 7-76: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Fig. 7-77: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Fig. 7-78: 1CSM+#C1510-E/W Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
Fig. 7-79: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Fig. 7-80: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Fig. 7-81: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Fig. 7-82: OSFM#1630 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72
Fig. 7-83: OSFM#1630 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-73
Fig. 7-84: Example of a OSFM#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
Fig. 7-85: Example of a OSFM#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
Fig. 7-86: Example of a OSFM#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
Fig. 7-87: PSM-95/5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75
Fig. 7-88: PSM-95/5 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-76
Fig. 7-89: Example of a PSM-95/5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Fig. 7-90: Example of a PSM-95/5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Fig. 7-91: Example of a PSM-95/5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Fig. 7-92: 1PM/SM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-78
Fig. 7-93: 1PM/SM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-79
Fig. 7-94: Example of a 1PM/SM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-80
HWDLOF.fm

xii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 List of Figures

Fig. 7-95: Example of a 1PM/SM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80

Fig. 7-96: Example of a 1PM/SM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Fig. 7-97: 1PM/MM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Fig. 7-98: 1PM/MM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Fig. 7-99: Example of a 1PM/MM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Fig. 7-100: Example of a 1PM/MM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Fig. 7-101: Example of a 1PM/MM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Fig. 7-102: 2PM/SM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Fig. 7-103: 2PM/SM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Fig. 7-104: Example of a 2PM/SM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Fig. 7-105: Example of a 2PM/SM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Fig. 7-106: Example of a 2PM/SM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Fig. 7-107: 2PM/MM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
Fig. 7-108: 2PM/MM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
Fig. 7-109: Example of a 2PM/MM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Fig. 7-110: Example of a 2PM/MM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Fig. 7-111: Example of a 2PM/MM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Fig. 8-1: EDFA-C-S10 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Fig. 8-2: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Fig. 8-3: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fig. 8-4: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fig. 8-5: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fig. 8-6: EDFA-L-S10 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Fig. 8-7: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-L-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Fig. 8-8: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fig. 8-9: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fig. 8-10: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fig. 8-11: EDFA-C-S18-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Fig. 8-12: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-S18-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Fig. 8-13: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Fig. 8-14: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Fig. 8-15: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Fig. 8-16: EDFA-C-D20-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Fig. 8-17: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-D20-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Fig. 8-18: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Fig. 8-19: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Fig. 8-20: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Fig. 8-21: EDFA-C-D17-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Fig. 8-22: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Fig. 8-23: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Fig. 8-24: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Fig. 8-25: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Fig. 8-26: EDFA-L-D17-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fig. 8-27: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-L-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fig. 8-28: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fig. 8-29: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Fig. 8-30: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Fig. 9-1: Example of a DCM-P/80 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

HWDLOF.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xiii

List of Figures

Fig. 9-2: Example of DCM-P/80 Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Fig. 9-3: Example of a DCM-P/80 Front Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fig. 9-4: Example of a DCM-P/80 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fig. 9-5: Example of a DCM-P/80 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fig. 9-6: Example of DCF-M/010/SSMF Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Fig. 9-7: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Fig. 9-8: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Fig. 9-9: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Fig. 9-10: Example of DCG-M/060/SSMF Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Fig. 9-11: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fig. 9-12: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fig. 9-13: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fig. 9-14: Front View DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Fig. 10-1: View of a DM/5HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1

Fig. A-1: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to CEE 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Fig. A-2: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to BS 1363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Fig. A-3: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Fig. A-4: DC Power Cord Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Fig. A-5: Example of an Equipment End of a 2-Conductor DC Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Fig. A-6: Example of an Earthing Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Fig. A-7: Pin Positioning of a Male RJ-45 Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

Fig. B-1: Example of an SCU-Intercom-Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Fig. B-2: Connecting Patch Cables to the SCU or SCU-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

HWDLOF.fm

xiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 List of Tables

Table 2-1: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Table 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2-3: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 2-4: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Table 2-5: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Table 2-6: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Table 2-7: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Table 2-8: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Table 2-9: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Table 3-1: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Table 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-3: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-4: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-5: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-6: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-7: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-8: WCA-PCN-2G5U Optical Port Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Table 3-9: WCA-PCN-2G5U LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Table 3-10: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Table 3-11: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Table 3-12: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Table 3-13: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Table 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Table 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-3: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-4: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Table 5-1: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Table 6-1: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Table 6-2: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Management Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Table 6-3: Male SUB-D9 Connector Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B, NCU-GDPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-4: Mini-AB USB Type Receptacle Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B,
NCU-GDPS) 6-16
Table 6-5: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Table 6-6: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Factory-Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-7: NCU Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Table 6-8: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-9: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
HWDLOT.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xv

List of Tables

Table 6-10: NCU Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22

Table 6-11: SCU Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Table 6-12: VSM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Table 6-13: VSM Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Table 6-14: RSM-OLM#1630 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Table 6-15: Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Table 6-16: RSM-SF#1510 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Table 6-17: Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Table 6-18: RSM-SF#1310 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Table 6-19: RSM-SF#1310 Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
Table 6-20: OSCM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Table 6-21: OSCM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44

Table 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Table 7-2: 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Table 7-3: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Table 7-4: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Channel Group Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Table 7-5: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Table 7-6: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Table 7-7: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Table 7-8: 1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Channel Group Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Table 7-9: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Table 7-10: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Table 7-11: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
Table 7-12: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Table 7-13: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Table 7-14: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
Table 7-15: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Table 7-16: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Table 7-17: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Table 7-18: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Table 7-19: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Table 7-20: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Table 7-21: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53
Table 7-22: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Table 7-23: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Table 7-24: 1CSM+#G1310 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Table 7-25: 1CSM+ for CWDM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
Table 7-26: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Table 7-27: OSFM#1630 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72
Table 7-28: PSM-95/5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75
Table 7-29: 1PM/SM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-78
Table 7-30: 1PM/MM Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-81
Table 7-31: 2PM/SM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-84
Table 7-32: 2PM/MM Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-88

Table 8-1: EDFA-C-S10 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Table 8-2: EDFA-L-S10 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Table 8-3: EDFA-C-S18-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Table 8-4: EDFA-C-D20-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
HWDLOT.fm

xvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 List of Tables

Table 8-5: EDFA-C-D17-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Table 8-6: EDFA-L-D17-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Table 9-1: DCM-P/xx Module Variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Table 9-2: DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-3: DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Module Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-4: DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Table 9-5: DCF1HU-P Shelf Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Table 10-1: Dummy Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Table A-1: Wire Coding and Specifications of the 2-Conductor DC Power Cords . . . . . . . . .A-6
Table A-2: Wire Coding and Specifications of a 3-Conductor DC Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Table A-3: Serial and Ethernet Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Table A-4: Wiring for Serial Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-5: Standard USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-6: Mini-USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-7: Ethernet Cable Types Used by the FSP 3000R7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Table A-8: RJ-45 Connector Wiring Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Table A-9: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Straight-Through Cable Pinout
according to 568B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Table A-10: Example of a 1000Base-T Straight-Through Cable Pinout according to 568B . . A-14
Table A-11: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Crossover Cable Pinout according to 568B A-14
Table A-12: Example of a 1000Base-T Crossover Cable Pinout according to 568B . . . . . . . A-15
HWDLOT.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xvii

List of Tables

This page intentionally left blank

HWDLOT.fm

xviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Preface

The Preface gives general information for the effective use of the Fiber
Service Platform 3000R7 (FSP 3000R7) Hardware Description.

This publication is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty

for accuracy and completeness.

The FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description replaces Part I of the FSP 3000R7
Reference Guide.
Note

Purpose and Scope

The purpose of this documentation is to provide general descriptions of
the FSP 3000R7 hardware components and their anticipated uses.

Audience
This documentation is primarily intended to be read by any persons who
are not familiar with the FSP 3000R7 system. It is also intended for
trained persons requiring details on hardware components and for readers
who want to achieve better understanding of the system components.

Organization
This documentation is organized as follows:

“Preface”
Describes the purpose, audience, organization and the conventions, that
are used throughout this documentation. It lists related documentation
that are referenced in this guide, and other resources that you can use to
learn more about FSP 3000R7. In addition, important ADVA Optical Net-
working AG (ADVA) contact details, EMC, Laser Safety and Compliance
Statements as well as further useful information are provided.

“Document Revision History”

This section lists significant changes (additions, corrections, etc.) made
in the separate issues of this documentation.
HWD_Preface.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xix

Hardware Description

“Acronyms & Abbreviations”

This section contains the acronyms, abbreviations and symbols used
throughout this documentation. The terms and their spelled out forms or
their meaning are listed in alphabetical order.

Chapter 0 “Introduction”
This chapter gives an of the FSP 3000R7 system components.

Chapter 1 “Shelves and Components”

This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the various shelves that
comprise the FSP 3000R7, such as the 1HU Shelf, the 7HU Shelf and the
DCM Shelf. Detailed information about the power supplies and the fan
unit are also provided.

Chapter 2 “Core Type Channel Modules”

This chapter provides the general descriptions of all core type channel
modules available, their main features, service types and how the mod-
ules operate. Also provided are details of the naming conventions.

Chapter 3 “Access Type Channel Modules”

This chapter provides the general descriptions of all access type channel
modules available, their main features, service types and how the mod-
ules operate. Also provided are details of the naming conventions.

Chapter 4 “Enterprise Type Channel Modules”

This chapter provides the general descriptions of all enterprise type chan-
nel modules available, their main features, service types and how the
modules operate.

Chapter 5 “Pluggable Transceivers”

This chapter provides a general description of the pluggable transceiver
types used by the FSP 3000R7 channel modules, discusses the naming
conventions and provides identification information.

Chapter 6 “Management and Switch Modules”

This chapter describes the key features and functionality of the manage-
ment modules, the optical supervisory channel modules and the optical
protection switch modules available.

Chapter 7 “Optical Filter Modules”

This chapter provides functional descriptions of the various types of pas-
sive optical modules, such as channel splitter modules (CSMs), group
splitter modules (GSMs), band splitter modules (BSMs), optical superviso-
ry filter module (OSFM) and protection modules (PMs) available.

Chapter 8 “Optical Amplifiers”

This chapter describes the functionality and the features of the fixed
pump power Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers as well as the gain-controlled
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier types available.
HWD_Preface.fm

xx FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Preface

Chapter 9 “Dispersion Compensation Modules”

This chapter describes the key features and function of the Dispersion
Compensation Modules (DCMs) used by the FSP 3000R7.

Chapter 10 “Dummy Modules”

This chapter describes the dummy modules used by the shelves.

Appendix A “Electrical Cables”

Appendix A provides general information about the power cables and the
grounding kit as well as the serial and Ethernet cables required for the
installation of a 7HU Shelf or 1HU Shelf.

Appendix B “SCU-Intercom-Kit”
Appendix B provides general information about the SCU-Intercom-Kit re-
quired for the interconnection the Shelf Control Units.

Appendix C “Power Input Fuses of the Modules”

Appendix C lists all FSP 3000R7 modules having a power input fuse. For
the purposes of information, details on fuse types, ratings and position
on the module boards are given.

“Index”
The Index provides a list of the major terms, arranged alphabetically to
help the reader more quickly and easily find specific information in this
documentation.
HWD_Preface.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxi

Hardware Description

Document Conventions
Typographic Conventions
The documentation follows these typographic conventions:

Convention Description
boldface font Indicates keywords and emphasized words when appearing in
main text areas. All warnings are in boldface font.
italic font Indicates a reference to a chapter, section, figure, table or
related documentation when appearing in main text areas.
All notes and side heads are in italic font.
boldface italic font All cautions and side head titles are in boldface italic font.
courier Everything you have to type into your computer is in
courier.
[] Elements in square brackets are optional.
| Alternative elements are separated by a vertical bar.
^ The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Control - for example,
the key combination ^D means that you have to hold down
the Control key while you press the D key.
< > References are enclosed in angle brackets, for example:
<Esc> The escape key, marked Esc
<Return> The Return key, marked ↵
<username> This reference, including the angle brackets, is
replaced by the appropriate user name.
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords.
““ Double inverted commas are used to enclose quoted text or a
cross-reference title.
• (bullet symbol) Used in bulleted list of items where the sequence of items is
not relevant.
1., 2., 3. ...or These numbering styles are used in lists of items where the
a., b., c. ... sequence of items is relevant, e.g. the steps listed in a
procedure
* or 1, 2 etc. Are used to point to table footnotes. The markers in the text
are arranged as continuous superscript numbers. Footnote
text (in smaller typeface) is placed at the bottom of a table
and starts with a superscript number.
Change bar (vertical Visually identifies new or changed material (text, figures,
black line usually in tables etc.)
the margin)
-> Refers you to additional information.

Safety Symbol and Message Conventions

The safety alert symbols with the appropriate signal words and the note
signs below are used throughout this documentation to identify
warnings, cautions and notes.
HWD_Preface.fm

xxii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Preface

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to

WARNING the risks caused by electricity. These risks could result in death or
serious injury if the instruction is ignored or not followed
correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to a

Caution potentially hazardous situation/condition. This situation/condition,
may result in minor or moderate injury, if the instruction is ignored
or not followed correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

Caution risk of possible laser radiation. This risk may result in serious eye
injury, if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

Caution possibility of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Damage can occur, if the ESD-prevention instructions are ignored or not
followed correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk
Caution of equipment damage, malfunction, process interruption or negative
impacts on surroundings. These events can occur, if the instruction is
ignored or not followed correctly.

A symbol that draws attention to the necessity and importance of

Notice carefully reading all instructions before any installation or operation
takes place. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

Notice proper disposal of waste electrical or electronic equipment and its
components. Disregard of the instruction can threaten the environment.
HWD_Preface.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxiii

Hardware Description

This symbol accompanies any statement that the user should make a note
of.
Note

A symbol that draws attention to supplemental information and helpful

recommendations that should be observed to ensure smooth operation of
the equipment.

Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for additional information about the
FSP 3000R7 system:
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Safety Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Installation Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 User Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Troubleshooting Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Module and System Specification
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Product Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Detailed System Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Detailed Procedures
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Deployment Rules
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Element Manager
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Network Planner

Obtaining Documentation
World Wide Web
You can access the most current ADVA documentation on the World Wide
Web via your partner login at:

http://www.advaoptical.com/

Documentation CD-ROM
The above mentioned documentation set is available on a CD-ROM which
is delivered with your product. The documentation CD-ROM is updated
with each product release and may be more current than printed
documentation.
HWD_Preface.fm

xxiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Preface

Ordering Documentation
ADVA Partners can order the FSP 3000R7 documentation set and
additional literature through a local ADVA Optical Networking AG sales
representative. For more current product release information, please refer
to ADVA’s home page, or contact ADVA’s Technical Support. See sections
“Obtaining Technical Assistance”, p. xxv and “Contact ADVA”, p. xxvi for
contact details.

Documentation Feedback
We want our FSP 3000R7 documentation to be as helpful as possible.
Feedback regarding the guide is therefore always welcome.

You can e-mail your comments/suggestions to:

[email protected]

To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:

ADVA AG Optical Networking

Technical Documentation
Maerzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker
Germany

We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the

quality of the guide.

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance
agreements are available for ADVA Optical Networking AG products
through your ADVA distribution channel. Our service options include:
• 7 X 24 telephone support
• Web-based support tools
• On-site support
• Technical training, both on-site and at ADVA facilities in Germany
and the USA
• Expedited repair service
• Extended hardware warranty service
Partner Login ADVA’s partner login provides a suite of interactive, networking services
that provide immediate access to ADVA information and resources at any
time, from anywhere in the world. This highly integrated internet
application is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with ADVA.

The partner login’s broad range of features and services help customers
and partners to streamline business processes and improve productivity.
HWD_Preface.fm

Through your partner login, you will find information tailored especially

Document Version 7.1.5 xxv

Hardware Description

for you, including networking solutions, services, and programs. In

addition, you can resolve technical issues with online support services,
download and test software packages, and order ADVA training materials.

Access your partner login via the ADVA home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com

E-mail questions regarding the partner login to:

[email protected]
Technical Support Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract
customers who need technical assistance with an ADVA product that is
under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract. To display ADVA’s
Technical Support web site that includes all contact information, go to
ADVA’s home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com

and select the “Support” button.

To contact ADVA by E-mail, use one of the following addresses:

Europe, Middle East, Africa: [email protected]

North America: [email protected]
Asia: [email protected]

Contact ADVA

ADVA AG Optical Networking Tel: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 0

Headquarters Fax: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 199
Fraunhoferstraße 9a [email protected]
82152 Martinsried/Munich
Germany

ADVA Optical Networking Inc. Tel: +1 201 258 8300

One International Blvd, Suite 705 Fax: +1 201 684 9200
Mahwah, NJ 07495 [email protected]
USA

ADVA Optical Networking Corp. Tel: +81 (0)3 5408 5891

World Trade Center Building 4F Fax: +81 (0)3 5408 5899
2-4-1 Hamamatsu-cho [email protected]
Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-6104
Japan
HWD_Preface.fm

xxvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Preface

EMC, Laser Safety and Compliance Statements

WEEE Compliance Statement

The FSP 3000R7 product falls under the category 3

(IT and telecommunications equipment) in Annex
1A of the WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC of the
European Parliament. For the purposes of this
directive, the FSP 3000R7 product is marked with
the waste management symbol according to EN
50419 shown on the right. This symbol indicates
that the product must be disposed of as waste
electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The
marking also serves to clearly identify the
manufacturer of the product. For components
which cannot be appropriately marked because of the size, the symbol is
printed on their packaging.

It is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing

it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of WEEE. The
separate collection and recycling of your WEEE at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a
manner that protects human health and the environment.

ADVA Optical Networking AG (ADVA) complies with the requirements of

the Directive 2002/96/EC on WEEE and Directive 2002/95/EC on RoHS as
well as the respective national laws.

ADVA's WEEE registration number for Germany is: DE 49592479

HWD_Preface.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxvii

Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_Preface.fm

xxviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Document Revision History

This document revision history lists the locations of, and the descriptions of significant
document changes (additions, corrections, etc.) made in the separate issues of this
documentation. They reflect the corresponding product release. When the changes are extensive,
a general statement giving the nature of the revisions is provided.

Document Product
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference Releases
7.1 March 2007 Reference Guide R. 7.0.6 was split into two Hardware Descriptions 7.1
manuals: Hardware Descriptions and Detailed Detailed Procedures
Procedures
Preface revised Preface, p. 1-xix
Introduction revised Chapter 0, p. 0-1
Description of SH7HU slightly revised; Section 1.1, p. 1-2
LED descriptions removed
Description of PSU/7HU-AC: LED descriptions Section 1.3, p. 1-12
removed
Description of FAN/Plug-In revised; labeling Section 1.4, p. 1-15
added; LED descriptions removed
Description of SH1HU/2DC revised; LED Section 1.5, p. 1-18
description removed
Description of SH1HU-P/DCM revised Section 1.6, p. 1-24
Table 2-1, p. 2-2 revised; LED description Chapter 2, p. 2-1,
removed
WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx: XFP types added Section 2.1, p. 2-5
Description of WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx revised; Section 2.4, p. 2-15
XFP types added
Description of 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Section 2.6, p. 2-21
added
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx: SFP types added Section 2.7, p. 2-26
Description of WCC-PC1N-2G7U added Section 2.9, p. 2-33
WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx: SFP types added Section 2.10, p. 2-38
Description of WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Cxxxx replaced Section 2.11, p. 2-42
by description of WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
Description of 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5: SFP types Section 2.12, p. 2-44
added
Table 3-1, p. 3-2 revised; LED description Chapter 3, p. 3-1
removed
HWD_History.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xxix

Hardware Description

Document Product
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference Releases
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx: XFP types added Section 3.1, p. 3-5
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx: SFP types added: Section 3.3, p. 3-11
Connector labeling on the faceplate changed
(Figure 3-9)
Description of 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx revised, Section 3.5, p. 3-18
SFP types added
Description of 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx revised Section 3.6, p. 3-24
Description of 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx added Section 3.7, p. 3-26
WCA-PCN-2G5U: SFP types added Section 3.8, p. 3-28
Description of 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 revised, Section 3.9, p. 3-33
SFP types added
Description of 2TCA-PCN-622+2G5 revised, Section 3.10, p. 3-38
SFP types added
Description of the SCU-E removed Chapter 4, p. 4-1
Description of NCU renamed as NCU-A, NCU-B Section 6.1, p. 6-13
and NCU-GDPS and revised; LED description of
the modules removed
Description of NCU (new module) added Section 6.2, p. 6-19
LED description of the SCU removed Section 6.3, p. 6-24
Description of 40CSM-DMX-#D02-#D32 and Chapter 7, p. 7-1
40CSM-DMX-#D33-#D63 (former Section 3.9)
removed: LED descriptions removed
Description of 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 revised; Section 7.1, p. 7-5
Description of 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.2, p. 7-8
Description of 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.3, p. 7-12
Description of 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.4, p. 7-16
Description of 1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.5, p. 7-20
Description of 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.6, p. 7-24
Description of 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.7, p. 7-30
Description of 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy updated: Section 7.8, p. 7-36
module renamed; channel allocation of ports C1
changed;
Description of 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W revised; Section 7.9, p. 7-41
Description of 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 revised; Section 7.10, p. 7-45
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610: text beneath the side Section 7.11, p. 7-48
head “description” modified
Description of 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy revised; Section 7.12, p. 7-52
Description of 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 added Section 7.13, p. 7-56
Description of 1CSM+#G1310 revised; Section 7.14, p. 7-60
Description of 1CSM+#Cxxxx revised; Section 7.15, p. 7-64
Description of 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W revised; Section 7.16, p. 7-68
Description of OSFM#1630 revised; Section 7.17, p. 7-72
Description of PSM-95/5 revised; Section 7.18, p. 7-75
HWD_History.fm

Description of 1PM/SM revised Section 7.19, p. 7-78

Description of 2PM/SM revised Section 7.20, p. 7-81

xxx FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Document Revision History

Document Product
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference Releases
Description of 1PM/MM revised Section 7.21, p. 7-84
Description of 2PM/MM revised Section 7.22, p. 7-88
LED description of the EDFA-C-S10 removed. Section 8.1, p. 8-3
LED description of the EDFA-L-S10 removed. Section 8.2, p. 8-6
LED description of the EDFA-C-S18-GC removed. Section 8.3, p. 8-9
LED description of the EDFA-C-D20-GC removed. Section 8.4, p. 8-12
LED description of the EDFA-C-D17-GC removed. Section 8.5, p. 8-16
LED description of the EDFA-L-D17-GC removed. Section 8.6, p. 8-20
Description of DCM-P/xx added (includes former Section 9.1, p. 9-2
descriptions of DCM-P/20, DCM-P/40 and
DCM-P/80)
Description of DCF-M/xxx/yyyy added Section 9.2, p. 9-5
Description of DCG-M/xxx/SSMF added Section 9.3, p. 9-8
Description of DCF1HU-P Shelf added Section 9.4, p. 9-11
Description of DC power cords revised Appendix A, p. A-5
Description of USB cable revised Appendix A, p. A-10
7.1.5 June 2007 Description of fiber finger set added Section 1.1, p. 1-2 7.1.5
Description of WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 added Section 2.2, p. 2-9
Description of WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 added Section 2.3, p. 2-13
USB port of NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS slightly Section 6.1, p. 6-13
revised
USB port of NCU slightly revised Section 6.2, p. 6-19
Description of AC and DC power cords revised Appendix A, p. A-1
Labeling of all core channel access channel, Chapter 2, Chapter 3,
enterprise channel, management, switch, optical Chapter 4, Chapter 6,
filter, optical amplifier and dispersion Chapter 7, Chapter 8 and
compensation modules revised Chapter 9
HWD_History.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxi

Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_History.fm

xxxii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms & Abbreviations

This section contains the acronyms, abbreviations and symbols used in the Hardware Description.
The terms and their spelled out forms or their meaning are listed in alphabetical order.

Symbols/Symbols/Numerics
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Symbols/Numerics

% per cent
°C degree Celsius
°F degree Fahrenheit
ø diameter
Ω ohm (SI unit of electrical impedance or, in the direct current case, electrical
resistance)
“ inch (a unit of length)
10 GbE 10 Gigabit Ethernet
10 GbE WAN PHY 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN physical layer
10 GE LAN 10 Gigabit Ethernet used in Local Area Network
10 GE WAN 10 Gigabit Ethernet used in Wide Area Network
1000BASE-T 1000 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 5e cable
100BASE-TX 100 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 5e cable (an Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3)
10BASE-T 10 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 5 cable (an Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3)
10G 10 Gigabit
10G FC 10 Gigabit Fiber Channel
10GbE LAN PHY 10 Gigabit Ethernet LAN physical layer
1CSM+#Cxxxx 1-port Channel Splitter Module adds/drops a single channel out of the CWDM
spectrum.
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W East/West CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (It adds/drops a single channel to/
HWD_Abbr.fm

out of the CWDM channel spectrum.)

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xxxiii

Acronyms and Abbreviations

1CSM+#Dxx-E/W East/West DWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (It adds/drops a single channel to/
out of the DWDM channel spectrum.)
1CSM+#G1310 Single Channel Splitter Module (It adds/drops the broadband 1310-nm channel to/
out of the CWDM channel spectrum.)
1G 1 Gigabit
1G CL 1 Gigabit Coupling Link
1G CL 1 Gigabit Coupling Link
1G FC 1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1.0625 Gbit/s)
1G FICON 1 Gigabit FICON
1GSM+ 1-port Group Splitter Module with upgrade port
1HU Shelf 1 HU-high equipment shelf
1PM/MM Single-port Protection Module Multimode
1PM/SM Single-port Protection Module Single Mode
2.5G 2.5 Gigabit
2ABSM- 2-port Band Splitter Module (It splits the 8 CWDM channels into two groups of 4
channels and vice versa.)
2BSM- 2-port Band Splitter Module (It splits the C-band or the L-band into red and blue
subbands and vice versa.)
2BSM-#D01-#D32 2-port Red/Blue Splitter C-Band
2BSM-#D33-#D64 2-port Red/Blue Splitter L-Band
2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
2CLSM C-Band/L-Band Splitter (short form for 2CLSM-#D01-#D64)
2CLSM-#D01-#D64 C-Band/L-Band Splitter
2G CL 2 Gbit/s Coupling Link
2G FC 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2.125 Gbit/s)
2G FICON 2 Gigabit FICON
2OSCM-V#1630 Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and two optical
ports; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of 1630 nm
2PM/MM 2-port Protection Module Multimode
2PM/SM 2-port Protection Module Single Mode
2R reshaping and reamplifying (signal regeneration)
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 access Type 2-port Multirate TDM channel module with two client and two network
pluggable interfaces, max. 1 Gbit/s client port data rate, aggregated data rate on
the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 access type 2-port multirate TDM channel module with two client and two network
pluggable interfaces, max. 622 Mbit/s client port data rate, aggregated data rate on
the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 3-port Band Splitter Module
3R reshaping, reamplifying and retiming (signal regeneration)
40CSM-#D02-#D32 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter C-band
40CSM-#D34-#D64 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter L-band
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
4CSM- 4-port Channel Splitter Module for CWDM or DWDM
4CSM+ 4-port Channel Splitter Module for DWDM with upgrade port
4G FC 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel (4.250 Gbit/s)
HWD_Abbr.fm

4GSM-#D01-#D16 4-port Group Splitter Blue Band (C-Band)

xxxiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

4GSM-#D17-#D32 4-port Group Splitter Red Band (C-Band)

4GSM-#D33-#D48 4-port Group Splitter Blue Band (L-Band)
4GSM-#D49-#D64 4-port Group Splitter Red Band (L-Band)
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
4TCA-LS+1G3-V access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module for very-long reach fiber links;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s (collective name)
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module with four integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface
on the network side; aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module with four integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM inter-
face on the network side; aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated long reach CWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM interface on the net-
work side; maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s (collective name)
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM interface on the net-
work side; maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the
network port of 10 Gbit/s (collective name)
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface on the network side;
maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port
of 10 Gbit/s
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port
of 10 Gbit/s
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 core Type 4-port multirate TDM channel module with four client and two network
pluggable interfaces; max. client data rate of 2.125 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on
the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01- core type 4-port TDM channel module with pluggable client interfaces and one
32 tunable network interface
7HU Shelf 7 HU-high equipment shelf
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 8-port Channel Splitter Module with upgrade port is used to split/combine 8 CWDM
channels each and one gray channel.
8GSM 8-port group splitter module (short form for 8GSM-#D01-#D32 and 8GSM-#D33-
#D64)
8GSM-#D01-#D32 8-Port Group Splitter Module C-band
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxv

Acronyms and Abbreviations

8GSM-#D33-#D64 8-Port Group Splitter Module L-band

8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable interfaces on the
client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM interface on the
network side; maximum client data rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user
selectable; aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s (collective name)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable interfaces on the
client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface on the network
side; maximum client data rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable interfaces on the
client side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM interface on the network
side; maximum client data rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module for very-long reach fiber links;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s (collective name)
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module with eight integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM inter-
face on the network side
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module with eight integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM inter-
face on the network side

A
A ampere (SI base unit of electric current, or amount of electric charge per second)
2
A s Ampere squared seconds (a measure of heat energy supplied to a circuit while the
fuse is clearing a fault.)
AC alternating current
acc. according to
ADVA ADVA Optical Networking AG
AID access identifier
AINS automatic in-service
AIS alarm indication signal
ALS automatic laser shutdown
ANSI American National Standards Institute
approx. approximately
APS automatic protection switching
ARC alarm reporting control
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASTA UK-based certification organization ()body for electrical testing and product safety
approval
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM 155 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 155 Mbit/s
HWD_Abbr.fm

xxxvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

ATM 622 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 622 Mbit/s

AWG American wire gauge (standard method of denoting wire diameter, especially for
electrically conducting wires)

B
B1 Bit Interleaved Parity covers the complete frame including overhead
B2 Bit Interleaved Parity covers payload area + Multiplexer Section Overhead
BI_DA- Bi-directional Data pair -A (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DA+ Bi-directional Data pair +A (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DB- Bi-directional Data pair -B (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DB+ Bi-directional Data pair +B (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DC- Bi-directional Data pair -C (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DC+ Bi-directional Data pair +C (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DD- Bi-directional Data pair -D (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DD+ Bi-directional Data pair +D (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BS British Standard (specifies the type of domestic AC power plugs and sockets most
commonly used in the United Kingdom and Ireland)
BSM band splitter module (collective name)

C
ca. circa (approximately)
Cat 5 Category 5 cable (used for both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX Ethernet)
Cat 5e Enhanced version of Cat 5 cable (used for both 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T
Ethernet)
Cat 6 Category 6 cable (used for both 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet)
CCC China Compulsory Certification (certification mark)
CDR clock and data recovery
CEC Canadian Electrical Code
CH channel
ch. chapter
CIR committed information rate
CL coupling link
CLEI common language equipment identifier (registered trademark of Telcordia)
CLI command line interface
CLNP connectionless network protocol
HWD_Abbr.fm

cm centimeter (SI derived unit of length in the metric system)

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxvii

Acronyms and Abbreviations

CPE customer premises equipment

CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSF client signal fail
CSM channel splitter module (collective name)
CTS Clear To Send (serial connection)
CV coding violations
CWDM coarse wavelength division multiplexing

D
D- differential data signal in pinout of USB data cable (data - signal)
D+ differential data signal in pinout of USB data cable (data + signal)
dB decibel
dBm decibel milliwatt
DC direct current
DCCm digital communication channel for multiplexer section
DCCr digital communication channel for regenerator section
DCD Data Carrier Detect (serial connection)
DCF dispersion compensating fiber
DCF1HU-P Dispersion Compensation Module Shelf with an integrated DCF spool, rack-
mountable, 1 HU high
DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability, and /yyyy
relates to the DCF type.
DCG-M/060/SSMF Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Compensation Module that compensates for 60 km
of G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber
DCG-M/100/SSMF Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Compensation Module that compensates for 100 km
of G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability.
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name)
DCM-P/20 Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 20km that compensates for 20 km of
G. 652 fiber
DCM-P/40 Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 40km that compensates for 40 km of
G. 652 fiber
DCM-P/80 Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 80km that compensates for 80 km of
G. 652 fiber
DCM-P/xx Plug-In Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name); The part/xx of the
module name refers to the compensation capability.
DCN data communication network
DE Disparity Errors
DEMUX (1) demultiplexer
HWD_Abbr.fm

(2) demultiplexing

xxxviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

DFB laser distributed feed-back laser

DSA digital signature algorithm key encryption scheme
DSC digital supervisory channel
DSR Data Set Ready (serial connection)
DTR Data Terminal Ready (serial connection)
DW digital wrapper
DWDM dense wavelength division multiplexing

E
e.g. for example (exempli gratia)
e/o electrical to optical conversion
ECC embedded communication channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (collective name)
EDFA-C-D17-GC optical amplifier, double stage 17 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled (C-
Band)
EDFA-C-D20-GC optical amplifier, double stage 20 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled (C-
Band)
EDFA-C-S10 group-based, fixed pump power, C-Band EDFA module, single stage, 10 dBm
maximum output power
EDFA-C-S18-GC optical amplifier, single stage 18 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled
(C-Band)
EDFA-L-D17-GC optical amplifier, double stage 17 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled
(L-Band)
EDFA-L-S10 optical amplifier, single stage 10 dBm with maximum output power (L-Band)
EFEC enhanced forward error correction
EIA Electronics Industry Alliance
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EMI electromagnetic interference
EN European Standard
EOC embedded operations channel
EPT error propagation code
EQPT equipment
ESCON enterprise system connection
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxix

Acronyms and Abbreviations

F
FAN/Plug-In plug-in fan unit
FC (1) Fibre Channel (protocol)
(2) fixed clock
FCU Fan Control Unit
FDDI fiber distributed data interface -> Glossary
FE fast Ethernet
FEC forward error correction
FEND far end
FICON fiber connection (protocol)
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSP Fiber Service Platform
FSP 3000R7 Fiber Service Platform 3000R7
FSP EM FSP Element Manager
FSP NM FSP Network Manager
FSP NP FSP Network Planner
FTP file transfer protocol
FWP firmware package

G
G Gigabit
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
Gbit/s gigabits per second (a unit of data transfer rate equal to 1.000.000.000 bits per
second)
GCC0 generic communication channel 0 in the OTU overhead
GFEC standard FEC
GFP Generic Framing Procedure according to ITU-T G.7041
GFP-F Generic Framing Procedure, frame-mapped
GFP-T Generic Framing Procedure, transparent-mapped
GHz gigahertz = 109 Hz (SI unit of frequency)
GND Signal ground (in pinout of serial cable, USB data cable or Ethernet cables)
GSM group splitter module
HWD_Abbr.fm

xl FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

H
H height
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control -> Glossary
HP Horizontal Pitch (1 HP = 5.08 mm = 1/5 in)
HST hot standby
HU Height Unit (1 HU = 44.45 mm = 1.75 in)
HW Hardware
Hz hertz (SI base unit of frequency)

I
i.e. that is (id est)
I/O Input/Output
I2t melting integral or total clearing (fuse characteristic)
ID (1) identification (identification number)
(2) identification pin (in pinout of USB data cable)
In rated current
in. inch (unit of length)
IP internet protocol
IPv4 internet protocol version 4
ITU International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T ITU Telecommunications Standardization Sector

J
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xli

Acronyms and Abbreviations

K
kg kilogram (SI base unit of mass)
km kilometer (SI unit of length in the metric system)

L
LAD layer adjacency discovery
LAN Local Area Network
LC type of fiber-optic connector
LCD liquid crystal display
LDCC line digital communication channel
LEAF Large Effective Area Fiber
LED light emitting diode
LLP loss of link pulse
LOC Loss of clock
LOF Loss of frame
LOS Loss of signal

M
m meter (SI base unit of length in the metric system)
M3 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M3 (nominal diameter = 3.0 mm)
M3.5 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M3 (nominal diameter = 3.5 mm)
M4 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M4 (nominal diameter = 4.0 mm)
M6 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M6 (nominal diameter = 6.0 mm)
M6x12 Cap screw with M6 thread and threaded length of 12 mm
M6x16 Cap screw with M6 thread and threaded length of 16 mm
MAC Media Access Control
MAN metropolitan area network
max. maximum
Mbit/s megabits per second (a unit of data transfer rates equal to 1.000.000 bits per
second)
HWD_Abbr.fm

MEA mismatch equipment alarm

xlii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

mi mile, miles (a unit of length)

MIB management information base -> Glossary
min. minimum
mm millimeter (SI derived unit of length in the metric system)
mm2 square millimeter (unit of area, derived from the SI base unit of the meter)
MOD module
ms millisecond (SI unit of time which is one thousandth of a second)
µm micrometer or micron (SI unit of length in the metric system, equal to one
millionth of a meter, which is one-thousandth of a millimeter)
MSA Multi-Sourcing Agreement standard
MSP multiplexer section protection
MU/PC Type of fiber-optic connector with physical contact
MUX (1) multiplexer
(2) multiplexing
mV millivolt (SI derived unit of electric potential difference, equal to one thousandth
of a volt)
mW milliwatt (SI derived unit for measuring power, equal to one thousandth of a watt)

N
n.c. not connected
NAT network address translation
NCU Network Control Unit
NCU-A Network Element Control Unit; does not include RTU licence; supports CWDM and
access type channel modules only
NCU-B Network Element Control Unit, includes RTU licence; supports both CWDM and
DWDM using access and core type channel modules
NCU-GDPS Network Control Unit-Generic Data Package Service; includes RTU licence; supports
both CWDM and DWDM using access, core and enterprise type channel modules
NE network element
NEBS Network Equipment Building Standards
NEC United States National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEND near end
nm nanometer (SI derived unit of length in the metric system, equal to one billionth of
a meter)
NMS Network Management System
NP Network Planner
NPCUP Network Protected Client Unprotected Protection
NSAP network service access point
NTP Network Time Protocol
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xliii

Acronyms and Abbreviations

O
o/e optical to electrical conversion
OC-1 optical carrier level 1 (with 51.84 Mbit/s)
OC-12 optical carrier level 12 (with 622 Mbit/s)
OC-192 optical carrier level 192 (with 9.953 Gbit/s)
OC-3 optical carrier level 3 (with 155 Mbit/s)
OC-48 optical carrier level 48 (with 2.5 Gbit/s)
ODU optical channel data unit
ODU1 Optical Channel Data Unit (2.666 Gbit/s)
ODU2 Optical Channel Data Unit (10.7092 Gbit/s)
OPR optical power receive
OPT optical power transmit
OSA optical spectrum analyzer
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
OSCM Optical Supervisory Channel Module (collective name)
OSCM-V#1630 Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and one optical
port; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of 1630 nm
OSFM optical supervisory filter module (collective name)
OSFM#1630 Optical Supervisory Filter Module; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of
1630 nm
OTH Optical Transport Hierarchy
OTN Open Transport Network
OTU1 Optical Channel Transport Unit 1 (2.666 Gbit/s)
OTU2 Optical Channel Transport Unit 2 (10.7092 Gbit/s)

P
PC personal computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCS Physical Coding Sublayer
PDU (1) protocol data unit
(2) power distribution unit
PE (1) protective earth
(2) grounding conductor
PG protection group mode
HWD_Abbr.fm

PG-P protection group mode - protection traffic

xliv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

PG-W protection group mode - working traffic

Pin max maximum permissible optical input power at network port receiver
PM protection module (collective name)
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
ppm (oscillator) parts-per-million
PPP point-to-point protocol
PSCP PuTTY secure copy program
PSM-95/5 Power splitter module specifically designed for power monitoring and optical
spectrum analysis.
PSU power supply unit (collective name)
PSU/7HU-AC AC power supply unit for a 7HU Shelf
PSU/7HU-DC DC power supply unit for a 7HU Shelf

R
R receive
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
RAM random access memory
RFC Request For Comments
RI Ring Indicator (serial connection)
RJ Registered Jack (old Bell Labs acroynm)
RJ-45 Registered Jack-45 (8-pin connector used on Ethernet cables)
RLM remote line monitoring
RMA return materials authorization
RoHS Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronical
equipment
rpm revolutions per minute
RS Read Salomon
RS 232 Recommended Standard-232
RSA Rivest, Shamir and Adelman key encryption scheme
RSM Remote Switch Module (collective name)
RSM-OLM#1630 Remote Switch Module with optical line monitoring, the pilot laser of which
operates at a wavelength of 1630 nm
HWD_Abbr.fm

RSM-SF Single Fiber Remote Switch Module (collective name)

Document Version 7.1.5 xlv

Acronyms and Abbreviations

RSM-SF#1310 Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1310 nm

RSM-SF#1510 Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm
RTS Request To Send (serial connection)
Rx receiver
RX- negative receive data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
RX+ positive receive data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
RxD Received Data (serial connection)
RxESFail Rx elastic storage failure

S
s second (SI base unit of time)
Schuko Acronym for the German word Schutzkontakt. This means "Protective (earthed)
contact".
SCP secure copy program
SCU Shelf Control Unit
SCU-E Extension Shelf Control Unit
SD (1) signal detect
(2) signal degrade
SDCC section digital communication channel
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
sec. second (SI base unit of time)
Ser serial
SF single fiber
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceiver (collective name)
SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 SFP Electrical GbE Transceiver
SFTP secure file transfer protocol
SFW Single-Fiber Working
SH1HU/2DC 1HU Shelf equipped with a DC power supply unit and dual power feeds
SH1HU-P/DCM rack-mountable, 1 HU high Dispersion Compensation Module Shelf (DCM Shelf)
SH7HU 7HU Shelf
SI International System of Units (abbreviated SI from the French Le Système
international d'unités)
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SSH Secure Shell Protocol
SSMF Standard Single-Mode Fiber
STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 1 (150 Mbit/s)
STM-16 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 3 (2.5 Gbit/s)
STM-4 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 2 (622 Mbit/s)
HWD_Abbr.fm

STM-64 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 4

xlvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

STP shielded twisted pair (Ethernet cable)

STP CAT 6 shielded twisted pair category 6 (copper cable type)
SUB D9 9 pins D-subminiature connector
SW Software

T
T transmit
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
T568A Definition of pin/pair assignments for eight-conductor 100-ohm balanced twisted-
T568B pair cabling according to TIA/EIA-568-B

TCA Access Type TDM Channel Module

TCC Core Type TDM Channel Module
TCE Enterprise Type TDM Channel Module
TCM tandem correction monitoring
TCP transmission control protocol
TX+ positive transmit data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
TX- negative transmit data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
Telnet teletype network, a telecommunications protocol
TIA/EIA-568-B A set of three standards that address commercial building cabling for telecommuni-
cations products and services
TFTP trivial file transfer protocol
TWRS True Wave Reduced Slope Fiber
typ. typically
Tx transmitter
TxClkFail transmitter clock failure

U
UAS unassigned
UEQ unequipped
UK United Kingdom
Un rated voltage
U.L., UL Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc. (product safety testing and certification
organization, based in USA)
HWD_Abbr.fm

USB Universal Serial Bus (serial bus standard to interface devices)

Document Version 7.1.5 xlvii

Acronyms and Abbreviations

UTP unshielded twisted pair (Ethernet cable)

USB OTG USB on-the-go
UTC Universal Time Coordinated

V
V volts (SI base unit of electric potential difference or electromotive force)
VA volt-ampere (amount of apparent power in an alternating current)
V Bus USB power (in pinout of USB data cable)
VCAT Virtual Concatenation
VCC +5 V operating voltage
VCG virtual container group
VSM Versatile Switch Module, triggered by system software via backplane
VW-1 Vertical-Wire Flame Test (UL 1581)

W
W (1) width
(2) watt (SI derived unit of power – a term that refers to power produced as
electricity)
WAN wide area network
WCA WDM Channel Module Access Type
WCA-PC-10G-V Access Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM network interface (collective name)
WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Access Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very-long reach CWDM network interface
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Access Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very-long reach DWDM network interface
WCA-PCN-2G5U Access Type 2.5G WDM Channel Module with a single client and dual network
pluggable interfaces
WCC Core Type WDM Channel Module
WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with a client pluggable interface and
integrated ultra-long reach DWDM network interface; (#Dxx stands for a DWDM
channel.)
WCC-PC-10G-V Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and integrated
very-long reach CWDM or DWDM network interface (collective name)
WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and integrated
very-long reach CWDM network interface
WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and integrated
HWD_Abbr.fm

very-long reach DWDM network interface

xlviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Acronyms and Abbreviations

WCC-PC1N-2G7U Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client and network port.
Both ports are designed for the support of intra office, standard and long reach as
well for the support of CWDM long and very long reach and DWDM very long and
ultra-long reach
WCC-PC-2G7U-R Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client interface and
integrated regional reach CWDM or DWDM network interface (collective name)
WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client interface and
integrated regional reach DWDM network interface; (#Dxx stands for a DWDM
channel.)
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client interface and
integrated very long reach CWDM network interface; (#Cxxxx stands for a CWDM
channel.)
WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Core type WDM channel module with pluggable interface on the client side and a
single tunable integrated long reach DWDM interface on the network side; maximum
client and network data rate of 11.0957 Gbit/s
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Core type WDM channel module with pluggable interface on the client side and a
single tunable integrated very long reach DWDM interface on the network side;
maximum client and network data rate of 11.0957 Gbit/s
WCE Enterprise Type WDM Channel Module (collective name)
WCE-LS-T-V Enterprise Type Low-Speed Transparent WDM Channel Module for very-long reach
link distance (collective name)
WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Enterprise Type Low-Speed Transparent WDM Channel Module with an integrated
1310-nm multimode interface on the client side and an integrated very-long reach
CWDM interface on the network side
WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Enterprise Type Low-Speed Transparent WDM Channel Module with an integrated
1310-nm multimode interface on the client side and an integrated very-long reach
DWDM interface on the network side
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment

X
XFP Extended Form-factor Pluggable transceiver (collective name)
XON/XOFF Software data flow communications protocol for controlling the flow of data
between computers and other devices. X stands for transmitter. This is frequently
referred to as "software flow control".
xTCA x-port Access Type TDM Channel Module (x stands for number of client ports)
xTCC x-port Core Type TDM Channel Module (x stands for number of client ports)
xTCE x-port Enterprise Type TDM Channel Module (x stands for number of client ports)
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xlix

Acronyms and Abbreviations

HWD_Abbr.fm

l FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 0
Introduction
This chapter gives an overview of the Fiber Service Platform 3000R7 (FSP
3000R7) basic system structure and provides information about equip-
ment disposal.

Basic System FSP 3000R7 is a high-performance WDM networking system for bidirec-
Structure tional transmission of optical signals. These signals are transmitted in a
defined number of channels over a single fiber pair or one duplex fiber.
The system uses a modular structure which enables a flexible upgrade of
capacity and functionality according to network requirements.
The FSP 3000R7 is comprised of various types of shelves and modules.
Each type performs different functions within the system. The hardware
components are grouped as follows:
• Shelves with accessories
• 7HU Shelf, DC or AC powered (SH7HU)
• DC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-DC) for a 7HU Shelf
• AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC) for a 7HU Shelf
• Plug-in fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) for a 7HU Shelf
• 1HU Shelf, DC powered (SH1HU/2DC)
• DCM Shelf (SH1HU-P/DCM)
• Core type channel modules
• WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
• WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx
• WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx
• WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
• 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx
• WCC-PC1N-2G7U
• WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
• 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
• Access type channel modules
• WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
• WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
HWD_0_Intro.fm

• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 0-1

Hardware Description

• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx
• WCA-PCN-2G5U
• 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
• Enterprise type channel modules
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
• WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx
• WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx
• Pluggable transceivers
• Various Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (SFP
transceivers) used for transmission speeds below 10 Gbit/s
• Various Extended Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (XFP
transceivers) used for transmission speeds of around 10 Gbit/s
• Management, supervision and optical protection switch modules
• Network Element Control Unit (NCU)
• Shelf Control Unit (SCU)
• Extension Shelf Control Unit (SCU-E)
• Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring
and one optical port (OSCM-V#1630)
• Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring
and two optical ports (2OSCM-V#1630)
• Versatile Switch Module (VSM)
• Remote Switch Module with optical line monitoring (RSM-
OLM#1630)
• Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1310 nm (RSM-
SF#1310)
• Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm (RSM-
SF#1510
• Optical filter modules
• C-Band/L-Band Splitter (2CLSM-#D01-#D64)
• Band Splitter Modules (BSMs)
• 2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band (2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels (2ABSM-#C1470-
#C1610)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels and 1310-nm
connectivity (3BSM-#G1310-#C1610)
• Group Splitter Modules (GSMs)
• 8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• 4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
4 discrete module variants are available.
• 1-Group Splitter Modules for C- or L-band (1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
16 discrete module variants are available.
HWD_0_Intro.fm

• Channel Splitter Modules (CSMs)

0-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Introduction

• 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C- or L-band

(40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1470, #1490, #1590,
#C1610 (4CSM-#C1470-#C1610)
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1510, #1530, #1550,
#C1570 (4CSM-#C1510-#C1570)
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (1CSM+#Cxxxx)
8 variants are available.
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module with 1310-nm
connectivity (1CSM+#G1310)
• East/West CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W)
The module is available in 8 variants, one for each of the 8
CWDM wavelengths it supports.
• East/West DWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Dxx-E/W)
The module is available in 64 variants, one for each of the
64 DWDM wavelengths it supports.
• Optical Supervisory Filter Module (OSFM+#1630)
• Optical Power Splitter Modules
• Power Splitter Module 95/5 (PSM 95/5)
• Protection Modules
- Single-port Protection Module Single Mode (1PM/SM)
- 2-port Protection Module Single Mode (2PM/SM)
- Single-port Protection Module Multimode (1PM/MM)
- 2-port Protection Module Multimode(2PM/MM)
• Optical amplifiers
• EDFA-C-S10 (group-based C-Band EDFA Module, fixed power)
• EDFA-L-S10 (group-based L-Band EDFA Module, fixed power)
• EDFA-L-D17-GC (full L-Band EDFA Module, gain controlled)
• EDFA-C-S18-GC (full C-Band EDFA Module, gain controlled)
• EDFA-C-D20-GC (full C-Band EDFA Module, gain controlled)
• Dispersion compensation modules (DCMs)
• Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 20km (DCM-P/20)
• Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 40km (DCM-P/40)
• Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 80km (DCM-P/80)
• Dispersion Compensating Fiber Module (DCF-M/xxx/yyyy)
• Dispersion Compensation with Fiber-Bragg-Gratings module
(DCG-M/xxx/SSMF)
• Dummy modules
A general description of the modules mentioned above are provided in the
following chapters. These descriptions provide the user with a complete
understanding of how the individual components work without getting
too far into technical details. For all matters relating to detailed product
description, system management, installation, troubleshooting and safe-
ty, refer to the appropriate documents. See the Preface, Section “Related
HWD_0_Intro.fm

Documentation”, p. 2-xxii.

Document Version 7.1.5 0-3

Hardware Description

Equipment Disposal FSP 3000R7 equipment that has effectively reached the end of its life
must be collected separately for electronic waste recycling or for disposal
of in an environmentally friendly way. It is recommend to hand obsolete
or unused equipment over to an appropriate disposal facility.

The whole system or individual modules that becomes waste must never
Notice be disposed of with the normal trash. The final disposal of these products
should be handled in accordance with all relevant national laws and
regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment.

Batteries Fully charged or partially discharged lithium batteries are hazardous

waste, if simply thrown away.

Used lithium batteries must never be disposed of by throwing them in the

Notice normal trash can or in fire. Dispose of the NCU module’s discrete lithium
battery promptly according to the instructions! Comply with the relevant
regulations on battery disposal of your country.

Dispose of the NCU module’s RAM IC according to the IC manufacturer‘s

Notice instructions!

Pluggable Pluggable transceivers are manufactured with materials considered to be

Transceivers hazardous. They are an environmental risk, if simply thrown away. Obso-
lete pluggable transceivers should be treated as electronic waste prod-
ucts.

Obsolete pluggable transceivers must never be disposed of by throwing

Notice them in the normal trash can. Dispose of pluggable transceivers in
accordance with the corresponding national laws and regulations on
waste electrical and electronic equipment.
HWD_0_Intro.fm

0-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 1
Shelves and Components
This chapter provides the descriptions of the various shelves, the power
supplies and the fan unit.
This chapter includes the following sections:
1.1 SH7HU Shelf which describes the 7HU Shelf including the power sup-
ply options, module cooling, module slots and basic configuration. Infor-
mation on shelf naming, labeling and accessories is also provided.
1.2 PSU/7HU-DC which describes the DC power supply unit for the
7HU Shelf in detail.
1.3 PSU/7HU-AC which describes the AC power supply unit for the
7HU Shelf in detail.
1.4 FAN/Plug-In which describes the fan unit required for the operation
of the 7HU Shelf. The description provides details on how the fans work
and refers to the various LED indicators which the unit has. Information
about the shelf display and labeling of the unit is also included.
1.5 SH1HU/2DC Shelf which describes the DC-powered 1HU Shelf includ-
ing the integrated power supply, module cooling system, module slots,
basic configuration and the shelf display. Also included is information on
the various LED indicators, shelf naming, labeling and adaptor brackets
for rack-mounting.
1.6 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf which describes the DCM Shelf.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 1-1

Hardware Description

1.1 SH7HU Shelf

Bracket NCU Dummy module Fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) Bracket

SCU Power supply unit Air intake Fiber tray Air filter unit Power supply unit
Fig. 1-1: SH7HU Front View

Description The SH7HU (7HU Shelf) is a rack-mountable, 7 HU-high housing which in-
cludes the entire FSP 3000R7 system and the accessories (dummy mod-
ules, adaptor brackets, front cover).
22 vertical slots each 4 HP wide are arranged in the middle of the shelf,
into which the standard FSP 3000R7 modules are plugged in. The slots oc-
cupy 5 HU space. The remaining 2 HU of the shelf are occupied by the fan
unit above the slots and the air filter unit below the slots. The front view
of an SH7HU is illustrated in Figure 1-1. The fiber finger set is not shown.
The basic configuration is: one power supply unit, one Shelf Control Unit
(SCU), the fan unit and the air filter unit fitted. Optical modules and man-
agement modules may be pre-installed according to the system configu-
ration ordered. The backplane provides electrical connections for power
supply and intra-shelf communication. Internal backplane connectors and
tracks hold the modules in position. The SH7HU-R supports hot-swapping
of the modules. This allows for maximum flexibility when planning for up-
grades or reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be viewed and mon-
itored using the management software.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH7HU Shelf

Features • Modular extensible design, based on the 19” format

• Dimensions: width x height x depth
483 mm x 311 mm x 275 mm; (19.00 in x 12.25 in x 9.50 in)
• Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
• Surface condition: uncoated
• Single/dual universal AC (100 to 240 V AC, 400 VA) or DC (-36 to
-72 V DC, 400 W) power supply options
• Front power access
• Heat dissipation using ventilation (front-to-rear airflow)
• High-density racking for optical modules
• Access to all components from the front of the shelf
• Front fiber routing using the fiber finger set
• Status indicators for the module slots, fans and network element on
the front panel of the fan unit
• Shelf display
• Slot configuration without tooling

Power Supply The SH7HU may optionally be powered by hot-swap AC or DC power supply
units (PSU/7HU-ACs or PSU/7HU-DCs). Power is available from the front
side of the shelf. For power redundancy, two independent power supply
units of the same type connected to separate power sources are needed.
In this case, both units supply the required power to the shelf in a load-
sharing mode. If one of the two units fails the remaining unit will take
over the power supply for the entire shelf until a unit swap has been ex-
ecuted. A Mix of AC and DC power supply units per shelf is supported.

Pay attention that the total power consumption of a fully populated shelf
Caution does not exceed the specified value (see FSP 3000R7 Module and System
Specification). Otherwise power redundancy cannot be guaranteed or
power supply may even fail.

For details on the power supplies, see Section 1.3 “PSU/7HU-AC and
Section 1.5 “SH1HU/2DC Shelf.

Grounding There are various grounding connectors on the right-hand side of the
shelf for making a functional earth connection. See Figure 1-2.

6.3 mm blade connector

male type
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Fig. 1-2: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth)

Document Version 7.1.5 1-3

Hardware Description

An earthing kit is delivered with the shelf. For details, see Appendix A.1.3
“Earthing Kit”.

Module Cooling The fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) sufficiently dissipates the heat produced by
the modules. Air is drawn by the fans via the air intake and air filter pad
at the bottom of the shelf, up through the module slots, and exhausted
via the air outlet at the top of the rear panel. The air filter pad is included
with the air filter unit. It is located beneath the module slots. For details
on the fan unit, see Section 1.4 “FAN/Plug-In.

Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air
Caution filter unit. By ignoring this, dirt can block the air inlets and outlets.
Blocked air inlets and outlets lead to inefficient cooling and considerable
increase in fire risk.

A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Therefore it

must be inspected regularly and replaced, if necessary.

A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Taking air
pollution into consideration, replace dirty air filter pads at least once a
year. ADVA strongly recommends replacing the air filter pad every 90
days.

Slots 5 HU high slots are numbered from 1 through 20. These slots accommo-
date all 5 HU FSP 3000R7 modules including the power supply units. Near-
ly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules occupy
two slots. Preferred configuration of such modules is to start at an odd
slot number (1,2; 3,4; 5,6; etc.). Channel modules working in a protection
group for channel module protection do not need to be placed in neigh-
boring slots.
The two slots most left are of half-size height and named A and B. These
slots are intended for the management modules.

The 7HU Shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not
Caution in use must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for
all other modules. When adding modules later on, store the dummy
modules in a safe place for future use.

Fiber Tray To prevent mechanical stress from the optical fibers there is a horizontal
fiber tray to hold them. It is located along the lower front edge of the
shelf. The perforated part of the fiber tray serves as air inlet for cooling
the modules.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH7HU Shelf

Fiber Finger Set The fiber finger set is assembled above the perforated part of the fiber
tray as shown in Figure 1-3. The assembly includes a plurality of fiber fin-
gers. Each interspace between two fingers can be used for routing and re-
taining the optical fiber jumpers to be connected to the corresponding
optical module.

Fiber tray Fiber finger

Fig. 1-3: Fiber Finger Set

Signal Transmission The modules including the fan unit can be monitored and controlled by
Path the SCU or SCU-E. Each module is connected to the internal bus of the
backplane enabling data exchange with the management modules. The
only official access to the shelf is through the NCU of the NE.

Placement The 7HU Shelf can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS complaint rack by
using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm
(0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 7 HU of space in an rack.

Status LED Various LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
Indicators tus of the modules, fans and network element. The LED indicators are lo-
cated on the front panel of the fan unit. For more information, see Section
1.4 “FAN/Plug-In and Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3.

Accessories

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rackmount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
• 1 x ESD connection adaptor
The SH7HU comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The
ETSI and NEBS bracket pairs as well as the ESD connection adaptor are in-
cluded in the shipping box. The ESD connection adaptor must be mounted
to the bracket.

Dummy Modules Dummy modules are delivered with the shelf when not fully populated
with optical modules. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.

Front Cover The front cover is placed in front of the shelf as shown in Figure 1-4, p.
1-6. It protects the fiber optic connectors of the modules against external
influences and prevents the fibers from being pulled out inadvertently.
The operating status of the shelf can still be observed and the air filter
pad can be replaced when the cover is attached. The cover is attached to
HWD_1_Mec.fm

the shelf by means of the latches and fixing brackets on either side.

Document Version 7.1.5 1-5

Hardware Description

Latch

Fig. 1-4: Front Cover Attached to the SH7HU

Shelf Naming Depending on configuration, a 7HU Shelf is referred to as:

• master shelf, if it is equipped with a NCU and a SCU
• main shelf, if it is equipped with a SCU only
• extension shelf if it is equipped with a SCU-E only
Apart from management modules, a master shelf and a main shelf hold all
active modules such as channel modules, optical amplifiers and optical
switch modules as well as optical filter modules.
In addition to the SCU-E, an extension shelf only includes passive optical
modules and protection modules.

Labeling Each SH7HU can be identified by several labels located on its rear panel.
See Figure 1-5, p. 1-6.

Shelf type label

Certification label

Shelf supply values

label

Fig. 1-5: Labeling the SH7HU

Shelf Type Label The shelf type label contains following relevant information of the shelf:
• type and version
• serial number and bar code
• item number and bar code
Figure 1-6, p. 1-7 shows an example.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH7HU Shelf

Item Number:

Maerzenquelle 1–3 xxxxxxxxxxxxx

98617 Meiningen

SH7HU&SCU

Version:
0.2

Serial Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 1-6: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Type Label

Certification Label The certification label provides current certification marks. Figure 1-7
shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 1-7: Example of an SH7HU Certification Label

Shelf Supply Values The shelf supply values label provides:

Label • shelf name
• important operating data of the shelf
• instructions for power supply
Figure 1-8 shows an example.
Type: FSP 3000-R7-7HU
Voltage: 100 V to 240 V AC Power Supply
-36 V to -72 V DC Power Supply

Power Consumption 400 VA

For proper selection of power supply cord

refer to instruction manual.
Always remove both
power cords when
Made in Germany disconnecting from
02.02.2006 power source !

Fig. 1-8: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Supply Values Label

ESD and Laser Safety The ESD and laser safety labels are located on the front at the bottom
Label right on the air filter unit, as shown in Figure 1-9.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-7

Hardware Description

Fig. 1-9: Example of the ESD and Laser Safety Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 PSU/7HU-DC

1.2 PSU/7HU-DC
Variants:
PSU-DC Module name
none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number

Status LED indicator

Terminal block with transparent

plastic cover (protective cover)

Mounting screw

Screw terminals:
- protective ground
- negative pole marked with -
- positive pole marked with +

Mounting screw

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 1-10: PSU/7HU-DC Front View

Description The PSU/7HU-DC is a two-slot, plug-in DC power supply unit specifically

designed for an 7HU Shelf. For power feeding, the power supply unit has
a terminal block on its faceplate. It is mounted to the faceplate with the
upper and lower screws as shown in Figure 1-10. To protect service per-
sonnel from bodily harm always keep the protective cover fitted on the
terminal block. When connected to a user-supplied power source the PSU/
7HU-DC transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a user-sup-
plied power source into a lower DC output voltage of the same polarity.
The unit delivers 12.2 V DC at 33.5 A to each module through the back-
plane connectors. The unit produces at most 408 W of power. Two PSU/
7HU-DCs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power
redundancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical
type and should receive DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails,
the remaining unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (408 W) on
an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
The power supply unit is field-replaceable.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-9

Hardware Description

Features • Rugged electrical and mechanical design

• Nominal voltage: -48 V DC (positive conductor of the power source
is connected to earth)
• Service voltage range: from -36 V DC to -72 V DC
• Usable in fully-redundant configuration
• Inverse-polarity protection
• Status LED indicator for power
• Front accessible
• Hot-swappable

Fuses Electrical security is provided by two double pole fuses that are fitted in-
side the power supply unit. The fuse links are not accessible. If a fuse link
has blown, the power supply unit must be replaced by service personnel
and returned for manufacturer repair.

Risk of hazardous voltage!

WARNING Do not open the power supply unit under any circumstances!
There are no serviceable parts inside. A faulty unit should be
returned to ADVA AG Optical Networking for repair.

EMC The PSU/7HU-DC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which cre-
ates a tight seal with neighboring modules.

Risk of electromagnetic disturbances!

Caution Make sure that the EMC contact strips are not damaged before inserting
the unit. Defective EMC contact strip must be replaced immediately.
Otherwise EMC compliance cannot be achieved.

Connecting

Risk of electric shock or burns!

WARNING The protective grounding terminal must be used for altitudes above
2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages equal or greater than 60 V.

If the site is located more than 2000 m above sea level or if a 60-V DC
power source is to be connected, the unit must be grounded properly. In
this case a 3-core power supply cable must be used. The protective ground
terminal (PE) allows the user to connect the power supply unit to a sys-
tem safety ground lead. This avoids injury in the event of an electric
shock.
Power connections should be made using ADVA’s DC power cables. For de-
tails, see Appendix A.1.2 “DC Power Cords”, p. A-5 and Installation Guide,
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Chapter 4, Section 4.7.2 “Connecting DC Power”, p. 4-13.

1-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 PSU/7HU-DC

Even though the PSU/7HU-DC is protected against reverse polarity, pay

attention to polarity when connecting the power cord. If the polarity has
not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED is off.

Removing and Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and
Replacing easy replacement in the case of failure.

Risk of remaining voltage!

WARNING Make sure that no voltage is left at the defective power supply
unit. Before removing the PSU/7HU-DC from the shelf, switch off
the DC power source which is connected to the unit. Then
disconnect the associated DC power cable from the terminal block
and wait for at least 30 seconds. After that, the unit can be pulled
out of the slots.

A potential risk of injury from electric shock exists when the power supply
unit is removed from the shelf. Voltage may still be present inside the
PSU/7HU-DC, even though the unit already has been disconnected from
the power source. To avoid the risk of electric shock, allow any residual
electric charge in the unit to dissipate. After switching off the associated
DC power source, it will take at least 30 seconds to de-energize the unit
completely. After that, the unit can be pulled out of the shelf.

Monitoring The output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the
SCU. An alarm is generated if the output voltage falls below a definite
limit. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the shelf is report-
ed to the network management system. The power supply unit can also
be supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.

Placement The PSU/7HU-DC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots.
It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf. ADVA recommends
installing the units in the slots 1+2 and 19+20.

LED Indicator The PSU/7HU-DC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating states. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2 ‚ p. 3-11.

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-11

Hardware Description

1.3 PSU/7HU-AC
Variants:
PSU-AC Module name
none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number

Status LED indicator

100-240V AC
50/60Hz

AC Appliance Inlet, male connector

according to IEC 320-C14

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 1-11: PSU/7HU-AC Front View

Description The PSU/7HU-AC is a two-slot, plug-in, AC power supply unit specifically

designed for an 7HU Shelf. For power feeding, the power supply unit has
an AC appliance coupler on its faceplate. When connected to the mains,
the PSU/7HU-AC converts AC into DC needed for powering the shelf’s
modules. The unit automatically detects the input voltage within the
specified range. No adjustment is necessary. The PSU/7HU-AC delivers
12.2 V DC at 33.5 A to each module through the backplane connectors.
The unit produces approximately 400 VA of power. Two PSU/7HU-ACs
working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power redun-
dancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical type and
should receive AC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the re-
maining unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (ca. 400 VA) on
an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
The power supply unit is field-replaceable.

Features • Rugged electrical and mechanical design

• Autoranging from 100 to 240 V AC at 50 - 60 Hz
• Usable in fully-redundant configuration
HWD_1_Mec.fm

• Status LED indicator for power

1-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 PSU/7HU-AC

• Front accessible
• Hot-swappable

Fuses Electrical security is provided by two double pole fuses that are fitted in-
side the power supply unit. The fuse links are not accessible. If a fuse link
has blown, the power supply unit must be replaced by service personnel
and returned for manufacturer repair.

Risk of hazardous voltage!

WARNING Do not open the power supply unit under any circumstances!
There are no serviceable parts inside. A faulty unit should be
returned to ADVA AG Optical Networking for repair.

EMC The PSU/7HU-AC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which cre-
ates a tight seal with neighboring modules.

Risk of electromagnetic disturbances!

Caution Make sure that the EMC contact strips are not damaged before inserting
the unit. Defective EMC contact strip must be replaced immediately.
Otherwise EMC compliance cannot be achieved.

Connecting To avoid injury in the event of an electric shock the unit must be properly
grounded. Therefore, power connections should be made using ADVA’s AC
power cables only. For details, see Appendix A.1.1 “AC Power Cords”,
p. A-2 and Installation Guide, Chapter 4, Section 4.7.3 “Connecting AC
Power”, p. 4-20.

Removing and Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and
Replacing easy replacement in the case of failure.

Risk of remaining voltage!

WARNING Make sure that no voltage is left at the defective power supply
unit. After disconnecting the associated AC power cord from the
appliance coupler, wait for at least 30 seconds, before removing
the unit from the shelf.

A potential risk of injury from electric shock exists when the power supply
unit is removed from the shelf. Voltage may still be present inside the
PSU/7HU-AC, even though the unit already has been disconnected from
the mains supply. To avoid the risk of electric shock, allow any residual
electric charge in the unit to dissipate. After unplugging the power cord
from the appliance coupler, it will take at least 30 seconds to de-energize
the unit completely. After that, the unit can be pulled out of the shelf.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-13

Hardware Description

Monitoring The output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the
SCU. An alarm is regenerated if the output voltage falls below a definite
limit. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the shelf is report-
ed to the network management system. The power supply can also be su-
pervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.

Placement The PSU/7HU-AC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots.
It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf. ADVA recommends
installing the units in the slots 1+2 and 19+20.

LED Indicator The PSU/7HU-AC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating states. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1 ‚ p. 3-10.

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 FAN/Plug-In

1.4 FAN/Plug-In
Status LEDs for Network element LCD Arrow Enter Fan status
slots A and B status LEDs display buttons button LED

Fiber Service Platform

A fan
B

Status LEDs for slots 1 through 20

Fig. 1-12: FAN/Plug-In Front View

Description The FAN/Plug-In (plug-in fan unit) is an integral part of a 7HU Shelf. It
is located above the module slots. The fan unit is used for the forced air
cooling of the modules. The front view is illustrated in Figure 1-12. The
complete fan unit is shown in Figure 1-13, p. 1-17.
The three fans are powered via the backplane connector. Under normal
ambient conditions all fans work independently at a low rotational speed.
The shelf’s internal air temperature controls the rotational speed of the
fans.
The Fan Control Unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan
and reports the status to the Shelf Control Unit (SCU). The status of the
fans can also be read from the fan LED indicator and the shelf display on
the front panel.
When one of the fans fails, one minute after fan failure the intact fans
increase their rotational speed to the maximum in order to compensate
for the capacity of the broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow,
but no alarm is raised. If yet another fan fails, the fan LED lights up red
and an alarm is raised.

The failure of a single fan does not does not endanger the cooling of the
modules in the shelf. However, the whole fan unit should be replaced by
Service Personnel within 48 hours after fan failure.

(1) If only one fan is working, there will not be sufficient cooling. In this
Caution case, in order to protect the modules from damage, the shelf must not
be allowed to continue operation.
(2) The use of an air filter pad is absolutely necessary to prevent dust
and debris from accumulating on the air inlets and outlets as well as from
entering the shelf. Blocked air inlets and outlets lead to inefficient
cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-15

Hardware Description

Features • Designed as a plug-in unit for a 7HU Shelf

• Equipped with three non-detachable powerful fans
• Includes the shelf display
• Provides the status indicators for the shelf, the fans and all module
slots
• Hot-swappable
• Field-replaceable
• Front accessible

Signal Transmission The fan unit is connected to the internal bus of the shelf’s backplane en-
Paths abling data exchange with the SCU.

Placement The fan unit can be placed into any 7HU Shelf.

Status LED The fan unit has numerous two-color LED indicators that provide a quick
Indicators visual check of the operating states of the fans, installed modules and
network element (NE). The LED indicators are arranged in three groups on
the front panel as shown in Figure 1-12, p. 1-15. Each LED indicator has
dedicated colors to be able to indicate different faults.

Fan Status LED There is only one LED labeled “fan” for the three cooling fans. If more
than one fault appears, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.2‚
p. 3-3.

Slot Status LEDs There is one status LED per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots are numbered
from 1 through 20 (with the respective slot number). The two status LEDs
labeled “A” and “B” are intended for the half-sized slots. Only the failure
on the module with the highest severity will be indicated by the respec-
tive slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC configuration).
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.3‚
p. 3-4.

Network Element The LEDs labeled “critical”, “major” and “minor” indicate different net-
Status LEDs work element alarms. Within the network element, only the failure with
the highest severity will be indicated. Therefore only one of the three LEDs
is lit at a time. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3,
Section 3.1.4‚ p. 3-8.

The alarm status of a network element is only indicated by the master

shelf. The network element status LEDs of the remaining shelves within
Note the network element will be off.

Shelf Display The shelf display (LCD) on the front panel (see Figure 1-12, p. 1-15) indi-
cates the shelf ID number (unique within an NE). The arrow buttons and
the enter button are used to set the shelf ID and the LED test. They are
also used to read the rotational speeds of the individual fans and to see
whether the manual setting of the shelf ID is locked using management
HWD_1_Mec.fm

software (by a small lock in the lower right corner).

1-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 FAN/Plug-In

Labeling The FAN/Plug-In can be identified by two labels located on the top of the
unit. See Figure 1-13.
Manufacturer’s label Bar code label Fan unit type label

Fig. 1-13: Labeling the Fan Unit

Fan Unit Type Label The fan unit type label contains the official name, unique serial number
and device code. Figure 1-14 shows an example.
Fan/Plug-In Name

Device code
0042700001-2.00
NA70063705700 Serial number
Fig. 1-14: Example of a Fan Unit Type Label

Bar Code Label The bar code label contains the fan unit’s bar code and the corresponding
serial number. Figure 1-15 shows an example.

NA70063705700
Fig. 1-15: Example of a Fan Unit Bar Code Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-17

Hardware Description

1.5 SH1HU/2DC Shelf

Bracket Front panel NCU (slot A) Dummy module (slot 2) Bracket

-
pwr1

-
pwr2

Terminal block Shelf display SCU (slot B) Dummy module (slot 1) ESD jack
Fig. 1-16: SH1HU/2DC Front View

Description The SH1HU/2DC (1HU Shelf) is a rack-mountable, 1 HU-high, DC-powered

shelf. The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP 3000R7 system.
The internal power supply is integrated on the left side. Six individual
fans ensure the effective cooling of the modules.
The shelf features four horizontal slots which accommodate the standard
FSP 3000R7 modules. The separate ESD jack, rightmost on the front side
of the shelf, is intended for the connection of a wrist strap. The front view
of the SH1HU/2DC is illustrated in Figure 1-16. The complete shelf is
shown in Figure 1-19, p. 1-22.
The SH1HU/2DC is specifically designed for low channel count installa-
tions, single services and feeder applications. This shelf may also be used
for single channel add/drop in a CWDM ring (one channel module, one
east/west optical filter module). The basic configuration is: 1 x Network
Element Control Unit (NCU-B) and 1 x Shelf Control Unit (SCU). Optical
modules and management modules may be pre-installed according to the
system configuration ordered.
The backplane provides electrical connections for power supply and intra-
shelf communication. Internal backplane connectors and tracks hold the
modules in position. The SH1HU/2DC supports hot-swapping of the mod-
ules. This allows for maximum flexibility when planning for upgrades or
reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be viewed and monitored us-
ing the management software.

Features • Modular extensible design, based on the 19” format

• Dimensions: width x height x depth
483 mm x 44 mm x 275 mm; (19.00 in x 1.73 in x 10.83 in)
• Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
• Surface condition: uncoated
• Built-in DC power supply with dual power feeds (-40.5 V to -57 V DC,
120 W)
• Front power access
• Heat dissipation using ventilation (airflow from the right-hand side
to the left-hand side)
• Access to all modules from the front of the shelf
• Front fiber routing
• Status indicators for the module slots, fans and network element on
HWD_1_Mec.fm

the front panel

1-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH1HU/2DC Shelf

• Shelf display
• Slot configuration without tooling

Power supply Power is available from the front side of the shelf using a terminal block
(block barrier type connectors) with 4 screw terminals and plastic covers
over the terminals.
The power supply transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a
user-supplied power source into a lower DC output voltage of the same
polarity. The unit delivers 12 V DC at 10 A to each module through the
backplane connectors. The maximum power consumption is 160 W.
Power redundancy is achieved by two separate inputs (labeled pwr 1 and
pwr 2 on the front panel). In this case, power should be received from
two independent power sources. If one of the two power feeds fails, the
power supply will continue to provide the required power to the shelf un-
til the fault is cleared.
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU.
An alarm is generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls below
a definite limit. The power supply can also be supervised via LED indica-
tors on the front side. The power supply unit is not field-replaceable.

Grounding There are various grounding connectors on the left-hand side of the shelf
for making a functional earth connection. See Figure 1-17.

Earth (ground) terminal

Earth (ground) screws

Fig. 1-17: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth)

An earthing kit is delivered with the shelf. For details, see Appendix A.1.3
“Earthing Kit”.

Module Cooling Inside the shelf each side wall has three fans for ventilation. Because the
fans are arranged on opposing sides, a good flow of air results within the
shelf. The six fans operate independently. The shelf internal air temper-
ature controls the rotational speed of all fans. Under normal ambient con-
ditions, they simultaneously work at a low rotational speed. The Fan
Control Unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan and reports
the status to the Shelf Control Unit (SCU). The status of the fans can also
be read from the fan LED indicator and the shelf display on the front pan-
el.
If a single fan fails, one minute after fan failure the intact fans increase
their rotational speed to the maximum in order to compensate for the ca-
pacity of the broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow, but no
alarm is raised. If two or more fans fail, the fan LED lights up red and an
alarm is raised.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

The fans are not field-replaceable.

Document Version 7.1.5 1-19

Hardware Description

The failure of a single fan does not does not endanger the cooling of the
modules in the shelf.
However, the whole shelf should be replaced by Service Personnel
within 48 hours after fan failure.

Air is drawn in through the air intake located at right side of the shelf,
passed directly across the modules and exhausted through the air outlets
located at the left side of the shelf.

Slots The slots numbered 1 (lower) and 2 (upper) are 4 HP wide and 5 HU high.
They are intended for accommodation of all FSP 3000R7 optical modules.
Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules
occupy both slots. The two slots marked A and B are of half size height
and predetermined for the FSP 3000R7 management modules. Slot A holds
the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), and slot B accommodates the
Shelf Control Unit (SCU or SCU-E).

The SH1HU/2DC must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots
Caution not in use must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling
for all other modules. When adding modules later on, store the dummy
modules in a safe place for future use.

Signal Transmission The modules can be monitored and controlled by the SCU or SCU-E. Each
Path module is connected to the internal bus of the backplane enabling data
exchange with the management modules. The only official external access
to the shelf is through the NCU of the NE.

Placement The SH1HU/2DC can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack
by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm deep
ETSI rack. The shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in an rack.

Status LED The SH1HU/2DC has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual
Indicators check of the operating states of the fans, installed modules and network
element (NE). The LED indicators are arranged in four groups on the front
panel as shown in Figure 1-18.

Power status LEDs LCD display Arrow buttons

Network element
status LEDs

Fan status LED Slot status LEDs Enter buttons

Fig. 1-18: Front Panel of the SH1HU/2DC
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH1HU/2DC Shelf

Each LED has dedicated colors to be able to indicate different faults.

Fan Status LED There is only one LED labeled “fan” for the six cooling fans. Should appear
more than one fault, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.2‚
p. 3-3.

Slot Status LEDs The shelf has one status LED indicator per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots
are labeled “1” and “2” (with the respective slot number). The LEDs for
the half-sized slots are labeled “A” and “B”. Only the failure on the mod-
ule with the highest severity will be indicated by the respective slot sta-
tus LED (according to the corresponding ARC configuration). For details,
refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.3‚ p. 3-4.

Network Element The LEDs labeled “critical”, “major” and “minor” (see Figure 1-18, p. 1-20)
Status LEDs indicate different network element alarms. Within the network element,
only the failure with the highest severity will be indicated. Therefore only
one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.4‚ p. 3-8.

The alarm status of a network element is only displayed by the master

shelf. The respective LEDs of the remaining shelves within the network
element will be off.

Power Status LEDs The power status LEDs labeled “pwr1” and “pwr2” (see Figure 1-18, p. 1-
20) indicate different states of the power supply unit. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.2.3‚ p. 3-13.

Shelf Display The shelf display (LCD) on the front panel (see Figure 1-18, p. 1-20) indi-
cates the shelf ID number (unique within a NE). The arrow buttons and
the enter button are used to set the shelf ID and the LED test. They are
also used to read the rotational speeds of the individual fans and to see
whether the manual setting of the shelf ID is locked using management
software (by a small lock in the lower right corner).

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rackmount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
The SH1HU/2DC comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed.
The ETSI and NEBS bracket pairs are included in the shipping box.

Dummy Modules Dummy modules are delivered with the shelf when not fully populated
with optical modules. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.

Shelf naming Depending on configuration, a SH1HU/2DC is referred to as

• master shelf, if it is equipped with a NCU and a SCU
• main shelf, if it is equipped with a SCU only
HWD_1_Mec.fm

• extension shelf, if it is equipped with a SCU-E only.

Document Version 7.1.5 1-21

Hardware Description

Apart from management modules, a master shelf and a main shelf hold all
active modules such as channel modules, optical filter modules, optical
amplifiers as well as optical switch modules.
In addition to the SCU-E, an extension shelf only includes passive optical
modules and protection modules.

Shelf Labeling Each SH1HU/2DC can be identified by several labels located on the top of
the shelf. See Figure 1-19.
Shelf type label Shelf supply values label

Certification label
Fig. 1-19: Labeling the SH1HU/2DC

Shelf Type Label The shelf type label contains the following relevant information:
• name, type and version
• serial number and bar code
• item number and bar code
Figure 1-20 shows an example.

Item Number:

Maerzenquelle 1–3 xxxxxxxxxxxxx

98617 Meiningen

SH1HU/2DC&SCU

Version:
0.2

Serial Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 1-20: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Type Label

Certification Label The certification label indicates the current certification marks for this
shelf. Figure 1-21, p. 1-22 shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Fig. 1-21: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Certification Label

1-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH1HU/2DC Shelf

Shelf supply values The shelf supply values label provides:

label • the shelf name
• important operating data of the shelf
• instructions for power supply
Figure 1-22, p. 1-23 shows an example.
Type: FSP 3000-R7-1HU
Voltage: -48 V DC
Current: max. 3 A

Power Consumption 120 W

For proper selection of power supply cord

refer to instruction manual.
Always remove both
power cords when
Made in Germany disconnecting from
02.02.2006 power source !

Fig. 1-22: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label

ESD and Laser Safety The ESD and laser safety label is delivered with the shelf. Figure 1-23
Label shows the label.

Fig. 1-23: ESD and Laser Safety Label

This label must be affixed to a conspicuous place on the rack as exempli-

fied in Figure 1-24, p. 1-23.
ESD and laser safety labels

Fig. 1-24: Example of Placing the ESD and Laser Safety Label on the Rack

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-23

Hardware Description

1.6 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf

Certification Label Shelf Type Label

Bracket Blank panels Bracket

Fig. 1-25: SH1HU-P/DCM Front View

Description The SH1HU-P/DCM (DCM Shelf) is a rack-mountable, 1 HU high housing.

It features two horizontal slots covered by front panels. The shelf is
shipped with two front panels mounted. See Figure 1-25 for an illustration
of an SH1HU-P/DCM.
The shelf can accommodate two DCMs side-by-side to function bidirec-
tionally (from west to east and from east to west) or unidirectionally (cas-
cade connection to extend the compensation length). The term DCM
always refers to DCM-P/20, DCM-P/40 and DCM-P/80.
The front view of the SH1HU-P/DCM, with two DCM-P/40 modules in-
stalled, is shown in Figure 1-26.

Fig. 1-26: SH1HU-P/DCM Equipped with Two DCM-P/40s (Cascade Connection)

If only one DCM is plugged into a shelf slot, the empty slot must be cov-
ered by a blank panel. In this way the optical connectors inside the DCM
are protected from dirt.
Features • Modular extensible design, based on the 19” format
• Dimensions: width x height x depth
483 mm x 44 mm x 270 mm; (19.00 in x 1.73 in x 10.63 in)
• Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
• Surface condition: uncoated
• Access to the modules from the front of the shelf
HWD_1_Mec.fm

• Front fiber routing

1-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rackmount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
The SH1HU-P/DCM comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed.
The ETSI and NEBS bracket pairs are included in the shipping box. If the
shelf is to be mounted into an ETSI or NEBS compliant rack, the ETSI or
the NEBS bracket pair must be fitted on the outside of the left-hand and
right-hand side walls. The procedures for removing and fitting the differ-
ent adaptor brackets are described in the Installation Guide.

Placement The SH1HU-P/DCM can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant

rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm
(0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.

Due to its greater depth, the SH1HU-P/DCM has always to be mounted in

the lowest position in the case of cabinet mounting, so that the air flow
in the cabinet is not inhibited.
When placing the SH1HU-P/DCM beneath a 7HU Shelf, ensure that there
Note
is at least 1 HU of space between the bottom of a 7HU Shelf and the top
of the SH1HU-P/DCM to allow a free flow of air to the 7HU Shelf above.

Labeling the Shelf Each SH1HU-P/DCM can be identified by several labels located on the top
of the shelf. See Figure 1-25, p. 1-24.

Shelf Type Label The shelf type label identifies the following relevant information about
the shelf:
• name, type and version
• serial number and bar code
• item number and bar code
Figure 1-27 shows an example.
Item Number:

Maerzenquelle 1–3 xxxxxxxxxxxxx

98617 Meiningen

SH1HU/DCM

Version:
0.2

Serial Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 1-27: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf Type Label

HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-25

Hardware Description

Certification Label The certification label provides current certification marks. Figure 1-28,
p. 1-26 shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 1-28: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Certification Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 2
Core Type Channel Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all core type channel modules
available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports, the simplified block diagram and module specific details.
Moreover, the module’s key features are presented, the signal path within
the module is briefly discussed, and an example of the module’s labeling
are given.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:

2.1 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx
2.2 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
2.3 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32
2.4 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx
2.5 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
2.6 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
2.7 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
2.8 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx
2.9 WCC-PC1N-2G7U
2.10 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx
2.11 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
2.12 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 2-1

Hardware Description

Identification Core type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label
printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in each
module description.

Naming The module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a

Conventions very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the module’s specific features.
Example:
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D10

Integrated network interface type: DWDM

transmission distance - very long reach
DWDM channel no. 10
Network port data rate: 10 Gbit/s
Max. Client port data rate: 2.7 Gbit/s
Pluggable interface(s): pluggable client interfaces
Channel module type: Core type TDM channel module
Number of client ports: 4
This example describes a core type 4-port TDM channel module with four
pluggable client interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of
2.7 Gbit/s. The aggregated data rate on the network port runs at
10 Gbit/s. The module features an integrated very-long reach DWDM in-
terface for channel no. 10.
Table 2-1, p. 2-2 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.

Table 2-1: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention

Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Number of client x x = 2: 2-port TDM channel module
ports (only TDM x = 4: 4-port TDM channel module
channel modules
x = 8: 8-port TDM channel module
Channel module WCC Core type WDM channel module
type TCC Core type TDM channel module
Low speed
low-speed transparent channel module with fixed client
transparent at fixed LS
and network interface (s)
interface(s)
Pluggable PC Pluggable client interface(s)
interface(s)
(if applicable) PCN Pluggable client interface(s) and network interface(s)

Pluggable Pluggable client interface(s) and one pluggable network

PC1N
interface(s) interface
Pluggable and
tunable Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable network
PCTN
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

interface(s) interface(s)
(if applicable)

2-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Table 2-1: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Maximum client 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 9.9532 Gbit/s,
port data rates 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.51875 Gbit/s, 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0957 Gbit/s
2G1U Depending on the module type: e.g. 1.0625 Gbit/s,
1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
2G7 2.666057 Gbit/s
2G7U Depending on the module type: e.g. 2.666057 Gbit/s,
155.52 Mbit/s, 622.08 Mbit/s, 200 Mbit/s, 1.250
Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
Network port data 2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
rates 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0032 Gbit/s
Integrated network interface type (if applicable):
transmission R regional reach link distances (240 km – 360 km)
distances U ultra-long reach link distances (120 km – 240 km)
V very-long reach link distances (70 km – 120 km)
L long reach link distance (30 km - 70 km)
WDM channel #Dxx DWDM channel (xx stands for channel 01 to 64),
#DCx DWDM C band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 9),
#DLx DWDM L band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 9)
according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#Cxxxx CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570
1590, 1610 according to FSP CWDM wavelength table

General WCCs and xTCCs are performance-optimized for use in metro-core net-
works. These modules support a set of SDH/Sonet and OTH features, such
as digital performance monitoring, G.709 standard conform mapping/
framing, Forward Error Corrections (FEC), error forwarding and in-band
DCN management. Depending on their network interfaces, the core type
channel modules are capable of transmitting services over link distances
in the 70 km to 360 km range without using 3R devices or Dispersion Com-
pensating Fiber (DCF). WCCs and xTCCs are hot swappable and customer
installable. This enables a scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Module Design Core type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-
in modules that are compatible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU). The modules fully conform to the requirements of all relevant
SDH ITU-T and SONET ANSI/Telcordia standards.
The receptacles of the integrated interfaces and the cages for the plug-
gable transceivers are angled at 45° to preserve minimum fiber bend radii
when connecting the optical cables. The SFP/XFP design allows in-service
configuration on an as-needed basis without affecting other active ports.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-3

Hardware Description

Core type channel modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-
wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.
Module Handling WCCs and xTCCs are electrostatic sensitive modules. Therefore they must
be handled with care. For information on module handling, refer to the
Detailed Procedures.
Module Variants Core type channel modules with integrated network interfaces are avail-
able in CWDM and DWDM variants.

Management and Using the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), all core type channel
Operating Status modules are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Network
Management System (NMS). Management allows user access to module
conditions as well as network status. The status of receivers and trans-
mitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or observed
with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for controlling
and status query are transmitted via the internal system bus between the
channel modules and the NCU.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 core type channel modules have the same faceplate mark-
ings. LED indicator and optical port markings of the individual modules
are explained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All core type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visi-
ble through the faceplates. Their colors display different operating states.
The status that each color of the LED indicators represents is described in
the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Core type channel modules have several printed labels (module type label,
certification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which contain
specific module information. The labels of the individual modules are
shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as

• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• technical specifications (channel number, output power range,
receiver dynamic range, wavelength and supported data rates of the
module)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx

2.1 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx
Variants:
WCC-PC-10G
U#D01
Module name WCC-PC-10G-U#D01
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number to
Status LED indicators WCC-PC-10G-U#D64

WCC-PC-10G-U#DC1
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input
to
Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output WCC-PC-10G-U#DC9

WCC-PC-10G-U#DL1
to
Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal
output WCC-PC-10G-U#DL9
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-1: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-2 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-5

Hardware Description

Description The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx is a core type 10G WDM channel module with a
pluggable client interface. It is specifically designed for the use in DWDM
transport systems. The module converts client optical signals into 10 Gbit
network signals with a specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid and vice ver-
sa.
The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx is intended for transport of OTU2, OTU2-LAN, SDH
STM-64, SONET OC-192, 10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC ser-
vices. All supported services can be transmitted in transparent mode.
The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7
DWDM channels it supports.
The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx can be used as a unidirectional inline regenerator
or as a regenerator in back-to-back configuration.
The module provides performance monitoring of standard SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192c, OTU2, 10G FC and 10 GbE-LAN signals on the client as
well as network port. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC,
standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at both the client
port and the network port. Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only
supported on the network port. 10G FC can only be transmitted without
FEC. OTN section layer protection switching is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709

• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports
Client interface • Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface
characteristics using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard reach and
1550 nm long reach

850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC

1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, ultra-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

• LC receptacles

2-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx

XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-15 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path, which is described below.

WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Overhead Termination/

Performance Monitoring
Rx STM-64/OC-192 Tx
C-R o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e N-T
10 GbE (MAC)
e FEC FEC/EFEC o
PCS 64B/66B
850/1310 nm
XFP transceiver
STM-64/OC-192
o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e
10 GbE (MAC)
C-T e FEC FEC/EFEC o N-R
Client Tx PCS 64B/66B Rx Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain
and clock and data recovery is performed. The regenerated signal is op-
tionally mapped into a G.709 compliant frame structure. Overhead pro-
cessing as well as ingress and egress client data performance monitoring
are carried out. When operating in the OTU2 mode, standard FEC on the
client port and enhanced FEC on the network port are accomplished. The
transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical
signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T
connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
If an OTN signal is received, it is de-mapped from the G.709 compliant
frame and EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. Overhead processing and
client data performance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is
then routed to the client port transmitter (Tx). The transmitter converts
the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it through the
client port connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-7

Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-10G-U
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +0.5 to +3.5 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-3: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-4: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-5: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32

2.2 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
Variants:
Module name none
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Item number

Fig. 2-6: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-3 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 2-3: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port

Description The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 is a core type 10G WDM channel module

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with very-
long distance transmission. The module has an Extended Form-factor
Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface on the client side.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-9

Hardware Description

On the network side, it features an integrated 10 Gbit, very-long reach,

100 GHz-spaced tunable DWDM interface.
The module converts one optical client signal into one 10 Gbit/s network
signal. The network port is fully tunable from channel #D01 up to channel
#D32, including #DC1 to #DC9, in a wavelength grid of 100 GHz. Each
channel can be tuned in the system management by using the NE man-
agement tools. See the User Guide.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 is intended for transport of OTU2, SDH STM-
64, SONET OC-192, 10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC services
in the C band of the DWDM transport system. All applications can be
transmitted in transparent mode.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 can be used as a unidirectional inline re-
generator or as a regenerator in back-to-back configuration.
The module provides performance monitoring of standard SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192c, OTU2, 10G FC and 10 GbE-LAN signals on the client as
well as network port. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC,
standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at both the client
port and the network port. Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only
supported on the network port. 10G FC can only be transmitted without
FEC. OTN section layer protection switching is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709

• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF,
RSM-OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports
• Client interface characteristics
• Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface using
LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard reach and
1550 nm long reach
850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach tunable DWDM interface

characteristics (100 GHz wavelength grid)
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

• LC receptacles

2-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32

XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-7 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Overhead Termination/ Tunable

Performance Monitoring interface
Rx STM-64/OC-192 Tx
C-R o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e N-T
10 GbE (MAC)
e FEC FEC/EFEC o
PCS 64B/66B
850/1310 nm
XFP transceiver
STM-64/OC-192
o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e
10 GbE (MAC)
C-T e FEC FEC/EFEC o N-R
Client Tx PCS 64B/66B Rx Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-7: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

The receiver (Rx) of the client port receives the client signal at a non-
WDM wavelength from the CPE through the C-R connector. The input sig-
nal is converted to the electrical domain and a clock and data recovery
circuit performs full 3R signal regeneration at any selected data rate.
The regenerated signal is optionally mapped into a G.709 compliant frame
structure. Overhead processing as well as ingress and egress client data
performance monitoring are performed. When operating in the OTU2
mode, the module carries out standard FEC on the client port and en-
hanced FEC on the network port. The transmitter (Tx) converts the output
signal back to an optical signal and transmits any C band channel through
the N-T connector to the far end of the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The receiver (Rx) of the network port receives any C band channel through
the N-R connector from the link. The input signal is converted to the
electrical domain and regenerated (3R function). If an OTN signal is re-
ceived, it is de-mapped from the G.709 compliant frame and EFEC/FEC
functions are carried out. Overhead processing and client data perfor-
mance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is then routed to
the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the elec-
trical signal back to an optical one and transmits it at a non-WDM wave-
length through the connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU

slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-11

Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-8, Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PCTN-10G-V
#D01-32 Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +6 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: D01-D32/DC1-DC9 /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-8: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-9: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-10: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32

2.3 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32
The WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 is a core type 10G channel module specif-
ically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems and long distance
transmission. It has the same design and functionality as the WCC-PCTN-
10G-V#D01-32. Therefore, the description in Section 2.2 “WCC-PCTN-10G-
V#D01-32”, p. 2-9 adequately applies to the WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 and the WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 differ
only in their distance transmission and technical details of the network
port like the dispersion load, dispersion penalty, transmitter output pow-
er, receiver dynamic range and extinction ratio.
It provides a high extinction ratio and thus it is suitable for links with a
high amount of amplifiers and low OSNR.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-11, Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PCTN-10G-V
#D01-32 Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +6 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: D01-D32/DC1-DC9 /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-11: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Fig. 2-12: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Certification Label

Document Version 7.1.5 2-13

Hardware Description

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-13: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx

2.4 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Module name WCC-PC-10G-V#D01
Serial number to
Status LED indicators WCC-PC-10G-V#D64

WCC-PC-10G-V#DC1
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input
to
Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output WCC-PC-10G-V#DC9

WCC-PC-10G-V#DL1
to
Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal
output WCC-PC-10G-V#DL9
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Item number

Fig. 2-14: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-4 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-4: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port

Description The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx is a core type 10G WDM channel module specifi-
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

cally designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with very-long dis-
tance transmission. The module has an Extended Form-factor Pluggable
(XFP) MSA compliant interface on the client side.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-15

Hardware Description

On the network side, it features an integrated 10 Gbit, very-long reach,

100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module is available in 80 variants,
one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels it supports.
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx is intended for transport of OTU2, SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192, 10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC services over
a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress
node. All applications can be transmitted in transparent mode.
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx can be used as a unidirectional inline regenerator
or as a regenerator in back-to-back configuration.
The module provides performance monitoring of standard SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192c, OTU2, 10G FC and 10 GbE-LAN signals on the client as
well as network port. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC,
standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at both the client
port and the network port. Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only
supported on the network port. 10G FC can only be transmitted without
FEC. OTN section layer protection switching is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709

• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface

characteristics using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard reach and
1550 nm long reach

850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC

1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• LC receptacles
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx

XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-15 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path, which is described below.

WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Overhead Termination/

Performance Monitoring
Rx STM-64/OC-192 Tx
C-R o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e N-T
3R 10 GbE (MAC)
e FEC FEC/EFEC o
PCS 64B/66B
850/1310 nm
XFP transceiver
STM-64/OC-192
o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e
3R 10 GbE (MAC)
C-T e FEC FEC/EFEC o N-R
Tx PCS 64B/66B Rx
Client Network
port C Transmit direction port N
Receive direction

Fig. 2-15: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

The receiver (Rx) of the client port receives the client signal at a non-
WDM wavelength from the CPE through the C-R connector. The input sig-
nal is converted to the electrical domain and a clock and data recovery
circuit performs full 3R signal regeneration at any selected data rate.
The regenerated signal is optionally mapped into a G.709 compliant frame
structure. Overhead processing as well as ingress and egress client data
performance monitoring are performed. When operating in the OTU2
mode, standard FEC on the client port and enhanced FEC on the network
port are accomplished. The transmitter (Tx) converts the output signal
back to an optical signal and transmits it at a specific ITU-T wavelength
through the N-T connector to the far end of the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The receiver (Rx) of the network port receives the optical signal at a spe-
cific ITU-T wavelength through the N-R connector. The input signal is
converted to the electrical domain and regenerated (3R function). If an
OTN signal is received, it is de-mapped from the G.709 compliant frame
and EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. Overhead processing and client
data performance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is then
routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts
the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it at a non-WDM
wavelength through the connector C-T to the CPE.
Placement The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of
the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-17

Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-16, Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-18.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-16: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-17: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-18: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx

2.5 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx is a core type 10G channel module specifically
designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long distance
transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appearance as the
WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 2.4 “WCC-PC-
10G-V#Dxx”, p. 2-15 adequately applies to the WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via 4 dis-
crete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link dis-
tances are shorter in comparison to the WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx.
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • WCC-PC-10G-V#C1530
• WCC-PC-10G-V#C1550
• WCC-PC-10G-V#C1570
• WCC-PC-10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-19, Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-19: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-19

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-20: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-21: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

2.6 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
Variants:
Module name
none
Serial number

Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client

signal output
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client
signal input

The description of the client port C4

applies for the client ports C1 to C3
accordingly.

Receiver connector (N-R) for network

signal input
Transmitter connector (N-T) for network
signal output

Item number

Fig. 2-22: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-5 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

faceplate and their meanings.
Table 2-5: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
C3 operating states of the client port 3 C3 client port 3
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

C4 operating states of the client port 4 C4 client port 4

N operating states of the network port N network port

Document Version 7.1.5 2-21

Hardware Description

Description The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 is a core type 4-port TDM channel

module with pluggable client interfaces and one tunable network inter-
face. It is specifically designed for the use in the C band of the DWDM
transport systems. The module performs electrical multiplexing and de-
multiplexing of up to four client interface signals onto one wavelength.
The client ports support STM-16/OC-48 and OTU-1, and are multiplexed
according to the OTN standard, as described in ITU-T G.709, using trans-
parent asynchronous aggregation of ODU1 tributaries into OTU2.
STM-16/OC-48 client interface signals at 2.488 Gbit/s are either trans-
ported transparently or regenerated at the RS/Section layer. The client in-
terface signals are end-to-end clock transparent and can be used for clock
distribution, but holdover is not supported. If demultiplexing fails, a lo-
cal 20 ppm oscillator will be used as clock source.
The network port supports OTU2 with standard FEC at 10.709 Gbit/s or
OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.003 Gbit/s.
The network interface is fully tunable in the C band and can be tuned to
any channel from #D01 to #D32 including #DC1 to #DC9. Each channel can
be tuned in the system management by using the NE management tools.
See User Guide.
Each client and network port supports one in-band management channel
(DCN).

Features • OTU mapping, according to ITU-T G.709:

• OTU2 with standard FEC at 10.7092 Gbit/s or
• OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.0032 Gbit/s
• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of network and
client services
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• When regeneration at the RS/Section layer is selected: in-band DCN
management channel (DCCr) on all ports
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Support a mix of STM-16, OC-48 and OTU-1 services
• Data rates of 2.488 Gbit/s and 2.666 Gbit/s
• Support of 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach as well as
CWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC

SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC

SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

2-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach tunable DWDM interface

characteristics (100 GHz wavelength grid)
• Data rate of 10.7092 Gbit/s or 11.0032 Gbit/s
• Supports: 80-100 km
• LC connectors
SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-23, p. 2-23 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below.

Client
ports
SFP transceiver 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1 SerDes
o
C1-T e
Tx

Rx
C2-R o Network
e OTU2 port N
C2 SerDes
o Tx
N-T
e 10G e
C2-T o
Tx Optical Wavelength •
Transport Tunable N
Rx Processor e
C3-R Optics o
o N-R
e Rx
C3 SerDes
o
C3-T
e
Tx

Rx
C4-R o
e
C4 SerDes
o
C4-T e
Tx

ECC I/O bus DC/DC External power

Power supply
FPGA
HDLC Controller
Management interface

Ingress direction
Egress direction

Fig. 2-23: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

Each client port receiver (Rx) receives signals from the CPE through the
client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These signals are con-
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

verted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and
the signals are serialized. STM-16/OC-48 client signals are monitored and
mapped into ODU1s. The 4x ODU1 signals are then multiplexed into a 10G

Document Version 7.1.5 2-23

Hardware Description

ODU2 signal. The ODU2 signal is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring

overhead and FEC bytes. This signal is serialized and routed to the trans-
ceiver of the tunable network port. The transceiver converts the electrical
signal to an optical signal and transmits any C band channel through the
N-T port onto the link.
Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives any C band channel through the
N-R port from the link. This signal is converted to the electrical domain,
data and clock recovery is performed and the signal is de-serialized. The
OTU2 FEC is terminated and the signal is monitored. The ODU2 frame is
demultiplexed into four individual ODU1 signals. The ODU1 signals are
then either de-mapped into 2.5G STM-16 or OC-48 signals, or kept as
ODU-1 client signals. Each client signal is de-serialized, and fed into the
SFP transceiver, which converts the electrical signal and transmits it
through the client port connector C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T to the CPE.

Placement The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies

two regular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and
the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-24, Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PC+2G7+10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.7092, 2.48832
11.0032

Laser Module

Fig. 2-24: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-25: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-26: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-25

Hardware Description

2.7 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Module name
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D01
V#D01

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number to

Status LED indicators 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D64

4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DC1
to
Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client
signal output 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DC9
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client
signal input 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DL1
to
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DL9
The description of the client port C4
applies for the client ports C1 to C3
accordingly.

Receiver connector (N-R) for network

signal input
Transmitter connector (N-T) for net-
work signal output

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-27: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-6 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 2-6: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
C3 operating states of the client port 3 C3 client port 3
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

C4 operating states of the client port 4 C4 client port 4

N operating states of the network port N network port

2-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx

Description The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx is a core type 4-port TDM channel module

with pluggable client interfaces. It is specifically designed for the use in
DWDM transport systems. The module performs electrical multiplexing
and de-multiplexing of up to four client interface signals onto one wave-
length. The client ports support STM-16/OC-48 and are multiplexed ac-
cording to OTN, as described in ITU-T G.709, using transparent asyn-
chronous aggregation of ODU1 tributaries into OTU2. STM-16/OC-48 cli-
ent interface signals at 2.488 Gbit/s are either transported transparently
or regenerated at the RS/Section layer. The client interface signals are
end-to-end clock transparent and can be used for clock distribution, but
holdover is not supported. If de-multiplexing fails, a local 20 ppm oscil-
lator will be used as clock source. The network port supports OTU2 with
standard FEC at 10.709 Gbit/s or OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.003
Gbit/s. Each client and network port supports one in-band management
channel (DCN).

Features • OTU mapping, according to ITU-T G.709:

• OTU2 with standard FEC at 10.7092 Gbit/s or
• OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.0032 Gbit/s
• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• When regeneration at the RS/Section layer is selected: in-band DCN
management channel (DCCr) on all ports
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports
Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Support a mix of STM-16 and OC-48 services
• Data rate of 2.488 Gbit/s
• Support of 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach as well as
CWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC

SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rate of 10.7092 Gbit/s or 11.0032 Gbit/s
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

• Supports: 80-100 km
• LC connectors

Document Version 7.1.5 2-27

Hardware Description

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-28, p. 2-28 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below.

Client
ports
SFP transceiver 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1 SerDes
o
C1-T e
Tx

Rx
C2-R o Network
e OTU2 port N
C2 SerDes
o Tx
e N-T
C2-T e
Tx Optical 10G o
Transport Fixed N
Rx Processor Optics e
C3-R o o
N-R
e Rx
C3 SerDes
o
C3-T e
Tx

Rx
C4-R o
e
C4 SerDes
o
C4-T e
Tx

ECC I/O bus DC/DC External power

Power supply
FPGA
HDLC Controller
Management interface

Ingress direction
Egress direction

Fig. 2-28: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

Each client port receiver (Rx) receives signals from the CPE through the
client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These signals are con-
verted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and
the signals are serialized. STM-16/OC-48 client signals are monitored and
mapped into ODU1s. The 4x ODU1 signals are then multiplexed into a 10G
ODU2 signal. The ODU2 signal is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring
overhead and FEC bytes. This signal is serialized and routed to the trans-
ceiver of the network port. The transceiver converts the electrical signal
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

to an optical signal at the specific DWDM wavelength and transmits the

signal through the N-T port onto the link.

2-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R port from the link. This signal is converted
to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and the
signals are de-serialized. The OTU2 FEC is terminated and the signal is
monitored.
The ODU2 frame is demultiplexed into four individual ODU1 signals. The
ODU1 signals are then de-mapped into 2.5G STM-16 or OC-48 signals.
Each client signal is de-serialized, and fed into the SFP transceiver, which
converts the electrical signal to an optical one and transmits it through
the client port connector C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T to the CPE.

Placement The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two reg-

ular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the ap-
propriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1. Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-29, Figure 2-30 and Figure 2-31.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PC+2G7+10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.7092, 2.48832
11.0032

Laser Module

Fig. 2-29: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-29

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-30: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-31: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx

2.8 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx
The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx is a core type 4-port TDM channel module
specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long
distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appear-
ance as the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Sec-
tion 2.7 “4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx”, p. 2-26 adequately applies to the
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx features an
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via
4 discrete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link
distances are shorter in comparison to the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx.
The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1530
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1550
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1570
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-32, Figure 2-33 and Figure 2-34.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PC+2G7+10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.7092, 2.48832
11.0032

Laser Module

Fig. 2-32: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-31

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-33: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-34: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC1N-2G7U

2.9 WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Variants:
Module name none
Serial number

Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal

output
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input

Item number

Fig. 2-35: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-6 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC1N-2G7U faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-7: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-33

Hardware Description

Description The WCC-PC1N-2G7U is a 2.7 Gbit/s core type WDM channel module with
a pluggable client and network interface. Both interfaces are designed for
the support of 850 nm and 1310 nm intra office, standard and long reach
as well for the support of CWDM long and very-long reach and DWDM very-
long and ultra-long reach. Additionally the client interface is used for the
transport of 1510 nm long reach.
The module is intended for the transport of OTU1, STM-16/OC-48 and GbE
services. The supported services can be transmitted in transparent mode.
The WCC-PC1N-2G7U can be used as back-to-back regenerator and to cre-
ate channel card protection and versatile switched protection.
It supports performance monitoring data at the client and network inter-
face for physical layer and SDH/SONET layer or FEC layer. For all applica-
tions, standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at the
network and client port. OTN section layer protection switching is sup-
ported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709

• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM and
RSM-OLM, RSM-SF)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU-T G.664 on the client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring on the client and
network ports
• Forced on setting on the transmitter port of the client and network
interface
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using
characteristics LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s
• Support of:
• 850 nm and 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC1N-2G7U

Network interface • Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using
characteristics LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s
• Support of:
• 850 nm and 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP Transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client or
network interface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need
to be populated with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-36 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

Overhead Termination /
WCC-PC1N-2G7U Performance Monitoring

Rx STM-16/OC-48 Tx
C-R o STM-4/OC-12 OTU1/DW e N-T
OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
GbE
850/1310 nm, 850/1310 nm,
CWDM/DWDM CWDM/DWDM
SFP transceiver SFP transceiver
STM-16/OC-48
C-T o STM-4/OC-12 e N-R
OTU1/DW OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
Tx GbE Rx
Client Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-36: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal
through the C-R connector from the CPE. The signal is converted to the
electrical domain, and clock and data recovery is performed. STM-16/OC-
48, OTU1 or GbE alignment is carried out. The resulting signal can option-
ally be mapped into an OTU1 output signal with SFEC according to ITU-T
G.709 into an OTU1 frame with SFEC at the network interface. The trans-
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-35

Hardware Description

mitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal
at a specific CWDM/DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T
connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The network port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal
through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is converted to the
electrical domain, and clock and data recovery is performed.
STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE frame alignment is carried out. Data can op-
tionally be extracted from the OTU1 frame and routed to the transmitter
(Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the electrical signal back
to an optical one and transmits it through the client port connector C-T
to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PC1N-2G7U is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-37, Figure 2-38 and Figure 2-39.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC1N-2G7U

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.48832, 2.48832,
2.666057, 2.666057,
1.339, 1.250
1.250
Laser Module

Fig. 2-37: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC1N-2G7U

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-38: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-39: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-37

Hardware Description

2.10 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx
Variants:
Module name
WCC-PC
2G7U-R
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#D01
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number to
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#D64
Status LED indicators

WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DC1
to
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DC9
Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal
output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DL1
to
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DL9

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-40: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-8 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-8: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx

Description The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx is a core type multirate WDM channel module

with a pluggable client interface. It is specifically designed for the use in
DWDM transport systems. The module converts client optical signals into
optical network signals with a specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid and
vice versa.
The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx is intended for transport of OTU1, STM-16/OC-
48 and GbE services. The supported services can be transmitted in trans-
parent mode.
The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 DWDM chan-
nels.
The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx can be used as back-to-back regenerator.
The module supports performance monitoring data at the client and net-
work ports for physical layer and SDH/SONET layer or FEC layer. For all ap-
plications, standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 at the network and
client port. Enhanced FEC (proprietary) with higher coding gain is sup-
ported at the network port only. OTN section layer protection switching
is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709

• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM and
RSM-OLM, RSM-SF)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on the client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU-T G. 664 on the client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring on the client and
network ports
• Forced on setting on the transmitter port of the client and network
interface
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using LC
characteristics connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s and 1.250 Gbit/s
• Support of:
• 850 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard reach
• CWDM long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

Document Version 7.1.5 2-39

Hardware Description

Network interface • integrated, 2.7 Gbit regional reach DWDM interface (100 GHz
characteristics wavelength grid)
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s and 1.250 Gbit/s
• LC receptacles
SFP Transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-41 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

Overhead Termination /
WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Performance Monitoring

Rx STM-16/OC-48 Tx
C-R o STM-4/OC-12 OTU1/DW e N-T
OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
850/1310 nm, GbE
CWDM/DWDM
SFP transceiver
STM-16/OC-48
C-T o STM-4/OC-12 e N-R
OTU1/DW OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
Tx GbE Rx
Client Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-41: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain,
and clock and data recovery is performed. STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE
frame alignment is carried out. The resulting signal can optionally be
mapped into an OTU1 output signal with SFEC at a specific ITU-T compli-
ant wavelength. The transmitter (Tx) converts the output signal back to
an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through
the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The network port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal at a specific
DWDM wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal
is converted to the electrical domain, and clock and data recovery is per-
formed. STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE frame alignment is carried out. Data
can optionally be extracted from the OTU1 frame and routed to the trans-
mitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the electrical sig-
nal back to an optical one and transmits it through the client port
connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

2-40 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-42, Figure 2-43 and Figure 2-44.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-2G7U-R
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.48832, 2.48832,
2.666057, 2.666057,
1.250 1.250

Laser Module

Fig. 2-42: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-43: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-44: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-41

Hardware Description

2.11 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
The WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx is a core type 2.7G channel module specifically
designed for the use in CWDM transport systems. It has the same design,
functionality and appearance as the WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx. Therefore, the
description in Section 2.10 “WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx”, p. 2-38 adequately ap-
plies to the WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, very-long reach, 20-nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4
channels via 4 discrete module variants. However, the maximum realiz-
able fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the WCC-PC-2G7U-
R#Dxx.
The WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropri-
ate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with
optical amplifiers.

Variants • WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1530
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1550
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1570
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-45, Figure 2-46 and Figure 2-47.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-2G7U-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.250, 1.250,
2.48832, 2.48832,
2.666057 2.666057

Laser Module

Fig. 2-45: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-46: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-47: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-43

Hardware Description

2.12 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
Variants:
4TCC-PCN
2G1U+2G5
Module name none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client signal input

The description of the client port C4 applies

for the client ports C1 to C3 accordingly.

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal

output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal
input (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal

output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal
input (line East)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-48: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U-2G5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-9 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-9: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
C3 operating states of the client port 3 C3 client port 3
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

C4 operating states of the client port 4 C4 client port 4

NE operating states of the network port East NE network port East
NW operating states of the network port West NW network port West

2-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

Description The 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 is a core type, 4-port multirate TDM channel

module. It can transport a mix of 1G FC, 2G FC, GbE and FICON, multi-
plexed into an STM-16/OC-48 link, carried over a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength.

Transport of 2G FC is only supported by client port 4.

The client signals are mapped into GFP frames, and virtual concatenation
at STS-1/VC-3/VC-4 level is used when multiplexing the GFP frames into
the STM-16/OC-48 link.

Features • Transparent or framed GFP mapping, according to ITU-T G.7041

• Virtual concatenation, according to ITU-T G.707 and G.783
• Channel protection (1+1 MSP)
• Versatile protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• ALS according to ADVA standard on network ports
• Fault and performance monitoring of line and services
• In-band DCN management via DCCr, or DCCm on the network ports
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates of 1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.2500 Gbit/s or 2.125 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm and 1310 intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard
reach and long reach as well as CWDM long and very-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

Network interface • Two independent Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• DWDM (100 GHz wavelength grid) or CWDM (20 nm wavelength grid)
• Data rate of 2.488320 Gbit/s
• Support of 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach, CWDM
long and very-long reach, and DWDM very-long and ultra-long reach.

1310 nm types SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC

SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

Document Version 7.1.5 2-45

Hardware Description

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client or net-
work interface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to
be populated with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-49, p. 2-46 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified)
and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel
protection mode.

Network
ports
Client port 1, 2, 3: GbE, FC, FICON
Client port 4: GbE, FC, FICON, 2GFC 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 SFP transceiver STM-16/
SDH/ OC-48
Client SONET Tx
ports e NW-T
Framer o

SerDes
Services SFP transceiver NW
e
SDH/ o
Rx SONET NW-R
C1-R o Rx
e GbE Framer
SerDes

C1 FC/
o GFP-T
FICON
C1-T e
Tx ECC

Rx
C2-R o SDH/
e GbE MAC GFP concate-
SONET Tx
SerDes

GFP-F Generic nation NE-T

C2 FC/ Packet buffer Framer e
o FICON o

SerDes
C2-T e NE
Tx SDH/ e
concate- SONET o NE-R
nation Framer
Rx
Rx
C3-R o
e GbE GFP
SerDes

C3 FC/ GFP-T Generic

o FICON
e HDLC
C3-T Management
Tx
interfaces

MAC 10/100BaseT
Rx GFP-F
C4-R o Packet buffer Controller Switch
e GbE
Phy
SerDes

C4 FC/ RAM
o FICON RS-232
C4-T e
Tx DC/DC
Power converter

Ingress direction
Egress direction

Fig. 2-49: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:

Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R connectors. These signals are
converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed
and the signals are serialized. For framed Ethernet services the signals are
passed through a MAC and the idle frames are removed from the payload.
For all services the GFP Mapper/De-mapper maps each client signal into
GFP frames. These are then mapped into virtual containers, which again
are multiplexed into an STM-16/OC-48 line signal. For protected applica-
tions, the module contains two SDH framers. The SDH/SONET signal from
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

each framer is serialized and routed to the SFP transceivers of the east
and west network ports (NE and NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx)

2-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific

CWDM/DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T
ports onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:

The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is
performed and the signals are de-serialized. The signal from the two links
are monitored separately in two SDH/SONET framers. If protection is en-
abled, the active signal is selected based on a set of switching criteria.
The GFP Mapper/De-mapper de-maps the client signals and routes each
signal towards the configured client port. Each client signal is de-serial-
ized, and fed into the SFP transceiver, which converts the electrical signal
back to an optical one and transmits it through the client port connectors
(C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T) to the CPE.
When the module operates in MUX mode on network port West or on net-
work port East, the signal path is just like the one described above. The
difference is that the redundant network port is not used.

Placement The 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot

of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-50, Figure 2-51 and Figure 2-52.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.48832 1.0625,
1.250,
2.125
Laser Module

Fig. 2-50: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Module Type Label

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-47

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-51: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-52: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-48 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 3
Access Type Channel Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all access type channel modules
available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports, the simplified block diagram and module specific details.
Moreover, the module’s key features are presented, the signal path within
the module is briefly discussed, and an example of the module’s labeling
are given.
F or all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:

3.1 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
3.2 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
3.3 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
3.4 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
3.5 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx
3.6 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx
3.7 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx
3.8 WCA-PCN-2G5U
3.9 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
3.10 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
3.11 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
3.12 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 3-1

Hardware Description

Identification Access type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the la-
bel printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in
each module description.

Naming The module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a

Conventions very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the module’s specific features.
Example:
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1530

Integrated network interface type: CWDM

transmission distance - very long reach
CWDM channel 1530
Network port data rate: 4 Gbit/s
Max. Client port data rate: 4 Gbit/s, unspecific
Pluggable interface(s): pluggable client interfaces
Channel module type: Access type TDM channel module
Number of client ports: 4

This example describes an access type 4-port TDM channel module with
four pluggable client interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of
4 Gbit/s. The aggregated data rate on the network port runs at 4 Gbit/s.
The module features an integrated very-long reach CWDM interface for
channel 1530.
Table 3-1, p. 3-2 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.

Table 3-1: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention

Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Number of client x x = 2: 2-port TDM channel module
ports (only TDM x = 4: 4-port TDM channel module
channel modules
x = 8: 8-port TDM channel module
Channel module WCA Core type WDM channel module
type TCA Core type TDM channel module
Low speed
low-speed transparent channel module with fixed client
transparent at fixed LS
and network interface (s)
interface(s)
Pluggable PC Pluggable client interface(s)
interface(s)
(if applicable) PCN Pluggable client interface(s) and network interface(s)

Pluggable Pluggable client interface(s) and one pluggable network

PC1N
interface(s) interface
Pluggable and
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

tunable Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable network

PCTN
interface(s) interface(s)
(if applicable)

3-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Table 3-1: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Maximum client 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 9.9532 Gbit/s,
port data rates 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.51875 Gbit/s, 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0957 Gbit/s
2G1U Depending on the module type: e.g. 1.0625 Gbit/s,
1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
2G7 2.666057 Gbit/s
2G7U Depending on the module type: e.g. 2.666057 Gbit/s,
155.52 Mbit/s, 622.08 Mbit/s, 200 Mbit/s, 1.250
Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
Network port data 2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
rates 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0032 Gbit/s
Integrated network interface type (if applicable):
transmission R regional reach link distances (240 km – 360 km)
distances U ultra-long reach link distances (120 km – 240 km)
V very-long reach link distances (70 km – 120 km)
L long reach link distance (30 km - 70 km)
WDM channel #Dxx DWDM channel (xx stands for channel 01 to 64),
#DCx DWDM C band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 8),
#DLx DWDM L band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 8)
according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#Cxxxx CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570
1590, 1610 according to FSP CWDM wavelength table

General WCAs and xTCAs are cost-optimized for use in metro-access networks.
WCAs do not perform SDH/Sonet framing. TCAs support proprietary fram-
ing and potentially in-band DCN management. Both WCAs and TCAs only
carry out performance monitoring on the optical layer. Access type chan-
nel modules are able to overcome link distances of up to about 100 km
without dispersion compensation or 3R signal regeneration.
WCAs and xTCAs are hot swappable and customer installable. This enables
a scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Module Design Access type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-
in modules that are compatible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU).
The SFP/XFP design allows in-service configuration on an as-needed basis
without affecting other active ports.
The receptacles of the integrated interfaces and the cages for the plug-
gable transceivers are angled at 45° to preserve minimum fiber bend radii
when connecting the optical cables.
Access type channel modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-

wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-3

Hardware Description

Module Handling WCAs and xTCAs are electrostatic sensitive modules. Therefore they must
be handled with care. For information on module handling, refer to the
Detailed Procedures.
Module Variants Access type channel modules with integrated network interfaces are
available in CWDM and DWDM variants.
Management and Using the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), all access type channel
Operating Status modules are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Network
Management System (NMS). Management allows user access to module
conditions as well as network status. The status of receivers and trans-
mitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or observed
with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for controlling
and status query are transmitted via the internal system bus between the
channel modules and the NCU.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 access type channel modules have the same faceplate
markings. Legacy access type channel modules differ in marking of their
faceplates. LED indicator and optical port markings of the individual mod-
ules are explained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All access type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are vis-
ible through the faceplates.
Legacy access type channel modules have additional multicolor LED indi-
cators (two LEDs per port).
The colors of each LED display different operating states. The status that
each color represents is described in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Access type channel modules have several printed labels (module type la-
bel, certification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which con-
tain specific module information. The labels of the individual modules are
shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as

• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• technical specifications (channel number, output power range,
receiver dynamic range, wavelength and supported data rates of the
module)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx

3.1 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Module name WCA-PC-10G-V#D01
to
Serial number
WCA-PC-10G-V#D64
Status LED indicators

WCA-PC-10G-V#DC1
to
WCA-PC-10G-V#DC8

WCA-PC-10G-V#DL1
to
WCA-PC-10G-V#DL8

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Item number

Fig. 3-1: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View

The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as

indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-2 and Table 3-3, p. 3-6 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-5

Hardware Description

Optical Port Markings

Table 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C client port
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-3: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
O/E module’s power supply Lp looping back on the client
status/error condition port or the network port
C/R receiver status of the client C/T transmitter status of the
port client port
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port

Description The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is an access type multirate 10G WDM channel

module specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with
very-long distance transmission. The module has an Extended Form-factor
Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface on the client side.
On the network side, it features an integrated 10 Gigabit, very-long
reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module is available in 80
variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels it supports.
For fiber termination, the XFP transceivers use LC connectors while the
network interface uses MU/PC duplex receptacles.
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is designed for transport of STM-64/OC-192,
10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC services over a specific ITU-
T-compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. Transpar-
ent mode is not supported.
The module provides clock and data recovery at any supported data rate.
It can also be used as a unidirectional inline regenerator. The WCA-PC-
10G-V#Dxx only supports performance monitoring on the optical layer.
Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided. Internal loop
backs or external loop backs are supported on both the client port and
network port.
XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver. The client interface can optionally be
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

equipped with XFP transceivers listed in the table below.

3-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx

850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC

1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC

Signal Path Figure 3-2 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates
the signal path, which is described below.

Rx
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Tx
C-R o e N-T
3R
e o
1310 nm
XFP transceiver

o e
3R
C-T e o N-R
Tx Rx
Client Network
port port
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain
and clock and data recovery is performed. The regenerated signal is rout-
ed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts
the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
The regenerated signal is fed into the XFP transceiver. The transmitter
(Tx) converts the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it
through the client port connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-7

Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-3, Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCA-PC-10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125, 10.3125,
10.51875, 10.51875
10.709
Laser Module

Fig. 3-3: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-4: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-5: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx

3.2 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx is an access type 10G channel module specifi-
cally designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long dis-
tance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appearance
as the WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 3.1 “WCA-
PC-10G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-5 adequately applies to the WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via 4 dis-
crete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link dis-
tances are shorter in comparison to the WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx.
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • WCA-PC-10G-V#C1530
• WCA-PC-10G-V#C1550
• WCA-PC-10G-V#C1570
• WCA-PC-10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCA-PC-10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125, 10.3125,
10.51875, 10.51875
10.709
Laser Module

Fig. 3-6: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-9

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-7: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-8: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

3.3 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G Module name 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D01
V#D01

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number to

8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D64
Status LED indicators

8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DC1
Transmitter connector (C8-T) for client to
signal output
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DC8
Receiver connector (C8-R) for client
signal input
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DL1

The description of the client interface to

C8 applies for the client interfaces C1 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DL8
to C7 accordingly.

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-9: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Front View

The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2

module as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module
provides full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and
troubleshooting follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns
ALS and LED behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-4 and Table 3-5, p. 3-12 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-11

Hardware Description

Optical Port Markings

Table 3-4: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
C5 client port 5
C6 client port 6
C7 client port 7
C8 client port 8
N/R receiver connector of the network port
N/T transmitter connector of the network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-5: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
On power supply status of the Err error condition; self-test
module procedure
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port
C1/R receiver status of the client C1/T transmitter status of the
port 1 client port 1
C2/R receiver status of the client C2/T transmitter status of the
port 2 client port 2
C3/R receiver status of the client C3/T transmitter status of the
port 3 client port 3
C4/R receiver status of the client C4/T transmitter status of the
port 4 client port 4
C5/R receiver status of the client C5/T transmitter status of the
port 5 client port 5
C6/R receiver status of the client C6/T transmitter status of the
port 6 client port 6
C7/R receiver status of the client C7/T transmitter status of the
port 7 client port 7
C8/R receiver status of the client C8/T transmitter status of the
port 8 client port 8

Description The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx is an access type 8-port TDM channel mod-

ule specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems and very-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

long distance transmission. The module has eight Small Form-factor Plug-
gable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces on the client side.

3-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

On the network side, it features a single integrated, 10.709 Gbit/s, very-

long reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module supports a cli-
ent data rate of 1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s and multi-
ple clock settings. For fiber termination, all optical interfaces use LC
connectors.
The module transports 8 x GbE, 8 x FC and 8 x 2G FC signals over a specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. Un-
used transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected client inter-
face or the absence of an SFP transceiver does not affect operation of the
terminated services.
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx provides clock and data recovery and per-
forms 3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate. It can also be
used as a unidirectional inline regenerator. In this case the client inter-
faces need not be populated with SFP transceivers.
The module supports performance monitoring both on the client ports
and the network port. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are sup-
ported on the client ports and on the network port. Each client port can
be looped back individually.
SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver. The client interfaces can optionally be equipped
with SFP transceivers listed in the table below.
850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC
SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC

Signal Path Figure 3-10, p. 3-14 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path.

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R. These signals are con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped into four data streams
with a constant bit rate of 2.48832Gbit/s applying a proprietary method.
The 4 x 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams are multiplexed to a 10.70923 Gbit/s
common output signal. Mapping and multiplexing of the client signals
into the output signal is performed according to a minimal subset of the
ITU-T G.709 standard. This combined signal is routed to the transmitter
(Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the electrical output
signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and trans-
mits it through the N-T connector onto the link.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-

Document Version 7.1.5 3-13

Hardware Description

verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
The regenerated 10.70923 Gbit/s input signal is demultiplxed into its four
component 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams. Each client signal is demapped
from the 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams, decoded, serialized and fed into
the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The transmitters
convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit them
through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R to the CPE.

Client
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
ports
SFP Transceiver TDM module
Rx
C8-R o
e
C8

Mux
o
e
C8-T
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C7-R o

Mux
e
C7 o

OTU1/ODU1
C7-T e
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C5-R o
Mux

e 10G transport
C5 o module
Network
C5-T e
Tx port N
OTU2/ODU2 Tx
SFP Transceiver e N-T
Mux

Rx o
C6-R o
e
C6 o
e
C6-T
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C3-R o
e
C3
OTU2/ODU2

o
Demux

e
C3-T e
Tx o
N-R
Rx
SFP Transceiver
Rx
C4-R o
e
C4
Demux

o
e
C4-T
OTU1/ODU1

Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C1-R o
Demux

e
C1 o
e
C1-T
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C2-R
Demux

o
e
C2 o

C2-T e
Tx

Transmit direction
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Receive direction

Fig. 3-10: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

3-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

Placement The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two

regular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the
appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.709 1.0625,
1.25,
2.125

Laser Module

Fig. 3-11: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-12: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-13: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-15

Hardware Description

3.4 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel
module specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and
very-long distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality
and appearance as the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the descrip-
tion in Section 3.3 “8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-11 adequately ap-
plies to the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx features an
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via
4 discrete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link
distances are shorter in comparison to the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx.
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the ap-
propriate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topolo-
gies with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1530
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1550
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1570
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.709 1.0625,
1.25,
2.125

Laser Module

Fig. 3-14: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-15: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-16: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-17

Hardware Description

3.5 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Channel module name

Serial number 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#D01

to
Status LED indicators
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#D64

4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DC1
Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client signal to
output 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DC8
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client signal input

4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DL1
The description of the client interface C4 ap- to
plies for the client interfaces C1 to C3 accord-
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DL8
ingly.

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal

output
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input
Item number
Fig. 3-17: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Front View

The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module

as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-6 and Table 3-7, p. 3-19 list all abbreviations on the
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

Optical Port Markings

Table 3-6: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
N/R network receiver port
N/T network transmitter port

LED Indicator There is one LED indicator per port. It displays the status of the transmit-
Markings ter and the status of the receiver of the corresponding port.
Table 3-7: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
O/E module’s power supply LP looping back on the client or
status/error condition network ports
C/4 transmitter and receiver C/3 transmitter and receiver
status of the client port 4 status of the client port 3
C/2 transmitter and receiver C/1 transmitter and receiver
status of the client port 2 status of the client port 1
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port

Description The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is an access type 4-port 4G TDM channel

module specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with
very-long distance transmission. The module has four Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces on the client side.
On the network side, it features a single integrated, very-long reach, 100
GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module is available in 80 variants, one
for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels it supports. When the
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is working in converter or regenerator mode, it
supports a maximum client data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s and offers multiple
clock settings.
The module can be used as an unidirectional dual regenerator or as a bi-
directional single module regenerator.
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx only supports performance monitoring of the
optical layer OPR, OPT, LOS and LOF (in TDM mode). Internal loop backs
or external loop backs are supported on the client ports and on the net-
work port.
Transmission of 1G FC, 2G FC and 4G FC in converter mode is performed
by the client interface C4 only. When operating in TDM mode, the 4TCA-
PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx supports either 4 x GbE or 4 x 1G FC signals at the cli-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

ent interfaces C1 to C4.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-19

Hardware Description

Features • Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard (FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules) on the
client ports
• Implementation of media conversion (copper to fiber and vice
versa)
• No mixture of protocols
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning at any
supported data rate
• Fault and Performance monitoring on the client ports and network
port
• Support of multi clock settings
• Facility loop back on the client ports and network port

Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 1.25 Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.25 Gbit/s
• In converter mode transmission of 1G FC, 2G FC and 4G FC by the
client interface C4
• In TDM mode transmission of 4 x GbE, 4 x 1G FC or 2 x 2G FC at the
client interfaces C1 to C4
• Each client port can be looped back individually
• Support of
• 850 and 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• GbE copper interface

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP/4GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC
Electrical types SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface

characteristics • Data rates in TDM mode: 4.25 Gbit/s (4 x GbE or 4 x 1G FC)
• Data rates in converter mode:
• 1.0625 Gbit/s (1G FC),
• 2.125 Gbit/s (2G FC),
• 4.25 Gbit/s (4G FC)
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

• LC receptacles

3-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 3-18 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path when the module is operating in TDM mode. The
signal path is described below.

4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V
TDM mode Converter mode
Client Network
Ports SFP Transceiver Port N
Rx Tx
C4-R o e N-T
CDR
e Mode Switch o
C4
o
C4-T
e
Tx
Controlling e
SFP Transceiver CDR
Rx
o N-R
C3-R Rx
o
e
C3
o Converter Mode and
C3-T e Regenerator Mode:
Tx 1 GFC, 2 GFC, 4 GFC
SFP Transceiver
TDM
TDM Mode:
Rx
C2-R o 4.250 Gbit/s proprietary
e
C2
o
C2-T
e
Tx
SFP Transceiver
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1
o
C1-T
e
Tx

Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 3-18: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery
is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a
higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are
then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at
a data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s. This combined output signal is routed to the
transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the elec-
trical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wave-
length and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-21

Hardware Description

In the DEMUX section, the proprietary frame is demultiplexed into its

original component client signals. Each client signal is decoded, serial-
ized and fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The
transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and
transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and
C4-T to the CPE.

Placement The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU

slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.
LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-19, Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -26 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.0625, 1.0625,
2.125, 1.25,
4.25 2.125,
4.25
Laser Module

Fig. 3-19: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-20: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Certification Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-21: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-23

Hardware Description

3.6 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel mod-
ule specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-
long distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and ap-
pearance as the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in
Section 3.5 “4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-18 adequately applies to the
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx. The only differences are that the 4TCA-PC-
4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx features ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM client
and network interfaces supporting 8 channels via 8 discrete module vari-
ants. The integrated network interface consists of an embedded (not vis-
ible) transceiver to transport the module variant’s supported wavelength.
However, the maximum realizable fiber link distances are shorter in com-
parison to the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx.
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1470
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1490
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1510
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1530
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1550
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1570
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1590
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-22, Figure 3-23 and Figure 3-24.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -26 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.0625, 1.0625,
2.125, 1.25,
4.25 2.125,
4.25
Laser Module

Fig. 3-22: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-23: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-24: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-25

Hardware Description

3.7 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel mod-
ule specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and long
distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appear-
ance as the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section
3.5 “4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-18 adequately applies to the 4TCA-PC-
4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx.
The only differences are that the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx features
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM client and network interfaces sup-
porting 8 channels via 8 discrete module variants. The integrated network
interface consists of an embedded (not visible) transceiver to transport
the module variant’s supported wavelength.
However, the maximum realizable fiber link distances are shorter in com-
parison to the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx.
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1470
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1490
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1510
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1530
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1550
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1570
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1590
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-25, Figure 3-26 and Figure 3-27.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +1 to +5 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -24 to -9 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.0625, 1.0625,
2.125, 1.25,
4.25 2.125,
4.25
Laser Module

Fig. 3-25: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-26: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-27: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-27

Hardware Description

3.8 WCA-PCN-2G5U
Variants:
WCA-PCN Module name none
2G5U

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal

output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal
input (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal

output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal
input (line East)

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-28: WCA-PCN-2G5U Front View

The WCA-PCN-2G5U is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as

indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-8 and Table 3-9, p. 3-29 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

WCA-PCN-2G5U faceplate and their meanings.

3-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCA-PCN-2G5U

Optical Port Markings

Table 3-8: WCA-PCN-2G5U Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
T transmit
R receive
C client port
NW network port West
NE network port East

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-9: WCA-PCN-2G5U LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
O/E module’s power supply Lp looping back on the client or
status/error condition network ports
C/R receiver status of the client C/T transmitter status of the
port client port
NW/R receiver status of the network NW/T transmitter status of the
port West network port West
NE/R receiver status of the network NE/T transmitter status of the
port East network port East

Description The WCA-PCN-2G5U is an access type multirate WDM channel module with
a single client and dual network Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA
compliant interfaces. The SFP transceivers use LC connectors for fiber ter-
mination. The module is designed for transport of services at data rates
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s over a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength between the ingress and egress node. This range covers FE,
GbE, ESCON, 1G FICON, 2G FICON, 1G FC, 2G FC, 1G CL, 2G CL, STM-1, STM-
4, STM-16, OC3, OC12, OC48, ATM 155 and ATM 622. The module supports
a maximum client data rate of 2.48 Gbit/s and offers multiple clock set-
tings. The following clock modes can be configured:
• clocked mode
One data rate is selected from the specified range and is set by the
user. The bit rate is fixed. Only signals with the adjusted data rate
can be received and transmitted. If the incoming data rate does not
match the adjusted data rate, the transceiver of the client port is
disabled and a clock error is indicated. Traffic stops.
• adaptive 3R mode
This mode is used for data rates that are one of the module’s data
rates. The supported data rates are automatically detected. If the
incoming data rate does not match the module data rate, the local
transceiver is disabled and a clock error is indicated. Traffic stops.
• adaptive 3R/odd rates mode
This mode allows the transport of data rates other than those speci-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

fied for the module. That is, all possible data rates between 100
Mbit/s and 2500 Mbit/s can be automatically detected and clocked.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-29

Hardware Description

The WCA-PCN-2G5U provides clock and data recovery (CDR) and performs
3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate.
Along with wavelength conversion, the WCA-PCN-2G5U enables the imple-
mentation of media conversion (e.g. multimode to single-mode or copper
to fiber). Due to its dual network interfaces, the module can be used to
create channel protection or perform full-duplex 3R regeneration, and be
used for building ring configurations. In case the module is deployed as
a inline regenerator, the cage on the client side need not be populated
with an SFP transceiver. When the redundant network interface is not
used, the corresponding transceiver cage may stay empty.
The module is configurable for up to 80 DWDM channels on a 100 GHz
wavelength grid or for up to 8 CWDM channels on a 20 nm wavelength
grid. The WCA-PCN-2G5U provides performance monitoring on the optical
layer only. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are supported on
the client port and on the network port. Each network port can be looped
back individually.
SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver. The client interface can optionally be equipped
with SFP transceivers listed in the table below.

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
Electrical types SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45

The network interfaces can optionally be equipped with SFP transceivers

listed in the table below.

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCA-PCN-2G5U

Signal Path Figure 3-29 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel protec-
tion mode. The signal path is described below.

CWDM/DWDM Network
WCA-PCN-2G5U SFP transceiver port West
Tx
e NW-T
Client 3R
port o
Rx e
C-R o o NW-R
e Rx
o Tx
C-T e e NE-T
Tx o
RxNW 3R
850/1310 nm
e
SFP transceiver RxNE 3R
o NE-R
decision logic Rx
CWDM/DWDM Network
SFP transceiver port East

Transmit direction Active signal path

Receive direction

Fig. 3-29: WCA-PCN-2G5U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal from the CPE
through the client port connector C-R. This signal is converted to the
electrical domain and clock and data recovery performed. The regenerated
signal is routed to the SFP transceivers of the east and west network ports
(NE and NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and data and clock recovery
is performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously.
If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic
based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver. The signal is fed into
the SFP transceiver of the client port. The transmitter (Tx) converts the
electrical signal back to an optical signal and transmit it through the cli-
ent port connector C-T to the CPE.
When the module operates in converter mode on network port West or on
network port East, the signal path is just like the one described above.
The difference is that the redundant network port is not used.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Placement The WCA-PCN-2G5U is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the

7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-31

Hardware Description

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-30, Figure 3-31 and Figure 3-32.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCA-PCN-2G5U

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 155, 622, 155, 622,
10625, 10625,
1250, 1250,
2125, 2125,
2488 2488
Laser Module

Fig. 3-30: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-31: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-32: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

3.9 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Variants:
Module name
2TCA-PCN none
1G3+2G5

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C2-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C2-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (C1-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C1-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal

output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal in-
put (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal

output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal in-
put (line East)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-33: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 3-10 list all abbreviations on the 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 faceplate and
their meanings.

Table 3-10: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

NE operating states of the network port East NE network port East

NW operating states of the network port West NW network port West

Document Version 7.1.5 3-33

Hardware Description

Description The 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 is an access type, 2-port multirate TDM channel

module. It features two client and two network Small Form-factor Plug-
gable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces. The SFP transceivers use LC con-
nectors for fiber termination.
The module is designed for transport of 2 x GbE or 2 x 1G FC over a specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. It is
possible to mix these services such as 1 x GbE and 1 x 1G FC. The trans-
mission of the client signals in transparent mode is supported.
At the network port a proprietary protocol runs with a data rate of
2.48832 Gbit/s. Due to its dual network interface, the module can be used
to create channel protection and versatile switched protection.
The module is configurable for up to 80 DWDM channels on the 100 GHz
wavelength grid or for up to 8 CWDM channels on the 20 nm wavelength
grid. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are supported on both the
client ports and on the network ports. Each port can be looped back in-
dividually.

Features • Channel protection

• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R conditioning at any supported data
rate by default
• Implementation of media conversion (multimode to single-mode or
copper to fiber and vice versa)
• Performance monitoring on the network ports
• Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided
• Internal loop backs or external loop backs on the client and network
ports

Client interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 1.0625 Gbit/s and 1.25 Gbit/s
• In transparent mode transmission of GbE, 1G FC, FICON
• Support of
• 850 nm and 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

Network interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s
• Proprietary ECC functionality
• Support of
• 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM ultra-long and very-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC

SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 3-34, p. 3-35 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified)
and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel
protection mode.
CWDM CWDM/DWDM
850/1310 nm
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 1310 nm Network
Client
port C2 SFP transceiver electronic regime SFP transceiver port West
Rx Tx
R-2 o e T-NW
3R
e o
o MUX
e
3R
T-2 e o R-NW
3R
Tx decision Rx
logic
Rx Tx
R-1 o e T-NE
e DEMUX o
o e
3R
T-1 e o R-NE
Tx TDM Rx
Client CWDM CWDM/DWDM Network
port C1 850/1310 nm 1310 nm port East
SFP transceiver SFP transceiver
Transmit direction Active signal path
Receive direction
Fig. 3-34: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the C1-R and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to

Document Version 7.1.5 3-35

Hardware Description

the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.

All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate
frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then multi-
plexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of 2.48832
Gbit/s. This combined output signal is routed to SFPs of the East and West
network ports (NE, NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the
electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wave-
length and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the
link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and data and clock recovery
is performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously.
If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic
based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver.
The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame
is demultiplexed into its original component client signals. Each client
signal is decoded, serialized and fed into the SFP transceiver of the cor-
responding client port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the electrical signals
back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port connec-
tors C1-T and C2-T to the CPE.

Placement The 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-35, Figure 3-36 and Figure 3-37.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.488 1.0625,
1.250
Laser Module

Fig. 3-35: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-36: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-37: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-37

Hardware Description

3.10 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
Variants:
Module name
none
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C2-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C2-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (C1-T) for client signal

output
Receiver connector (C1-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal

output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal in-
put (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal

output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal in-
put (line East)

Item number

Fig. 3-38: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 3-11 lists all abbreviations on the 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 faceplate
and their meanings.

Table 3-11: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
NE operating states of the network port East NE network port East
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

NW operating states of the network port West NW network port West

3-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Description The 2TCA-PCN-622+2G5 is an access type, 2-port multirate TDM channel

module. It features two client and two network Small Form-factor Plug-
gable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces.
This module supports signals with a data rate of 622 Mbit/s at the client
ports. The transmission of the client signals in transparent mode is sup-
ported.
At the network port a proprietary protocol runs with a data rate of
2.48832 Gbit/s. The module provides clock and data recovery to support
2xSTM-4/2xOC-12 services. Due to its dual network interface, the module
can be used to create channel protection and versatile switched protec-
tion.
The module is configurable for up to 80 DWDM channels on the 100 GHz
wavelength grid or for up to 8 CWDM channels on the 20 nm wavelength
grid. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are supported on both the
client ports and on the network ports. Each port can be looped back in-
dividually.

Features • Channel protection

• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R conditioning at any supported data
rate by default
• Implementation of media conversion (multimode to single-mode or
copper to fiber and vice versa)
• Performance monitoring on the network ports
• Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided
• Internal loop backs or external loop backs on the client and network
ports

Client interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 622.08 Mbit/s
• In transparent mode transmission of 2xSTM-4/2xOC-12
• Support of
• 850 and 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC

SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-39

Hardware Description

Network interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s
• Proprietary ECC functionality
• Support of
• 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM ultra-long and very-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC

SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 3-39, p. 3-40 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified)
and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel
protection mode.

CWDM CWDM/DWDM
850/1310 nm
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 1310 nm Network
Client
port C2 SFP transceiver electronic regime SFP transceiver port West
Rx Tx
R-2 o e T-NW
3R
e o
o MUX
e
3R
T-2 e 3R
o R-NW
Tx decision
Rx
logic
Rx Tx
R-1 o e T-NE
e DEMUX o
o e
3R
T-1 e o R-NE
Tx TDM Rx
Client CWDM CWDM/DWDM Network
port C1 850/1310 nm 1310 nm port East
SFP transceiver SFP transceiver

Transmit direction Active signal path

Receive direction
Fig. 3-39: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Functional Block Diagram
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-40 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the C1-R and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to
the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed. All sig-
nals are synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate frame. Using a pro-
prietary method, the mapped signals are then multiplexed together to a
combined output signal at a data rate of 2.48832 Gbit/s. This combined
output signal is routed to SFP transceivers of the East and West network
ports (NE, NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and data and clock recovery
is performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously.
If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic
based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver.
The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame
is demultiplexed into its original component client signals.
Each client signal is serialized and fed into the SFP transceiver of the cor-
responding client port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the electrical signals
back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port connec-
tors C1-T and C2-T to the CPE.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating
status of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-40, Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-42.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.488 0.622

Laser Module

Fig. 3-40: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-41

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-41: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-42: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx

3.11 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
Variants:
4TCA-LS-1G3 Channel module name
V#D01 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#D01
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number to
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#D64
Status LED indicators
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DC1
to
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DC8
signal input
Transmitter connector (C4-T) for cli-
ent signal output 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DL1
to
The description of the client interface 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DL8
C4 applies for the client interfaces C1
to C3 accordingly.

Transmitter connector (N-T) for net-

work signal output
Receiver connector (N-R) for network
signal input

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-43: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Front View

The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as

indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-12 and Table 3-13, p. 3-44 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-43

Hardware Description

Optical Port Markings

Table 3-12: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-13: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
C1/R receiver status of the client C1/T transmitter status of the
port 1 client port 1
C2/R receiver status of the client C2/T transmitter status of the
port 2 client port 2
C3/R receiver status of the client C3/T transmitter status of the
port 3 client port 3
C4/R receiver status of the client C4/T transmitter status of the
port 4 client port 4
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port
On module’s power supply status Err error condition; self-test
procedure

Description The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is an access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel

module specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with
very-long distance transmission. The module has four integrated short-
reach, 1310-nm interfaces on the client side. On the network side, it fea-
tures a single integrated very-long reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM inter-
face. The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP
3000R7 DWDM channels it supports. For fiber termination, all interfaces
use MU/PC simplex receptacles (also called MiniSC) on the faceplate. The
Tx connectors of the client ports accept single-mode fibers and the Rx
connectors take multimode fibers.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is intended for transport of FE, STM-1, OC-3, ATM
155 and ESCON at data rates of 125, 155 and 200 Mbit/s over a specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. It is
possible to mix the specified client services such as 2 x ESCON, 1 x STM-
1 and 1 x ATM 155. Unused client interfaces do not affect operation of
the terminated services.
The module provides clock recovery and performs 3R signal conditioning
by default. The clock recovery of the network port is fixed to the clock
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

frequency 1.25 Gbit/s.

The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx supports performance monitoring on the optical
layer only.

3-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx

The module supports parallel loop functionality on the client ports, that
is all four client channels are looped back simultaneously. Loop back op-
erations on the network port are not supported.

Signal Path Figure 3-44 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

4 x multirate CDR
Client 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
ports CDR
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1 o CDR
C1-T e
Tx
Network
MUX port N
CDR
Rx Rx N-T
C2-R o e
e o
C2 o CDR
C2-T e
Tx

Rx
C3-R o
e e
C3 o CDR o
e Tx
N-R
C3-T
Tx
1250 Mbit/s
DEMUX fixed clock

Rx
C4-R o
e
C4 o
C4-T e
Tx

TDM

Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 3-44: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery
is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a
higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are
then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at
a data rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. This combined signal is routed to the trans-
mitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
In the DEMUX section, the input signal is demultiplexed into its original
component client signals.
Each client signal is decoded, serialized and fed into the transmitter (Tx)
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

of the corresponding client port. The transmitters convert the electrical

signals back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port
connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and C4-T to the CPE.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-45

Hardware Description

Placement The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular

slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appro-
priate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-45, Figure 3-46 and Figure 3-47.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
#D01 Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -15 to -8 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm -28 to -8 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1310 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 1250 125,
155
200
Laser Module

Fig. 3-45: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-46: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-47: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Warranty Label
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

3-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx

3.12 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel module
specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long
distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appear-
ance as the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section
3.11 “4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx”, p. 3-43 adequately applies to the 4TCA-
LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface allowing support for 8-channel
CWDM networks via 8 discrete module variants. However, the maximum
realizable fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the 4TCA-
LS+1G3-V#Dxx.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1470
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1490
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1510
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1530
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1550
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1570
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1590
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-48, Figure 3-49 and Figure 3-50.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
#C1470
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +2 to +2 dBm -15 to -8 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm -28 to -8 dBm
Wavelength: 1471 nm/SM 1310 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 1250 125,
155
200
Laser Module

Fig. 3-48: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-47

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-49: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-50: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-48 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 4
Enterprise Type Channel Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all enterprise type channel mod-
ules available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports, the simplified block diagram and module specific details.
Moreover, the module’s key features are presented, the signal path within
the module is briefly discussed, and an example of the module’s labeling
are given.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:

4.1 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx
4.2 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx
4.3 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
4.4 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 4-1

Hardware Description

Identification Enterprise channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the la-
bel printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in
each module description.

Naming Enterprise type WDM channel modules are named WCEs and enterprise
Conventions type x-Port TDM channel modules are designated xTCEs. Otherwise the no-
menclature of enterprise type channel modules follows the basic rules of
the naming conventions as described in Chapter 2”, p. 2-1 and Chapter 3”,
p. 3-1.

General WCEs and xTCEs are cost-optimized modules intended to be used in enter-
prise networks. When operated within the outlined specifications, these
modules will be capable of a 100 km reach without using optical amplifi-
cation, dispersion compensation or digital signal regeneration. WCEs and
xTCEs typically do not support standard FEC functionality according to
ITU-T G.709 and in-band DCN management.
Module Design Enterprise type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot
plug-in modules that are compatible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU
Slimline Shelf (SH1HU).
Enterprise type channel modules only have integrated (non-pluggable)
transceivers for the client and network interfaces. The optical receptacles
are angled at 45° to preserve minimum fiber bend radii when connecting
the optical cables.
Enterprise type channel modules described below have special EMC con-
tact strips attached to them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring
modules. The EMC contact strips avoid unintended propagation of elec-
tromagnetic energy towards the external environment that might disrupt
other equipment.
Module Handling WCEs and xTCEs are electrostatic sensitive modules. Therefore they must
be handled with care. For information on module handling, refer to the
Detailed Procedures.

Management and Using the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), all enterprise type chan-
Operating Status nel modules are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Net-
work Management System (NMS). Management allows user access to
module conditions as well as network status. The status of receivers and
transmitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or ob-
served with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for con-
trolling and status query are transmitted via the internal system bus
between the channel modules and the NCU.

LED Indicators All enterprise type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are
visible through the faceplates. Their colors display different operating
states. The status that each color of the LED indicators represents is de-
scribed in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Enterprise type channel modules have several printed labels (module type
label, certification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

contain specific module information. The labels of the individual modules

are shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

4-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as
• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• technical specifications (channel number, output power range,
receiver dynamic range, wavelength and supported data rates of the
module)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-3

Hardware Description

4.1 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx
Variants:
WCE-LS-T Module name WCE-LS-T-V#D01
V#D01

to
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number
WCE-LS-T-V#D64

WCE-LS-T-V#DC1
Status LED indicators
to
WCE-LS-T-V#DC8

Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input WCE-LS-T-V#DL1

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal to
output
WCE-LS-T-V#DL8

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Front View

The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as

indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 4-1 and Table 4-2, p. 4-5 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

4-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx

Optical Port Markings

Table 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Port Markings Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C client port
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver.
Table 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LED Markings Meaning
On/Err operating status of the module/error condition
Loop looping back on the client port or network port
C/R receiver status of the client port
C/T transmitter status of the client port
N/R receiver status of the network port
N/T transmitter status of the network port 5

Description The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is an enterprise type low-speed transparent channel

module. It converts optical client signals to specific ITU-T compliant
wavelengths necessary for DWDM and vice versa. The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is
network protocol transparent. Clocking is not supported. The module is
available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM chan-
nels it supports.

Features • Full-duplex rate-independent 2R signal regeneration

• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network port
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
• Performance monitoring on the optical layer only
• Internal and external loop backs on the client port and network port

Client interface • Integrated, 1310-nm multimode interface

characteristics • Support of Sysplex Timer, ESCON, Ethernet, FDDI, FE, STM-1/OC-3
and ATM 155
• Data rates in the range from 8 Mbit/s to 200 Mbit/s
• MU/PC type receptacles

Network interface • Integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rates in the range from 8 Mbit/s to 200 Mbit/s
• MU/PC type receptacles
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-5

Hardware Description

Signal Path Figure 4-2, p. 4-6 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path, which is described below.

Rx
WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Tx
C-R o e N-T
e o

Tx Rx
o e
C-T e o N-R

Client Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction
Fig. 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain
and routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter
converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the
link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the
client port. The transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an op-
tical one and transmits it through the client port connector C-T to the
CPE.

Placement The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCE-LS+1G3-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -21 to -16 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -5 dBm -28 to -5 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1260 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 8 to 200 8 to 200
Laser Module

Fig. 4-3: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-4: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-5: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-7

Hardware Description

4.2 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx
The WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx is an enterprise type low-speed transparent chan-
nel module specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems.
It has the same design, functionality and appearance as the WCE-LS-T-
V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 4.1 “WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx”, p. 4-4
adequately applies to the WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T com-
pliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface allowing support for 8-channel
CWDM networks via 8 discrete module variants. However, the maximum
realizable fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the WCE-LS-T-
V#Dxx.
The WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • WCE-LS-T-V#C1470
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1490
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1510
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1530
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1550
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1570
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1590
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-6, Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCE-LS+1G3-V
#C1470
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -21 to -16 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -5 dBm -28 to -5 dBm
Wavelength: 1471 nm/SM 1260 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 8 to 200 8 to 200

Laser Module

Fig. 4-6: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-7: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-8: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-9

Hardware Description

4.3 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
Variants:
8TCE-ESCON-2G5
V#D01 Channel module name 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D01
to
Status LED indicators 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D64

Serial number 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DC1

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
to
Receiver connector (C8-R) for 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DC8
client signal input
Transmitter connector (C8-T) for
client signal output 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DL1
to

The description of the client interface 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DL8

C8 applies for the client interfaces
C1 to C7 accordingly.

Transmitter connector (N-T) for

network signal output
Receiver connector (N-R) for
network signal input

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 4-9: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Front View

The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module

as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 4-3 and Table 4-4, p. 4-11 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

4-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx

Optical Port Markings

Table 4-3: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Port Markings Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
C5 client port 5
C6 client port 6
C7 client port 7
C8 client port 8
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 4-4: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LED LED
Markings Meaning Markings Meaning
R receive T transmit
C1-R receiver status of the client C1-T transmitter status of the
port 1 client port 1
C2-R receiver status of the client C2-T transmitter status of the
port 2 client port 2
C3-R receiver status of the client C3-T transmitter status of the
port 3 client port 3
C4-R receiver status of the client C4-T transmitter status of the
port 4 client port 4
C5-R receiver status of the client C5-T transmitter status of the
port 5 client port 5
C6-R receiver status of the client C6-T transmitter status of the
port 6 client port 6
C7-R receiver status of the client C7-T transmitter status of the
port 7 client port 7
C8-R receiver status of the client C8-T transmitter status of the
port 8 client port 8
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port
On module’s power supply status Err error condition; self-test
procedure

Description The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is an enterprise type 8-port TDM channel

module especially designed for the transport of up to eight 200 Mbit/s
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

ESCON services in DWDM networks. The module electrically multiplex-

es/demultiplexes the client signals into/from one WDM channel carried
over a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength.

Document Version 7.1.5 4-11

Hardware Description

The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7
DWDM channels it supports.

Features • Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning

• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network port
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
• Performance monitoring on the optical layer only
• Parallel loop functionality on the client ports
• Loop back operations on the network port are not supported.

Client interface • Eight independent, integrated, 1310-nm multimode interfaces

characteristics • Support of ESCON protocol only
• Data rate of 200 Mbit/s
• MU/PC duplex receptacles

Network interface • Integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Fixed data rate of 2.5 Gbits/s
• MU/PC duplex receptacles
Signal Path Figure 4-10, p. 4-13 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path.

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R. These signals are con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate
frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then electron-
ically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of
2.5 Gbit/s. This combined signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the
network port. The transmitter converts the electrical output signal back
to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it
through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
In the DEMUX section, the input signal is demultiplexed into its original
component client signals. Each client signal is decoded, serialized and
fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The trans-
mitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit
them through the client port connectors C1-T to C8-T to the CPE.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx

Client 8 x 200 Mbit/s

8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx TDM
ports
Rx CDR
C1-R o
e
C1 o CDR
C1-T e
Tx
Rx CDR
C2-R o
e
C2 o CDR

MUX
C2-T e
Tx
Rx CDR
C3-R o
e Network
C3 o CDR port N
C3-T e
Tx Rx N-T
Rx CDR e
C4-R o o
e
C4 o CDR
C4-T e
Tx
Rx
C5-R o
e
C5 o e
C5-T e CDR o
Tx N-R
Rx Tx
C6-R o 2500 Mbit/s
e fixed clock
C6 o
C6-T e
Tx

DEMUX
Rx
C7-R o
e
C7 o
C7-T e
Tx
Rx
C8-R o
e
C8 o
C8-T e
Tx

Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 4-10: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Placement The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two reg-

ular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the ap-
propriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.
LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-11, Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-13

Hardware Description

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -21 to -14.5 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -17 dBm -28 to -14 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1270 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 2500 200 ESCON
Laser Module

Fig. 4-11: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

This page intentionally left blank

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-12: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-13: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx

4.4 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx is an enterprise type 8-port TDM channel
module specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems. It
has the same design, functionality and appearance as the
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 4.3 “8TCE-
ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx”, p. 4-10 adequately applies to the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-
V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx features an
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface allowing support for 8-
channel CWDM networks via 8 discrete module variants. However, the
maximum realizable fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx.
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1470
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1490
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1510
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1530
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1550
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1570
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1590
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-14, Figure 4-15 and Figure 4-16.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
#C1470
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: -2 to +2 dBm -21 to -14.5 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -10 dBm -29 to -14 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1270 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 2500 200 ESCON
Laser Module

Fig. 4-14: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label

HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-15

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-15: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-16: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 5
Pluggable Transceivers
This chapter describes the pluggable transceivers in general, discusses
the naming conventions and provides identification information.

Channel modules with interchangeable interfaces use pluggable fiber-op-

tic transceivers or electrical transceivers. The Fiber Service Platform uses
two form factors:
• Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (SFP transceivers) used for
transmission speeds below 10 Gbit/s
• Extended Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (XFP transceivers) used
for transmission speeds of around 10 Gbit/s
These transceivers comply with the standard dimensions defined by the
SFP/XFP Multi-Sourcing Agreement and meet the requirements of valid
Laser Eye and Electrical Safety Standards. The XFP form factor is not com-
patible with the SFP form factor.
In the following, SFP transceivers and XFP transceivers are referred to as
pluggable transceivers.

Pluggable transceivers must be specifically ordered from ADVA AG Optical

Networking. If ordered, they will be delivered together with the individual
SFP or XFP-based channel module.

All pluggable transceivers are simple to deploy and hot pluggable, allow-
ing channel modules to be changed without an interruption to system
power. They give the end user great flexibility in configuring and recon-
figuring the network at low costs. For all matters relating to safety pre-
cautions as well as insertion and removal procedures, refer to the Safety
Guide and Detailed Procedures.

Handling Normal handling precautions for electrostatic sensitive devices should be

taken.
HWD_5_Transc.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 5-1

Hardware Description

5.1 Identification
Naming The transceiver name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to
Conventions a very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the transceiver’s specific features.
Example:

This example describes a multirate 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM SFP transceiver for
very-long distance transmission. It supports data rates between 100
Mbit/s and 2.67 Gbit/s and is intended for the DWDM channel no. 01 car-
ried over the wavelength of 1529.55 nm. The transceiver features LC type
connectors supporting single-mode fibers.
Table 5-1 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.

Table 5-1: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions

Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Form of the package SFP small form factor pluggable
XFP extended form factor pluggable
Data rates 10G Depending on the transceiver type e. g.:
9953.2 Mbit/s, 10312.5 Mbit/s,
10518.75 Mbit/s, 10709 Mbit/s
11G between 9953 Mbit/s and 11318 Mbit/s
1.0G 1062.5 Mbit/s
1.3G 1250 Mbit/s
2.5G 2488.32 Mbit/s
2.7G 2700 Mbit/s
2G1 1062 Mbit/s, 1250 Mbit/s and 2125 Mbit/s
2G5 2125 Mbit/s, 2488 Mbit/s and 2500 Mbit/s
2G5U universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and
2500 Mbit/s
2G7U universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and
2700 Mbit/s
4GU universal data rates between 1250 Mbit/s and
4250 Mbit/s
CL 1062 Mbit/s and 2125 Mbit/s
HWD_5_Transc.fm

GbE 1250 Mbit/s

5-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Identification

Table 5-1: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions (Forts.)

Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Data rates HS between 100 Mbit/s and 1,250 Mbit/s
universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and
HSU
1500 Mbit/s
universal data rates between 8 Mbit/s and
LS
200 Mbit/s
STM-4 622 Mbit/s
Wavelengths 850 850 nm
1310 1310 nm
1550 1550 nm unspecified (wide band, grey,...)
C1470, C1490, CWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-T G694.2
C1590, C1610, CWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-T G694.2:
C1510, C1530, 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm, 1611 nm,
C1550, C1570 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1591 nm, 1571 nm
D1529.55 to DWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-TG 694.1,
D1603.17 100 GHz grid compatible
DWDM channels acc. to FSP 3000R7
DWDM channel # #D01 to #D64
wavelength table
Link distance I 0 km to 5 km (0 mi. to 3.1 mi.)
performances S 5 km to 30 km (3.1 mi. to 18.6 mi.)
L 30 km to 70 km (18.6 mi. to 43.4 mi.)
V 70 km to 120 km (43.4 mi. to 74.4 mi.)
U 120 km to 240 km ((74.4 mi. to 148.8 mi.)
R 240 km to 360 km (148.8 mi. to 223.2 mi.)
X 360 km to 600 km (223.2 mi. to 372.0 mi.)
Type of optical fiber SM single-mode fiber G. 652
MM 50 multimode fiber 50 µm, G. 651
MM 62 multimode fiber 62.5 µm, G. 651
Connector type LC LC/PC
RJ RJ-45 (electrical connector)

Color Code For easy and quick identification, the bale-clasp of a pluggable transceiv-
er provides a coloured sleeve. A blue sleeve indicates a long-wavelength
(1310 nm) transceiver and black sleeve points to a short-wave-length
(850 nm) transceiver. See also Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5, p. 5-6. The bale-
clasps of CWDM SFP transceivers have colored sleeves as well. Each color
e.g. green, red, orange etc. represents a specific CWDM wavelength
(channel). DWDM SFP transceivers have no colored sleeves as shown in
Figure 5-6, p. 5-7.

Labeling Each ADVA-approved pluggable transceiver is clearly labeled by ADVA Op-

tical Networking AG as shown in Figure 5-4, p. 5-6. In addition, there may
be labels from the manufacturer on the narrow side.

ADVA transceiver The ADVA transceiver type label is attached to the top of each pluggable
HWD_5_Transc.fm

type label transceiver. The label displays the transceiver type and other relevant in-
formation as illustrated in Figure 5-1, p. 5-4.

Document Version 7.1.5 5-3

Hardware Description

SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V
TM

Channel
Optical Networking
SM/LC #01
Number

Serial # XX xxxxxxxxxxx
Item # xxxxxxxxxx HW Rev.: x.xx

Fig. 5-1: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver Type Label

An example of an electrical SFP transceiver type label is shown in Figure

5-2. This label is slightly different from the other SFP labels as there is
no wavelength, distance performance or channel number:

SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL
TM

Optical Networking
RJ45

Serial # XX xxxxxxxxxxx
Item # xxxxxxxxxx HW Rev.: x.xx

Fig. 5-2: Example of an Electrical SFP Transceiver Type Label

ADVA Bar Code Label Each pluggable transceiver can be identified by the ADVA bar code label,
which is on the other narrow side of the device as can be seen in Figure
5-4, p. 5-6). This label contains the bar code and item number belonging
to it.

Package Label The cardboard box in which the pluggable transceiver is shipped has a la-
bel like the one in Fig. 8-3. In addition, this label contains:
• the data rates
• the version of the specifications
TM
Item Number:

Optical Networking
Märzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen xxxxxxxxxx
Tel.: +49 3693 450 0
Fax: +49 3693 450 499
Official Name:
SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V
SM/LC#01

HW Revision:
Wavelength: x.xx
1529.55 nm
Serial Number:

Datarates:
155Mbit/s ... 2.67Gbit/s
XXxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 5-3: Example of a Package Label (SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V/SM/LC)

HWD_5_Transc.fm

5-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers

5.2 SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers

Transceiver Types To support a wide range of applications, the FSP 3000R7 uses a whole set
and Variants of pluggable transceiver types, such as
• Short-wavelength (850 nm)
• Long-wavelength (1310 nm)
• wide band (1550 nm)
• CWDM (available in eight ITU-T compliant wavelengths from
1471 nm to 1611 nm)
• DWDM (available in 80 ITU-T compliant wavelengths on the 100 GHz
grid from 1529.55 nm to 1603.17 nm)
A current list of the pluggable transceiver types and variants approved
and released by ADVA Optical Networking AG can be found in the FSP
3000R7 Module and System Specification.

General Description A pluggable transceiver is a compact, hot-swappable device that performs

both transmitting and receiving functions in full duplex in the same pack-
age. It includes an optical transmitter and receiver pair with or without
clock and data recovery integrated circuit. SFP transceivers physically fit
in any cage of an SFP-based channel module and XFP transceivers in any
cage of an XFP-based channel module.
If a pluggable transceiver is installed and configured, it receives optical
signals from the client equipment or network fiber at the wavelength spe-
cific for the transceiver. Then it performs optical to electrical conversion
and transfers the electrical signals to the relevant circuits on the board
for further processing and transmission. Conversely, the pluggable trans-
ceiver receives electrical signals from the relevant circuits and performs
electrical to optical conversion. Then it transmits the optical signals at
the wavelength specific for the transceiver over optical fibers to the cli-
ent or network interfaces.
Typical data rates for SFP fiber-optic transceivers are up to 4.25 Gbit/s
(4G FC), 2.5 Gbit/s (STM-16/OC-48) and lower. XFP transceivers are used
for applications with a data rate in the range of 10 Gbit/s (10GbE, STM-
64/OC-192).

Features The main features of pluggable fiber-optic transceivers are as follows:

• Class 1 Laser safety compliance
• Low EMI metallic enclosure
• Uncooled or cooled laser transmitter (depending on the type)
• Transmit disable and loss-of signal functions
• Multirate capabilities
• Multi-protocol compliancy
• Very low jitter
• Low power dissipation
• Common mechanical outline for all pluggable transceivers
• On board digital diagnostics that provide remote monitoring
HWD_5_Transc.fm

capability
• Measurements and real-time monitoring of:

Document Version 7.1.5 5-5

Hardware Description

• Tx bias current (analog) [mA]

• Rx optical input power (analog) [dBm]
• Tx optical output power (analog) [dBm]
• Transceiver temperature (analog) [C]
• Transceiver supply voltage (analog) [mV]
• EEPROM of each pluggable transceiver includes information about
the transceiver itself (vendor code, wavelength, data rates and
other relevant factory parameters) as well as ADVA-specific
information (device code, serial number, etc.) so that the user can
query the transceiver to make sure it is the right one for the
intended application.
Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5 show an example of a fiber-optic SFP transceiver
and an XFP transceiver for the client interface.

Bale-
clasp Host
connectors

Dust Optical Manufacturer labels ADVA SFP transceiver

cover interface type label

Sleeve
(black
colored) ADVA bar
code label

Fig. 5-4: Example of an SFP Transceiver (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC)

Dust Host
cover connectors

Manufacturer
label
Optical interface Bale-clasp (blue colored)

ADVA bar
code label

Fig. 5-5: Example of an XFP Transceiver (XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC)

HWD_5_Transc.fm

Figure 5-6, p. 5-7 shows an example of a DWDM SFP transceiver for the net-
work interface.

5-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers

Optical Host
interface connectors

Dust cover

Bale-clasp
(no colored
sleeve)

Fig. 5-6: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver

The design of the latching mechanism and dust cover may differ on other
pluggable transceivers.

Optical Connectors Each pluggable transceiver has LC type receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)
connectors that make up one optical interface. Each pluggable transceiv-
er is supplied with a dust cover for protection of the optical ports and for
optimization of EMI performance.

The dust cover should be left in to prevent contamination of the

Caution optical connectors when not in use or during handling, shipping and
storage of the transceiver.

Management Information about the transceiver itself, the operating status and net-
work operating conditions can be obtained using the management soft-
ware.

Application Notes • Do not use pluggable transceivers from third-party vendors! Use
only pluggable transceivers that are approved by ADVA Optical
Networking AG.
Pluggables-based channel modules identify any transceiver by
means of ADVA-specific information contained in the EEPROM.
It will not be possible to read out any measurement parameters or
module-specific information from the non-ADVA approved pluggable
transceiver.
There is no guarantee regarding behavior for the use of non-ADVA
approved transceivers in conjunction with the channel modules.

You should clearly keep in mind that the use of pluggable

Caution transceivers other than those approved by ADVA AG Optical
Networking will result in loss of safety approval for the FSP.
HWD_5_Transc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 5-7

Hardware Description

• A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of

pluggable transceivers will be reported by:
- an alarm which is generated and logged by the management
- SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs
of the channel module.

Specifications For information on optical port characteristics of individual pluggable

transceivers, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specification.

5.3 SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver

Since the client interface is sometimes a copper interface, it is useful to
have a copper connection option to the WDM system.

The SFP Electrical GbE Transceiver (SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45) provides

1000BASE-T GbE connectivity over a commonly installed Category 6
structured copper cable. Fig. 5-7 depicts this transceiver.

Compact RJ-45 ADVA’s Transceiver Type Label

Connector Assembly will be affixed on the top.

Latching
mechanism

Fig. 5-7: SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45

The receiver and transmitter of the device are packaged in a die cast
metal housing delivering superior EMI and RFI performance. As can be
seen in Fig. 5-7, the front portion of the transceiver is larger than those
of fiber-optic transceivers. This is necessary to accommodate the RJ-45
connector which integrates the magnetic coupling circuitry required by
the Ethernet physical layer specification. The host side of the transceiver
complies with the standard dimensions defined by the SFP MSA. Labeling
corresponds to that of fiber-optic transceivers.

The SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 only plugs into the SFP cage on the client
side of a channel module. In conjunction with a CWDM or DWDM SFP
transceiver, both installed on the network side of the same channel
module, the SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 converts from copper to fiber,
and vice versa.
HWD_5_Transc.fm

5-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver

Features • Fiber-port-compliant device that functions properly in any slot

designed for optical SFPs
• 1000 BASE-T operation
• 1.25 Gbit/s bi-directional data links
• Link length up to 100 m (328 ft.) over STP Cat-6 cable
• Loss-of-signal functionality
• No support of any analog values
• Compatible with Gigabit Ethernet and 1000BASE-T standards
(IEEE standard 802.3z-2000 and IEEE standard 802.3ab-1999)
• Conventional RJ45 interface with built-in magnetics for optimized
EMI performance.
• On board digital diagnostics that provide remote monitoring
capability
• EEPROM of each pluggable transceivers includes information about
the transceiver itself (vendor code, wavelength, data rates and
other relevant factory parameters) as well as ADVA-specific
information (device code, serial number, etc.) so that user can
query the transceiver to make sure it is the right one for the
intended application.

Management Information about the transceiver itself, the operating status and
network operating conditions can be obtained using the management
software.

Application Notes • To prevent system problems do not use pluggable electrical trans-
ceivers from third-party vendors! Use only pluggable electrical
transceivers that are approved by ADVA Optical Networking AG.
Pluggables-based channel modules only accept ADVA-approved
electrical transceivers. These channel modules identify any
transceiver by means of ADVA-specific information contained in the
EEPROM.
It will not be possible to read out any module-specific information
from the non-ADVA approved pluggable transceiver.
There is no guarantee on behavior for the use of non-ADVA approved
electrical transceivers in conjunction with CWDM or DWDM SFP
transceivers and with the channel modules.
• A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of
pluggable electrical transceivers will be reported by:
- an alarm which is generated and logged by the management
- SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs
of the channel module.
• A pluggable electrical transceiver must not be directly connected to
metallic tip and ring outside-plant conductors.

Specifications For information on technical details of the transceiver, please refer to FSP
HWD_5_Transc.fm

3000R7 Module and System Specification.

Document Version 7.1.5 5-9

Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_5_Transc.fm

5-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 6
Management and Switch Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all management and switch
modules available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports and module specific details.
The descriptions of the management modules presents the features and
interfaces.
In the descriptions of the switch modules is a simplified block diagram
given, while the signal path within the module is briefly discussed, and
an example of the module’s labeling are presented.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:

6.1 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS
6.2 NCU (NCU2E Type)
6.3 SCU
6.4 VSM
6.5 RSM-OLM#1630
6.6 RSM-SF#1510
6.7 RSM-SF#1310
6.8 OSCM-V#1630
6.9 2OSCM-V#1630
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 6-11

Hardware Description

General The management modules enable the management of the network ele-
ments (NE).
• Every NE contains a Network Control Unit (NCU) that provides the
sole management interface to the outside of the NE.
• Every active (managed) shelf contains a Shelf Control Unit (SCU). All
SCUs of an NE are connected by optical links. They connect the NCU
to the modules within the shelf.
• The Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) allows the transmission of
monitoring information (DCN) over a network fiber independent of
data traffic. A 1630 nm wavelength is used to transmit a 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal. These signals outside of the normal filter spectrum
must be added and dropped directly at the network fiber. The OSC
signal is also used for protection purposes in VSM protected links.
• The switching modules are used in protection schemes where only
parts of the optical system are duplicated.
All optical filter modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-
wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 management modules have different faceplate markings.
LED indicators and optical port markings of the individual modules are ex-
plained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All optical filter modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visible
through the faceplates. The colors of the LED indicator display different
operating states. The status that each color of the LED indicators repre-
sents is described in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Management and switch modules have several printed labels on the board
cover, which contain specific module information. The labels of the indi-
vidual modules are shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as

• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• port description
• technical specifications
• certification marks (only for the management modules)

Certification Label One discrete certification label is printed on the board cover of the switch
modules. This label provides approved certification marks. The certifica-
tion marks of the management modules are printed on the module type
label of the individual modules.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.

6-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

6.1 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

Module name Variants:

NCU-A
NCU-B
Module status LED Serial number NCU-GDPS
indicators
Reset button
Serial port

USB port
Ethernet port with two
LAN port LEDs

Item number

Fig. 6-1: Example of NCU-A Front View

NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS modules uses the same faceplate.

Faceplate Markings Table 6-1 lists all abbreviations on the NCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 6-1: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Electrical Ports
P power supply status of the module Ser Serial port
Mod operating states of the module USB USB port
C Ethernet port

Description The Network Element Control Unit (NCU) provides system management ca-
pabilities and network connection to the FSP 3000R7 system. Depending
on the desired capability of the network element (NE), the NCU-A, NCU-
B or NCU-GDPS is used. These module variants have the same basic func-
tionality and design. Therefore, this description applies to all module vari-
ants. Table 6-2, p. 6-14 points out module specific features.
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in
modules, that act as a hardware interfaces between the different modules
of the system and the equipment connected to their management inter-
faces.
One NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is able to manage a whole NE. Using In-
ternet protocols, such a hardware interface provides management and
configuration capabilities, for example provisioning, alarming and so on.
The NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS directly control and monitor the modules
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

in its own shelf (master shelf) and indirectly those in the main shelves
through the Shelf Control Units (SCUs). A NCU communicates with the SCU

Document Version 7.1.5 6-13

Hardware Description

in the master shelf using an internal system bus. Exchange of information

between the SCU in the master shelf and the SCUs in the main shelves
takes place over their fiber ring.
The NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS can be accessed through a serial, USB or
Ethernet port via terminal program or Ethernet using telnet, FTP, htpp,
SCP, SNMP, NTP etc. The NCUs’ command line interface allows fast (local)
interaction. External Network Management Systems (NMSs) are supported
using SNMP over the Ethernet interface. External DCN connections can be
provided through embedded communication channels (ECC). Each NCU
variant must be configured for the specific operating environment.
Table 6-2 shows management capabilities of the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-
GDPS modules.

Table 6-2: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Management Capabilities

Features NCU-A NCU-B NCU-GDPS
CWDM support X X X
DWDM support - X X
Hybrid support - X X
WCC /xTCC support (core type) - X X
WCA /xTCA support (access type) X X X
WCE /xTCE support (enterprise type) - - X
FC support - X X
GDPS - X X
X means supported; - means not supported

Functions and The main functions and features of the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are:
Features • Registration and deregistration of all inserted modules
• Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power
supply units and the fan unit
• Detection of component failures
• Error and warning messages
• Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control
information to/from the NCU to the SCUs to which it is physically
connected using fiber-optic patch cable pairs
• Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up
to 20 shelves (1 master shelf and 19 main shelves)
• Open platform to connect to any IP based system
• Remote management and configuration of all interconnected shelves
• Furnish SNMP monitoring and trap generation
• Support of up to 5 ECCs
• Reset button to reset the module
• Status LED Indicators on the faceplate
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

• Support of all NE types, such as OTM and OADM

6-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

Interfaces The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS provide a serial port, USB port and
Ethernet port on their faceplates for management purposes.

Serial Port The serial port (EIA/TIA-232) is a 9-pin D-subminiature male panel con-
nector (SUB-D9). It can be used to run the IP via a Point-to-Point-Proto-
col (PPP) connection, or it may be used for a direct serial connection with
a serial null modem cable (female/female). This port may also be confi-
gured and managed by Service Personnel. The serial port can be disabled.
The SUB-D9 Connector has the following pinout:
Table 6-3: Male SUB-D9 Connector Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B, NCU-GDPS)
Male SUB-D9 Connector Pin Number Signal Signal Direction
1 CD
2 RXD Receive data
1
6 3 TXD Transmit data
4 DTR Data terminal ready
5 SG Signal ground
6 DSR Data set ready
9 7 RTS Request To Send
5
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 RI Ring indicator

On delivery, the socket of the serial port is equipped with a protective cap
to prevent contamination.

Note that EIA/TIA-232 was formerly known as recommended standard RS-

232 before its acceptance by the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) and
Note Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA).

Use a serial null modem cable with SUB-D 9 connectors on both ends.

USB Port The USB port is a Mini-AB receptacle that complies with USB 2.0 specifi-
cations. It provides only USB to RS232 emulation. The USB port can be
used for a direct serial connection to a management PC. If necessary, this
port can be disabled.

A USB connection requires a respective driver in the management PC. This

driver is available on the User Documentation Set CD or can be obtained
Note from ADVA.

The Mini-AB receptacle can accept either a Mini-A USB plug or a Mini-B
USB plug, but use only a detachable USB cable with a Mini-A USB plug on
one end and a standard A-plug on the other end.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

For pinout of the Mini-AB receptacle, see Table 6-4, p. 6-16.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-15

Hardware Description

Table 6-4: Mini-AB USB Type Receptacle Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B,

NCU-GDPS)
Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pin Function Description
1 V BUS USB power
2 D- Negative Data
signal
3 D+ Positive Data signal
4 ID Identification
5 GND Signal ground

Most of the pins of a Mini-USB connector are the same as a standard USB
connector, except pin 4. Pin 4 is called ID, and is not present in standard
USB plugs. The ID pin identifies which type of plug is connected. This pin
is shorted to ground in the Mini-A plug and unconnected in the Mini-B
plug.

Ethernet Port The Ethernet port is a female RJ-45 receptacle used to connect the NCU-
A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS to the NMS or the management PC via a standard
Ethernet crossover cable. However, in a system equipped with an Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC), the connection is made at the OSCM instead.
In this case the NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is connected to the Ethernet
switch of the OSCM using a standard Ethernet straight-through cable as
well. After this configuration, one IP address (that on the NCU) is used
for the complete NE.
The ports comply with the IEEE 802.3 10/100BASE-TX and IEEE 802.3u
standards. Each Ethernet port supports
• Data rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet)
• Adjustment of the data rates using the auto-negotiation function
• Enabling/disabling the port
• Data Communications Equipment (DCE) according to IEEE 802.3
(automatic MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
• Half/full duplex mode
See Table 6-5 for the Ethernet port pinout on the NCU variants.

Table 6-5: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS)
RJ-45 Panel Jack Pin Number Signal Signal Direction
1 TXD+ output
2 TXD- output
Pin 8
3 RXD+ input
4 no connection
5 no connection
Pin 1
6 RXD- input
7 no connection
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

8 no connection

Use a standard shielded Category 5 cable.

6-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

Operating System The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS run Linux-Kernel 2.4.25 and a Linux Dis-
tribution which is optimized for embedded applications. Linux starts au-
tomatically when the FSP 3000R7 is powered up. The system is typically
ready for management operation in about 70 seconds after power-on.
Linux needs to be configured for the specific environment. See the User
Guide of the FSP 3000R7 documentation set for configuration informa-
tion.

Application The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS supports the following management
Software tools:
• Craft Console
• Web Browser Console
• Element Manager
• TL1
• SNMP agent

Reset Button To reset the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS, use the reset button located
on their faceplates. If required, press and release this button using a
pointed tool. The green power LED comes on and the module starts up.
The optical transmission system is not affected by a restart.

Default NCU The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS come with the following factory-default
Settings configuration:

Table 6-6: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Factory-Default Settings

Option Settings
DSUB9/Mini-AB USB Port 19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
(Logging into the NE requires an activated carrier
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses 192.168.1.1 (port C1)
192.168.1.1 (port C2)
Subnet 255.255.255.0 (port C1)
255.255.255.0 (port C2)
Default Gateway 192.168.2.12
Hostname nemi
User Accounts ADMIN, PROVISION, OPERATOR, MONITOR
Account Passwords All account passwords are factory set to CHGME.1

Placement The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are placed in slot A of the 1HU Shelf or
the 7HU Shelf and makes it the master shelf that should have shelf ID 1.

LED indicators The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS have two LED indicators on the face-
plate and two LAN port LEDs per Ethernet Interface. The LED colors rep-
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting

Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.1 ‚ p. 3-14.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-17

Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
NCU-A
Port Description Serial Number:
Ser Serial
USB USB-Serial xxxxxxxxxxxx
C NET 10/100 routed

Electronic Module

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-2: Example of an NCU-A Module Type Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-3: Example of an NCU-A Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 NCU (NCU2E Type)

6.2 NCU (NCU2E Type)

Module name Variants:

none

Module status LED Serial number

indicators
Reset button
USB ports

Ethernet ports with two

LAN port LEDs

Item number

Fig. 6-4: NCU Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 6-1 lists all abbreviations on the NCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 6-7: NCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Electrical Ports
P power supply status of the module USB2 USB port 2
Mod operating states of the module USB1 USB port 1
C2 Ethernet port 2
C1 Ethernet port 1

Description The Network Element Control Unit (NCU) provides system management ca-
pabilities and network connection to the FSP 3000R7 system.
The NCU is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in module, that acts as a hard-
ware interface between the different modules of the system and the
equipment connected to its management interfaces. One NCU is able to
manage a whole NE. Using Internet protocols, this hardware interface
provides management and configuration capabilities, for example provi-
sioning, alarming and so on. The NCU directly controls and monitors the
modules in its own shelf (master shelf) and indirectly those in the main
shelves through the Shelf Control Units (SCUs). A NCU communicates with
the SCU in the master shelf using an internal system bus. Exchange of in-
formation between the SCU in the master shelf and the SCUs in the main
shelves takes place over their fiber ring. The NCU can be accessed through
a USB or Ethernet port via terminal program or Ethernet using telnet, FTP,
htpp, SCP, SNMP, NTP etc. The NCUs’ command line interface allows fast
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

(local) interaction. External Network Management Systems (NMSs) are

supported using SNMP over the Ethernet interface.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-19

Hardware Description

External DCN connections can be provided through embedded communi-

cation channels (ECC).
The NCU must be configured for the specific operating environment. De-
pending on the capabilities of the NE, specific Right to Use (RTU) ver-
sions may be required.

Functions and The main functions and features are:

Features • Registration and deregistration of all inserted modules
• Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power
supply units and the fan unit
• Detection of component failures
• Error and warning messages
• Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control
information to/from the NCU to the SCUs to which it is physically
connected using fiber-optic patch cable pairs
• Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up
to 20 shelves (1 master shelf and 19 main shelves)
• Open platform to connect to any IP based system
• Remote management and configuration of all interconnected shelves
• Furnish SNMP monitoring and trap generation
• Support of the following RTU versions:
• RTU CWDM Access
• RTU DWDM Core and Access
• RTU FC/FICON
• RTU DWDM GDPS
• Support of up to 10 ECCs
• Reset button to reset the module
• Exchangeable compact flash (CF) card in case of a hardware failure
(For this purpose, the NCU must be removed from the shelf slot.)
• Status LED Indicators on the faceplate
• Support of all NE types, such as OTM and OADM

Interfaces The NCU provides two USB ports and two Ethernet ports on its faceplate
for management purposes.

Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports labeled C1 and C2 are female RJ-45 receptacles used
to connect the NCU to the NMS or the management PC via a standard
Ethernet crossover cable. However, in a system equipped with an Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC), the connection is made at the OSCM instead.
In this case the NCU is connected to the Ethernet switch of the OSCM us-
ing a standard Ethernet straight-through cable as well. After this config-
uration, one IP address (that on the NCU) is used for the complete NE.
The ports comply with the IEEE 802.3 10/100BASE-TX and IEEE 802.3u
standards. Each Ethernet port supports
• Data rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet)
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

• Adjustment of the data rates using the auto-negotiation function

• Enabling/disabling the port

6-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 NCU (NCU2E Type)

• Data Communications Equipment (DCE) according to IEEE 802.3

(automatic MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
• Half/full duplex mode
See Table 6-8 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the NCU.

Table 6-8: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU)

RJ-45 Panel Jack Pin Number Signal Signal Direction
1 TXD+ output
2 TXD- output
Pin 8
3 RXD+ input
4 no connection
5 no connection
Pin 1
6 RXD- input
7 no connection
8 no connection

Use a standard shielded Category 5 cable.

USB Ports The USB ports labeled USB1 and USB2 are Mini-AB receptacles that com-
ply with USB 2.0 specifications. The USB1 port provides only USB to
RS232 emulation. It is used for a direct serial connection to a manage-
ment PC. The USB2 port is not yet supported by the software, and can
therefore not be used. If necessary, the ports can be disabled.

A USB connection requires a respective driver in the management PC. This

driver is available on the User Documentation Set CD or can be obtained
Note from ADVA.

Both ports can accept either a Mini-A USB plug or a Mini-B USB plug, but
use only a detachable USB cable with a Mini-A USB plug on one end and
a standard A-plug on the other end. For pinout of the Mini-AB recepta-
cles, see Table 6-9.

Table 6-9: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU)

Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pin Function Description
1 V BUS USB power
2 D- Negative Data
signal
3 D+ Positive Data signal
4 ID Identification
5 GND Signal ground

Most of the pins of a Mini-USB receptacle are the same as a standard USB
connector, except pin 4. Pin 4 is called ID, and is not present in standard
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

USB plugs. The ID pin identifies which type of plug is connected. This pin
is shorted to ground in the Mini-A plug and unconnected in the Mini-B
plug.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-21

Hardware Description

Operating System The NCU run Linux-Kernel 2.4.25 and a Linux Distribution which is opti-
mized for embedded applications. Linux starts automatically when the
FSP 3000R7 is powered up. The system is typically ready for management
operation in about 70 seconds after power-on. Linux needs to be config-
ured for the specific environment. See the User Guide of the FSP 3000R7
documentation set for configuration information.

Application The NCU supports the following management tools:

Software • Craft Console
• Web Browser Console
• Element Manager
• TL1
• SNMP agent

Reset Button To reset the NCU, use the reset button located on its faceplate. If re-
quired, press and release this button using a pointed tool. The green pow-
er LED comes on and the module starts up. The optical transmission
system is not affected by a restart.

Default NCU The NCU comes with the following factory-default configuration:
Settings
Table 6-10: NCU Factory-Default Settings
Option Settings
Mini-AB USB Port 19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
(Logging into the NE requires an activated carrier
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses 192.168.1.1 (port C1
192.168.1.1 (port C2)
Subnet 255.255.255.0 (port C1
255.255.255.0 (port C2)
Default Gateway 192.168.2.12
Hostname nemi
User Accounts ADMIN, PROVISION, OPERATOR, MONITOR
Account Passwords All account passwords are factory set to CHGME.1

Placement The NCU is placed in slot A of the 1HU Shelf or the 7HU Shelf and makes
it the master shelf that should have shelf ID 1.

LED indicators The NCU has two LED indicators on the faceplate and two LAN port LEDs
per Ethernet Interface. The LED colors represent different operating
states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section
3.3.1 ‚ p. 3-14.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

mation as shown in Figure 6-5 and Figure 6-6.

6-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 NCU (NCU2E Type)

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
NCU
USB2 USB-Serial
Serial Number:
USB1 USB-OTG
C2 NET 10/100 routed xxxxxxxxxxxx
C1 NET 10/100 routed

Electronic Module

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-5: Example of an NCU Module Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-6: Example of an NCU Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-23

Hardware Description

6.3 SCU
Variants:
none
Module name Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

Module status LED indicators

Uplink interface U: Uplink port LED indicators:
Transmitter connector (U-T) U-T
Receiver connector (U-R) U-R
Downlink interface D: Downlink port LED indicators:
Transmitter connector (D-T) D-T
Receiver connector (D-R) D-R
Extension shelf interface X: Extension shelf port LED indicators
Transmitter connector (X-T) X-T
Receiver connector (X-R) P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx
X-R

Item number

Fig. 6-7: SCU Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 6-11 lists all abbreviations on the SCU faceplate and their mean-
ings.
Table 6-11: SCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module T transmit
Mod operating status of the module R receive
U-T* operating status of the transmitter of U uplink interface
the uplink interface
U-R* operating status of the receiver of D downlink interface
the uplink interface
D-T* operating status of the transmitter of X extension shelf interface
the downlink interface
D-R* operating status of the receiver of
the downlink interface
X-T* operating status of the transmitter of
the extension shelf interface
X-R* operating status of the receiver of
the extension shelf interface
* Designations of the port LED indicators are not explicitly marked on the faceplate.

Description The SCU (Shelf Control Unit) is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in module,
which acts as the controller for an entire main shelf. It recognizes all in-
serted optical modules and downloads their configuration data stored in
the NCU. The SCU communicates with each module of its shelf using the
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

internal system bus on the backplane. The SCU queries each module for
relevant information, such as module type, serial number, device code,
operating status, link status, etc. If the response is not correct, the SCU

6-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 SCU

interrogates in greater detail for the exact fault. This allows the SCU to
determine whether any of the conditions have changed since the last
time it was queried. The SCU fully supports digital diagnostics for optical
performance monitoring of pluggable transceivers as well.
The module also monitors the power supply units and the cooling fans.
In routine operation, SNMP traps are set and passed on to the NCU to pro-
vide instant alerts to potential problems.
The SCU contains cross-connect circuitry for the internal and external
management connections of the network element (NE).
In a ring, the SCU also provides redundant inter-shelf communication.
The SCU in the master shelf (the shelf with the NCU) connects the main
shelves of the NE to the NCU. Additionally, each SCU supports non-redun-
dant connectivity to one extension shelf equipped with an SCU-E.
The master shelf and not more than 19 main shelves as well as up to 20
extension shelves can be interconnected to build one NE (maximum sys-
tem configuration).

Functions and The main functions and features are:

Features • Registration and deregistration of all inserted modules
• Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power
supply units and the fan unit
• Detection of component failures
• Error and warning messages
• Enabling of ring closing
• Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control
information to/from the SCU or SCU-E to which it is physically
connected using a fiber-optic patch cable pair
• Redundant connectivity to two main shelves equipped with one SCU
each
• Non-redundant connectivity to one extension shelf populated with
an SCU-E
• No configuration requirements
• Three Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces
for optical fiber termination

Optical Interfaces SFP transceivers and the optical fibers are not included in delivery. They
must be specifically ordered from the ADVA Optical Networking AG.
The SFP transceiver cages will be equipped with dust plugs on delivery to
prevent impurities. These dust plugs should be in the cages as long as the
SCU is not installed in a running system.
The uplink interface (U) is used for connection to the SCU of the upper
main shelf, and the downlink interface (D) is used for connection to the
SCU of the lower main shelf. The extension shelf interface (E) is connect-
ed to the SCU-E of an extension shelf. When one or two interfaces are not
used, the corresponding SFP cages need not be populated with an SFP
transceiver. Make sure to insert dust plugs into the empty cages.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-25

Hardware Description

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers
intended for the SCU only. If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in con-
junction with the SCU or SCU-E, ADVA Optical Networking AG cannot guar-
antee the behavior of the shelf control units.

Placement The SCU is placed in slot B of the 1HU Shelf or the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicators The SCU has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.2 ‚ p. 3-18.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
SCU
Supported SFPs:
U Up U SFP / HS / 850I / MM / LC Serial Number:

D Down D SFP / HS / 850I / MM / LC

X Extension X SFP / HS / 850I / MM / LC xxxxxxxxxxxx

Electronic Module

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-8: Example of an SCU Module Type Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-9: Example of an SCU Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 VSM

6.4 VSM

Module name Variants:

VSM
Serial number none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

Lock button

Input port (C2-R)

Output port (C2-T)
Input port (C1-R)
Output port (C1-T)

Input port (NW-R)

Output port (NW-T)

Input port (NE-R)

Output port (NE-T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-10: VSM Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-12 lists all abbreviations on the VSM faceplate and their mean-
ings.

Table 6-12: VSM Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports

P power supply status of the module R Input port
Mod operating states of the module T Output port
NW operating states of the network port west NW Network port west
NE operating states of the network port east NE Network port east
C2 Client port 2
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

C1 Client port 1

Document Version 7.1.5 6-27

Hardware Description

Description The Versatile Switch Module (VSM) is an optical switch for protection pur-
poses. Protection switching can be triggered by commands from the
2OSCM.
These commands are transmitted via the backplane of the FSP system. The
backup path can only be monitored in configurations with 2OSCM. The
VSM can work on a fiber, band, subband, group or channel basis.

Signal Path The VSM contains two cross switches that are switched in phase.

Network Client
port N VSM ports C
NW-R Low priority C2-R

NW-T High priority C2-T

NE-R C1-R

NE-T C1-T

Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 6-11: Operation Scheme of a VSM

Placement The VSM can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The VSM has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.1 ‚ p. 3-22.

Push Button There is a push button on the faceplate of the VSM which is labeled
“Lock”. Table 6-13 describes function and effect of these button.
Table 6-13: VSM Push Button Description
Button Function Description
Lock Toggle LOCK Current State: Switches are manually locked to Line
between: west or East, regarding the current state.
west line
or east LOCK Other state: Switches will be manually locked to the
line other line (west or east) if the cycle is completed within 10
seconds.

AUTO: Switches are switched automatically to the

appropriate line with regard to the measured fiber
condition.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

After a time-out of 10 seconds, the next push of the button

will lock the switch to the current line!

6-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 VSM

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-12, Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
VSM

Port Description Serial Number:

NW Network Line West

NE Network Line East xxxxxxxxxxxx

C2 Low Priority
C1 High Priority
Laser Module

Fig. 6-12: Example of a VSM Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-13: Example of a VSM Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-14: Example of a VSM Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-29

Hardware Description

6.5 RSM-OLM#1630

Module name Variants:

RSM-OLM none
#1630 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

Auto/Lock button
LED indicators

Output monitor (C1mo)

Output monitor (C2mo)

Output port (NW-T)

Input port (NW-R)

Output port (NE-T)

Input port (NE-R)

Input port (C2-R)

Output port (C2-T)

Input port (C1-R)

Output port (C1-T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-15: RSM-OLM#1630 Module Overview

The RSM-OLM#1630 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as

indicated by the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Faceplate Markings Table 6-14 list all abbreviations on the RSM-OLM#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.

6-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 RSM-OLM#1630

Table 6-14: RSM-OLM#1630 Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports

On power supply status of the module C1mo Output monitor C1
Lk operating states of the module C2mo Output monitor C2
NW operating states of the Network port West R Input port
NE operating states of the Network port East T Output port
NW Network port West
NE Network port East
C2 Client port 2
C1 Client port 1

Description The Remote Switch Module with optical line monitoring (RSM-OLM#1630)
monitors the transmission line for line protection switching in the event
of fiber break or fiber degradation. As long as both network fiber pairs are
available, the non-active fiber pair can be used to transmit low priority
traffic.

Signal Path The RSM-OLM is connected to two network fiber pairs of an opposite RSM-
OLM. The NW port and NE port are connected together with the same ports
of the opposite RSM-OLM. A 1630 nm pilot laser is added to one network
fiber pair. The pilot laser of the opposite RSM-OLM is dropped from the
other network fiber pair and evaluated for protection switching.
If a fiber carrying high-priority traffic is impaired, the control logic
switches to the protection fiber pair. This also switches the pilot laser and
forces the RSM-OLM on the other side to follow. The low-priority traffic is
interrupted in this process.
A 5% monitoring port allows to check the received signals without
interrupting service.
Network Client
port N ports C
Switch Rx
RSM-OLM coupler
NW-R C2-R

coupler
NW-T C2-T
Optical
control
block
NE-R Switch Tx C1-R

NE-T C1-T

C1 mo
Data-traffic
R = Receive Control Unit C2 mo
T = Transmit

Fig. 6-16: Operating Scheme of an RSM-OLM

Placement The RSM-OLM may be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot. The RSM-OLM cannot
be used together with the OSC as both use the same wavelength for
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

different purposes.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-31

Hardware Description

LED Indicators The RSM-OLM has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 ‚ p. 3-24.

Push Button There is a push button on the faceplate of the RSM-OLM which is labeled
“Lock/Auto”. Table 6-15 describes function and effect of these button.

Table 6-15: Push Button Description

Button Function Description
Lock/ Toggle between: west line or LOCK Current State: Switches are manually
Auto east line locked to Line west or East, regarding the
current state.

LOCK Other state: Switches will be

manually locked to the other line (west or
east) if the cycle is completed within 10
seconds.

AUTO: Switches are switched

automatically to the appropriate line with
regard to the measured fiber condition.

After a time-out of 10 seconds, the next

push of the button will lock the switch to
the current line!

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-17, Figure 6-18 and Figure 6-19.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
RSM-OLM#1630
Port Description
Serial Number:
C2mo Monitoring
C1mo Monitoring
xxxxxxxxxxxx
NW Network Line West
NE Network Line East
C2 Low Priority
C1 High Priority

Output Power Range: -4 to 0 dBm

Receiver Dynamic Range: -32 to 0 dBm
Laser Wavelength: 1630 nm
Meas. range gor WDM budget:
0 to 26 dB between 2 RSMs Laser Module

Fig. 6-17: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Module Type Label

HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 RSM-OLM#1630

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-18: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-19: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-33

Hardware Description

6.6 RSM-SF#1510
Variants:
Module name
Serial number none

LED Indicators

Auto/Lock push buttons

Network port West (NW)

Network port East (NE)

Input port (C-R)

Output port (C-T)

Item number

Fig. 6-20: RSM-SF Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-16 list all abbreviations on the RSM-SF#1510 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 6-16: RSM-SF#1510 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
On power supply status NW network output port West
Lk operating states of the module NE network output port East
NW operating states of the network port West C1 client port
NE operating states of the network port East
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 RSM-SF#1510

The RSM-SF is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as indicated by

the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides full FSP 2000
Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow FSP
2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED behavior.

Description The Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm (RSM-

SF#1510) enables line protection in case of fiber break. The RSM-SF#1510
is the partner module of the RSM-SF#1310 the pilot laser of which oper-
ates at a wavelength of 1310 nm.

Signal Path A pilot laser is added at one side of the link and dropped at the other.
The received signal level is evaluated for protection switching. Both mod-
ules transmit on one of the wavelengths and receives on the other, i.e.
an RSM-SF#1510 must work in tandem with an RSM-SF#1310 at the oppo-
site network element. See “RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-
SF#1510” on p. 6-40

Placement The RSM-SF#1510 can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-21, Figure 6-22 and Figure 6-23.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
RSM-SF#1510
Port Description Serial Number:
NW Network Line West
NE Network Line East xxxxxxxxxxxx
C Client

Output Power Range: -4.5 to 0 dBm

Receiver Dynamic Range: -32 to 0 dBm
Laser Wavelength: 1510 nm
Meas. range gor WDM budget:
0 to 26 dB between 2 RSMs
Laser Module

Fig. 6-21: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Module Type Label

HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-35

Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-22: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-23: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Warranty Label

LED Indicators The RSM-SF#1510 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 ‚ p. 3-24.

Push Buttons There are three push buttons on the faceplate of the RSM-SF#1510.
Table 6-17 describes function and effect of these push buttons.
Table 6-17: Push Button Description
Label Function Effect
Lk-W Locks to west network line Line west is active and switch is locked
to line west.
Lk-E Locks to east network line Line east is active and switch is locked to
line east.
Auto Enables automatic The module runs in automatic mode.
protection switching

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 RSM-SF#1310

6.7 RSM-SF#1310
Variants:
Module name
Serial number none

LED Indicators

Auto/Lock push buttons

Network port West (NW)

Network port East (NE)

Input port (C1-R)

Output port (C1-T)

Item number

Fig. 6-24: RSM-SF Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-18 list all abbreviations on the RSM-SF#1310 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 6-18: RSM-SF#1310 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
On power supply status NW network output port West
Lk operating states of the module NE network output port East
NW operating states of the network port West C1 client port
NE operating states of the network port East
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-37

Hardware Description

The RSM-SF is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as indicated by

the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides full FSP 2000
Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow FSP
2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED behavior.

Description The Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1310 nm (RSM-

SF#1310) enables line protection in case of fiber break. All optical con-
nectors are of the LC type.

Signal Path A pilot laser is added at one side of the link and dropped at the other.
The received signal level is evaluated for protection switching. Both mod-
ules transmit on one of the wavelengths and receives on the other, i.e.
an RSM-SF#1310 must work in tandem with an RSM-SF#1510 at the oppo-
site network element. See “RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-
SF#1510” on p. 6-40.

Placement The RSM-SF#1310 can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The RSM-SF#1310 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 ‚ p. 3-24.

Push Buttons There are three push buttons on the faceplate of the RSM-SF#1310.
Table 6-19 describes function and effect of these push buttons.

Table 6-19: RSM-SF#1310 Push Button Description

Label Function Effect
Lk-W Locks to west network line Line west is active and switch is locked
to line west.
Lk-E Locks to east network line Line east is active and switch is locked to
line east.
Auto Enables automatic The module runs in automatic mode.
protection switching

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-25, Figure 6-26 and Figure 6-27.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 RSM-SF#1310

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
RSM-SF#1310
Port Description Serial Number:
NW Network Line West
NE Network Line East xxxxxxxxxxxx
C Client

Output Power Range: -4.5 to 0 dBm

Receiver Dynamic Range: -32 to 0 dBm
Laser Wavelength: 1310 nm
Meas. range gor WDM budget:
0 to 26 dB between 2 RSMs
Laser Module

Fig. 6-25: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-26: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-27: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-39

6-40
Hardware Description

Client Network Client

port C RSM-SF#1310 ports N RSM-SF#1510 port C
coupler coupler
OSF NW NW OSF
C1 C1
OSF NE NE OSF

coupler coupler
1310 1510 1510 1310 1310 1510
decision logic decision logic

T R R R R T

Pilot laser signal 1310 Data-traffic

Pilot laser signal 1510

Fig. 6-28: RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-SF#1510

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm
 OSCM-V#1630

6.8 OSCM-V#1630
Variants:
Module name
OSCM none
V#1630
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

Reset button

Input port (N-R)

Output port to OSFM (N-T)

Ethernet interface 3
(Net 10/100 switched) with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet interface 2
(Net 10/100 switched) with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet interface 1
(Net 10/100 switched) with two LAN port LEDs

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-29: OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-20 list all abbreviations on the OSCM-V#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 6-20: OSCM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module R Input port
Mod operating states of the module T Output port
N operating states of the network port N Network port
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

C3 operating status of the Ethernet port 3 C3 Ethernet port 3

C2 operating status of the Ethernet port 2 C2 Ethernet port 2
C1 operating status of the Ethernet port 1 C1 Ethernet port 1

Document Version 7.1.5 6-41

Hardware Description

Description The OSCM-V#1630 is a Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical

line monitoring and one optical port . This module adds/drops a 1630 nm
OSC signal and converts it to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet sig-
nals.
The OSCM-V#1630 contains one optical port for this application.

Signal Path The OSCM has

• an optical transmitter and receiver for 1630 nm
• an integrated Ethernet switch with routing processor and
• three electrical 10/100BASE-T ports.

Network
port N
OSCM
o o
Tx Rx
e e

Control Unit
OSC OSC

Ethernet Switch 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet Router

LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 16*ECC

Client
port C

Data traffic IP routing

T = Transmit
R = Receive

Fig. 6-30: Operating Scheme of an OSCM-V#1630

The module monitors the optical line for fiber breaks and fluctuations of
fiber attenuation. This information can be used for protection switching.

Placement The OSCM can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The OSCM-V#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3 ‚ p. 3-20.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-31, Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 OSCM-V#1630

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
OSCM-V#1630
Port Description Serial Number:
N OSC
C3 Net 10/100 switched xxxxxxxxxxxx
C2 Net 10/100 switched
C1 Net 10/100 switched

Output Power Range: -0.5 to 3 dBm

Receiver Dynamic Range: -33.5 to -5.0 dBm
Wavelength: 1630 nm
Laser Module

Fig. 6-31: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-32: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-33: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-43

Hardware Description

6.9 2OSCM-V#1630
Variants:
Module name
2OSCM none
V#1630
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

Reset button

Input port (NW-R)

Output port to east OSFM (NW-T)

Input port (NE-R)

Output port to west OSFM (NE-T)

Ethernet port 3 (Net 10/100 switched)

with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet port 2 (Net 10/100 switched)

with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet port 1 (Net 10/100 switched)

with two LAN port LEDs

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-34: 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-21 lists all abbreviations on the 2OSCM-V#1630 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 6-21: OSCM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status R Input port
Mod operating states of the module T Output port
C3 operating status of the Ethernet port 3 NW Network ports west
C2 operating status of the Ethernet port 2 NE Network ports east
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

C1 operating status of the Ethernet port 1

6-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2OSCM-V#1630

Description The 2OSCM-V#1630 is a Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical

line monitoring and two optical ports. This module adds/drops a 1630 nm
OSC signal and converts it to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet sig-
nals.
The 2OSCM-V#1630 contains two optical ports for east-west applications.

Signal Path The 2OSCM has

• two optical transmitters and receivers for 1630 nm
• an integrated Ethernet switch with routing processor and
• three electrical 10/100BASE-T ports (Ethernet interfaces).

Network
ports NW-R NW-T NE-T NE-R

2OSCM
o o o o
Rx Tx Tx Rx
e e e e

Control Unit
OSC OSC

Ethernet Switch 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet Router

LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 16*ECC

Client
ports C

Data traffic IP routing

T = Transmit
R = Receive

Fig. 6-35: Operating Scheme of a 2OSCM-V#1630

The module monitors the optical line for fiber breaks and fluctuations of
fiber attenuation. This information can be used for protection switching.

Placement The 2OSCM can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The 2OSCM-V#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3 ‚ p. 3-20.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-36, Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-45

Hardware Description

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2OSCM-V#1630
Port Description Serial Number:
NW OSC West
NE OSC East xxxxxxxxxxxx
C3 Net 10/100 switched
C2 Net 10/100 switched
C1 Net 10/100 switched

Output Power Range: -0.5 to 3 dBm

Receiver Dynamic Range: -33.5 to -5.0 dBm
Wavelength: 1630 nm
Laser Module

Fig. 6-36: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

This page intentionally left blank

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-37: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-38: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 7
Optical Filter Modules
This chapter provides general descriptions of all passive optical modules
that the FSP 3000R7 currently supports.
Each description provides information on the key features the module of-
fers, its main components and how it operates. Also provided is an illus-
tration of the module’s front view with port description, the operating
scheme and the module label.
Before each module type is described in subsections, the conventions of
the several optical filter types and the naming of the optical filter module
types are discussed.
This chapter includes the following module descriptions:
7.1 2CLSM-#D01-#D64
7.2 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.3 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.4 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.5 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
7.6 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.7 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
7.8 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.9 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
7.10 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
7.11 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
7.12 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
7.13 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
7.14 1CSM+#G1310
7.15 1CSM+#Cxxxx
7.16 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
7.17 OSFM+#1630
7.18 PSM-95/5
7.19 1PM/SM
7.21 2PM/SM
7.20 1PM/MM
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7.22 2PM/MM

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 7-1

Hardware Description

Overview • C-Band/L-Band Splitter (2CLSM-#D01-#D64)

• Band Splitter Modules (BSMs)
• 2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band (2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels
(2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels and 1310-nm
connectivity (3BSM-#G1310-#C1610)
• Group Splitter Modules (GSMs)
• 8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• 4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
4 discrete module variants are available.
• 1-Group Splitter Modules for C- or L-band (1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
16 discrete module variants are available.
• Channel Splitter Modules (CSMs)
• 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C- or L-band
(40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1470, #1490, #1590,
#C1610 (4CSM-#C1470-#C1610)
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1510, #1530, #1550,
#C1570 (4CSM-#C1510-#C1570)
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (1CSM+#Cxxxx)
8 variants are available.
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module with 1310-nm
connectivity (1CSM+#G1310)
• East/West CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W)
The module is available in 8 variants, one for each of the
8 CWDM wavelengths it supports.
• East/West DWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Dxx-E/W)
The module is available in 64 variants, one for each of the
64 DWDM wavelengths it supports.
• Optical Supervisory Filter Module (OSFM+#1630)
• Optical Power Splitter Modules
• Power Splitter Module 95/5 (PSM 95/5)
• Protection Modules
- Single-port Protection Module Single Mode (1PM/SM)
- 2-port Protection Module Single Mode (2PM/SM)
- Single-port Protection Module Multimode (1PM/MM)
- 2-port Protection Module Multimode(2PM/MM)
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Optical Filter Optical filter modules receive and transmit optical signals according to
Variants their wavelengths in CWDM or DWDM systems.
The modules contain optical filters which drop/add, demultiplex/multi-
plex or split/couple the signals. Often several filters are cascaded.

Demultiplexer and The Demultiplexer (DEMUX) is an optical filter that splits a composite
Multiplexer DWDM/CWDM signal into DWDM/CWDM several channels, channel groups
or channel bands (depends on the module type).
The Multiplexer (MUX) is an optical filter that combines the received
DWDM/CWDM channels, channel groups or channel bands (depends on the
module type) into one composite DWDM/CWDM signal at the same time.
Demultiplexer and Multiplexer are often used full duplex in one module.

Drop and Add Filter An Drop/Add optical filter is used in an optical filter module, if the mod-
ule contains one upgrade port and one channel, channel group or channel
band (depends on the module type).
An optical filter drops a DWDM/CWDM channel, channel group or channel
band out of a channel spectrum while the remaining channels are reflect-
ed onto the upgrade port.
The optical filter adds the received DWDM/CWDM channel, channel group
or channel band in the direction of data flow to the channel signal com-
ing from the upgrade port. The signal are then combined and transmitted
through an optical fiber.
Optical filters for add and drop are often used full duplex in one module.

Splitter/Coupler A Splitter is an optical filter that splits one signal into two optical paths
with identical data.
A Coupler is an optical filter that couples two received signal paths with
identical data to one output signal.
Module Design Optical filter modules are designed as a plug-in modules that are compat-
ible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf (SH1HU). The modules fully
conform to the requirements of all relevant SDH ITU-T and SONET AN-
SI/Telcordia standards.
All optical filter modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-
wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 optical filter modules have the same faceplate markings.
LED indicator and optical port markings of the individual modules are ex-
plained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All optical filter modules have one tri-color LED indicator that are visible
through the faceplates. The colors of the LED indicator display different
operating states. The status that each color of the LED indicator repre-
sents is described in the Troubleshooting Guide.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-3

Hardware Description

Labeling Optical filter modules have several printed labels (module type label, cer-
tification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which contain
specific module information. The labels of the individual modules are
shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as

• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• port descriptions and the appropriate channel numbers
• technical specifications (only for the protection modules)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2CLSM-#D01-#D64

7.1 2CLSM-#D01-#D64

Module name
2CLSM-
#D01-#D64 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the combined C- and L band signal (#D01-#D64)
Input (N-D) for the combined C- and L band signal (#D01-#D64)

Client port 2:
Input (C2-M) for the L band signal (#D33-#D64)
Output (C2-D) for the L band signal (#D33-#D64)

Client port 1:
Input (C1-M) for the C band signal (#D01-#D32)
Output (C1-D) for the C band signal (#D01-#D32)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-1 lists all abbreviations on the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C2 client port for the L band signal
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

C1 client port for the C band signal

Document Version 7.1.5 7-5

Hardware Description

Description The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 (C-Band/L-Band Splitter) is a passive optical mod-

ule that acts as a C- and L band splitter and combiner for DWDM in dual-
fiber point-to-point configurations. It provides two optical ports on the
client side. The module supports 64 channels, 32 channels in the C band
(#D01–#D32) and 32 channels in the L band (#D33–#D64).
The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 incorporates a combination of MUX and DEMUX fil-
ters. The DEMUX filter splits the composite signal into the C- and L band
spectrums prior to further channel group demultiplexing by the appropri-
ate optical modules. Simultaneously the MUX filter combines the C- and
L band spectrums into a composite signal for transmission through one
optical fiber.
Consequently, an existing 32-channel system in the C band can be ex-
panded to 64-channel capacity using the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64. It provides
the system with further 32 channels in the L band. However, to build up
high-capacity DWDM networks (up to 64 channels) a set of splitter/com-
biner modules for multiplexing and demultiplexing the C and L bands are
required. The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 is mainly used for fullband amplification
along with the group-based EDFA modules.

Features • Support of 32 wavelengths in the C band and 32 wavelengths in the

L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-2 shows the operating scheme of the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 and il-
lustrates the signal path which is described.

Network 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Client

port N ports C1 and C2

C2-D
L band
DEMUX

N-D (channels #D33 to #D64)

C and L band
(channels #D01 to #D64) C1-D
C band
(channels #D01 to #D32)

C2-M
L band
N-M (channels #D33 to #D64)
MUX

C and L band
(channels #D01 to #D64) C1-M
C band
(channels #D01 to #D32)
Receive direction
Transmit direction

Fig. 7-2: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 receives a composite C-/L band signal through the
input N-D. The DEMUX filter splits the incoming signal into the C- and L
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

band spectrums and directs them to the C1-D and C2-D outputs. The C-
and L band signals are then transmitted to the corresponding group split-
ter modules or EDFA modules.

7-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2CLSM-#D01-#D64

Transmit Direction The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 receives the C- and L band spectrums from the cor-
responding group splitter modules or EDFA modules through the inputs
C1-M and C2-M. The MUX filter combines the C- and L band spectrums
into a composite signal. This signal is directed to the output N-M for
transmission over the network fiber.

Placement The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-3, Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2CLSM
#D01-#D64 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C2 #D33-#D64
C1 #D01-#D32
Passive Module

Fig. 7-3: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-4: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-5: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Warranty Label
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

Document Version 7.1.5 7-7

Hardware Description

7.2 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
2BSM-
#D01-#D32
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the C- or L band signal
Input (N-D) for the C- or L band signal

Client port 2:
Input (C2-M) for red-band signal
Output (C2-D) for red-band signal

Client port 1:
Input (C1-M) for blue-band signal
Output (C1-D) for blue-band signal

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-6: 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-2 lists all abbreviations on the 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-2: 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C1 client port for blue-band signals
C2 client port for red-band signals
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module (2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band)

is available in two variants:
• 2BSM-#D01-#D32 (2-port Red/Blue Splitter C-Band)
• 2BSM-#D33-#D64 (2-port Red/Blue Splitter L-Band)
The faceplate of the 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is shown in Figure 7-6, p. 7-8.

Description The 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a red/blue

sub-band splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications.
The module provides two ports on the client side. The part #Dxx-#Dyy of
the name refers to the respective red/blue sub-band range each module
variant covers, either in the C band (2BSM-#D01-#D32), or in the L band
(2BSM-#D33-#D64). The blue sub-bands comprise the shorter wave-
lengths, channels #D01-#D16 (2BSM-#D01-#D32) or #D33-#D48 (2BSM-
#D33-#D64). The red sub-bands include the longer wavelengths, channels
#D17-#D32 (2BSM-#D01-#D32) or #D49-#D64 (2BSM-#D33-#D64).
The 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module contains a combination of specific red/blue
sub-band MUX and DEMUX filters that perform the splitting and combin-
ing of the red and blue sub-bands of the C- or L band. Both module vari-
ants feature the same design. They differ in their optical filters. The
2BSM-#D01-#D32 and 2BSM-#D33-#D64 work in conjunction with the ap-
propriate group splitter modules on the client side.

Features • Support of 32 wavelengths in the C band (2BSM-#D01-#D32) or 32

wavelengths in the L band (2BSM-#D33-#D64) according to ITU-T
G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-7 shows the operating scheme of the 2BSM-#D01-#D32 as an ex-
ample and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Client ports

port N C1 and C2

C2-D Red band

C-band
DEMUX

N-D (channels #D17 to #D32)

(channels
#D01 to #D32) C1-D Blue band
Channels #D01 to #D16

C2-M Red band

C-band N-M (channels #D17 to #D32)
MUX

(channels C1-M
#D01 to #D32) Blue band
Channels #D01 to #D16
Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 7-7: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Operating Scheme
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-9

Hardware Description

Receive Direction The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 receives the C band signal through the input N-D.
The DEMUX filter splits the incoming signal into the blue sub-band (#D01-
#D16) and the red sub-band (#D17-#D32) to have them separated at the
C1-D and C2-D outputs for subsequent demultiplexing in the correspond-
ing group splitter modules.

Transmit Direction The 2BSM-#D01-#D32 receives the blue sub-band #D01-#D16 and the red
sub-band #D17-#D32 from the corresponding group splitter modules
through the inputs C1-M and C2-M. The MUX filter combines the incom-
ing sub-band signals into one output signal. This signal is directed to the
output N-M for transmission over one fiber.
The same principle applies to the other module variant.

Placement The 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-8, Figure 7-9 and Figure 7-10.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2BSM-
#D01-#D32 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C2 #D17-#D32
C1 #D01-#D16
Passive Module

Fig. 7-8: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-9: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

7-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-10: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-11

Hardware Description

7.3 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
4GSM-
#D01-#D16
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the red or blue half of the C- or L band signal
Input (N-D) for the red or blue half of the C- or L band signal

The description of the client port 1 applies for the client

ports 2 to 4 accordingly.
For channel group allocation, see Table 7-4, p. 7-13.

Client port 1:
Input (C1-M) for the specific channel group signal
Output (C1-D) for the specific channel group signal

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-11: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-3 lists all abbreviations on the 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-3: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C1 client port 1
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4

7-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module (4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band) is

available in 4 variants covering 8 C band and 8 L band groups:
• 4GSM-#D01-#D16 (4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band)
• 4GSM-#D17-#D32 (4-port Group Splitter Red Band (C-Band))
• 4GSM-#D33-#D48 (4-port Group Splitter Blue Band (L-Band))
• 4GSM-#D49-#D64 (4-port Group Splitter Red Band (L-Band))
The faceplate of the 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is shown in Figure 7-6, p. 7-8.

Description The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a channel

group splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications. The
module provides four ports on the client side. The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the
name defines the channel groups and refers to the respective red/blue
sub-band range of the C- or L band each module variant covers. The blue
sub-bands comprise the shorter wavelengths, channels #D01-#D16
(4GSM-#D01-#D16) or #D33-#D48 (4GSM-#D33-#D48). The red sub-bands
include the longer wavelengths, channels #D17-#D32 (4GSM-#D17-#D32)
or #D49-#D64 (4GSM-#D49-#D64). See above.
The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module contains a combination of specific red/blue
sub-band MUX and DEMUX filters for the C- or L band. These filters handle
the splitting of the received red or blue half of the C/L band into four
channel groups and the combining of the four channel groups to one out-
going signal for transmission onto one fiber.
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy modules work in conjunction with the corresponding
channel splitter modules on the client side. All module variants feature
the same design. They differ in their optical filters.
Table 7-4 lists the individual module variants and the channel groups they
support.
Table 7-4: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Channel Group Allocation
Channel Groups of the C Band Channel Groups of the L Band
Client ports 4GSM-#D01- 4GSM-#D17- 4GSM-#D33- 4GSM-#D49-
#D16 #D32 #D48 #D64
C4 #D13-#D16 #D29-#D32 #D45-#D48 #D61-#D64
(C4-M; C4-D)
C3 #D09-#D12 #D25-#D28 #D41-#D44 #D57-#D60
(C3-M; C3-D)
C2 #D05-#D08 #D21-#D24 #D37-#D40 #D53-#D56
(C2-M; C2-D)
C1 #D01-#D04 #D17-#D20 #D33-#D36 #D49-#D52
(C1-M; C1-D)

Features • Support of 32 wavelengths in the C band and 32 wavelengths in the

L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

• Full management support

Document Version 7.1.5 7-13

Hardware Description

Signal Path Figure 7-12 shows the operating scheme of the 4GSM-#D01-#D16 as an ex-
ample and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network Client ports

port N 4GSM-#D01-#D16 C1 to C4
C4-D
#D13 to #D16

Channel groups
C3-D

DEMUX
N-D #D09 to #D12
C2-D
C-band blue sub-band #D05 to #D08
(channels #D01–#D16) C1-D
#D01 to #D04

C4-M
#D13 to #D16

Channel groups
C3-M
N-M #D09 to #D12

MUX
C2-M
C-band blue sub-band #D05 to #D08
(channels #D01–#D16) C1-M
#D01 to #D04

Receive direction
Transmit direction

Fig. 7-12: 4GSM-#D01-#D16 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 4GSM-#D01-#D16 receives the C band signal through the input N-D.
The DEMUX filter splits the incoming signal into four channel groups with-
in the blue sub-band to have them separated at the C1-D to C4-D outputs
for subsequent demultiplexing in the appropriate CSMs.

Transmit Direction The 4GSM-#D01-#D16 receives up to four channel groups from the corre-
sponding channel splitter modules through the inputs C1-M to C4-M. The
MUX filter combines the incoming channel groups into one blue sub-band
output signal. This signal is directed to the output N-M for transmission
over one fiber.
The same principle applies to the other module variants.

Placement The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU

slot of the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4GSM-
#D01-#D16
Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C4 #D13-#D16
C3 #D09-#D12
C2 #D05-#D08
C1 #D01-#D04

Passive Module

Fig. 7-13: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-14: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-15: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-15

Hardware Description

7.4 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
8GSM-
#D01-#D32 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the C- or L band signal
Input (N-D) for the C- or L band signal

Client port 8:
Input (C8-M) for the specific channel group signal
Output (C8-D) for the specific channel group signal

The description of the client port 8 applies for the

client ports 1 to 7 accordingly.
For channel group allocation, see Table 7-6, p. 7-17.

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-16: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-5 lists all abbreviations on the 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-5: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the modules M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C1 to C8 client ports 1 to 8
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module (8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band) is

available in two variants:
• 8GSM-#D01-#D32 (8-Port Group Splitter Module C-band)
• 8GSM-#D33-#D64 (8-Port Group Splitter Module L-band)
The faceplate of the 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is shown in Figure 7-16, p. 7-16.

Description The 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a band split-
ter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications. The module
provides eight ports on the client side. The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the name
defines the channel groups and refers to the total channel spectrum with-
in the C- or L band each module variant covers, either in the C band
(8GSM-#D01-#D32), or in the L band (8GSM-#D33-#D64).
The 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module contains a combination of MUX and DEMUX
filters for the C- or L band. These filters perform splitting and combining
of the optical channels.
Both module variants feature the same design. They differ in their optical
filters. Each of the 8 channel groups of the C- or L band is assigned to a
specific client port as shown in Table 7-6.

Table 7-6: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation

8GSM-#D01-#D32 8GSM-#D33-#D64
Client Ports Channel Groups of the C Band Channel Groups of the L Band
C8 (C8-M; C8-D) #D29-#D32 #D61-#D64
C7 (C7-M; C7-D) #D25-#D28 #D57-#D60
C6 (C6-M; C6-D) #D21-#D24 #D53-#D56
C5 (C5-M; C5-D) #D17-#D20 #D49-#D52
C4 (C4-M; C4-D) #D13-#D16 #D45-#D48
C3 (C3-M; C3-D) #D09-#D12 #D41-#D44
C2 (C2-M; C2-D) #D05-#D08 #D37-#D40
C1 (C1-M; C1-D) #D01-#D04 #D33-#D36

The advantage of using the 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is that the number of chan-

nel groups to be added or dropped can be increased or decreased without
having to change this module. However, the use of 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy mod-
ules means there will be a great deal of insertion loss.

Features • Support of 32 wavelengths in the C band and 32 wavelengths in the

L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-17, p. 7-18 shows the operating scheme of the 8GSM-#D01-#D32
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

as an example and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Document Version 7.1.5 7-17

Hardware Description

Network Client ports

port N 8GSM-#D01-#D32 C1 to C8
C8-D
#D29 to #D32
C7-D
#D25 to #D28
C6-D

Channel groups
#D21 to #D24
C5-D

DEMUX
N-D #D17 to #D20
C-Band C4-D
#D13 to #D16
(channels #D01 to #D32) C3-D
#D09 to #D12
C2-D
#D05 to #D08
C1-D
#D01 to #D04
C8-M
#D29 to #D32
C7-M
#D25 to #D28
C6-M

Channel groups
#D21 to #D24
C5-M
N-M #D17 to #D20

MUX
C-Band C4-M
(channels #D01 to #D32) #D13 to #D16
C3-M
#D09 to #D12
C2-M
#D05 to #D08
Receive direction C1-M
#D01 to #D04
Transmit direction

Fig. 7-17: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 receives the C band signal through the input N-D.
The DEMUX filter splits the incoming signal into eight channel group sig-
nals and directs them to the C1-D to C8-D outputs for subsequent demul-
tiplexing in the corresponding 4-channel splitter modules.

Transmit Direction The 8GSM-#D01-#D32 receives up to eight channel group signals within
the C band from the corresponding 4-channel splitter modules through
the inputs C1-M to C8-M. The MUX filter combines the incoming channel
group signals into one output signal. This signal is directed to the output
N-M for transmission over one fiber.
The same principle applies to the other module variant.

Placement The 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies 2 regular slots.

It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-18, Figure 7-19 and Figure 7-20.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8GSM-
#D01-#D32 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C8 #D29-#D32
C7 #D25-#D28
C6 #D21-#D24
C5 #D17-#D20
C4 #D13-#D16
C3 #D09-#D12
C2 #D05-#D08
C1 #D01-#D04
Passive Module

Fig. 7-18: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-19: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-20: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-19

Hardware Description

7.5 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
1GSM+
#D01-#D04

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number
LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the C- or L band network signal
Input (N-D) for the C- or L band network signal

Upgrade port:
Output (U-M) for the remaining DWDM channels
Input (U-D) for the remaining DWDM channels

Client port:
Input (C-M) for the DWDM channel group to be added
Output (C-D) for the DWDM channel group to be dropped

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-21: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-7 list all abbreviations on the 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-7: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
U upgrade port
C client port
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy module (1-port Group Splitter with upgrade port for
C- or L band) is available in 16 variants covering 8 C band and 8 L band
groups:
• 1GSM+#D01-#D04 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D05-#D08 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D09-#D12 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D13-#D16 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D17-#D20 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D21-#D24 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D25-#D28 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D29-#D32 (1-port Group Splitter (C band))
• 1GSM+#D33-#D36 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D37-#D40 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D41-#D44 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D45-#D48 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D49-#D52 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D53-#D56 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D57-#D60 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
• 1GSM+#D61-#D64 (1-port Group Splitter (L band))
The faceplate of the 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is shown in Figure 7-21, p. 7-20.

Description The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a channel

group splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications.
The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the name defines the channel group and refers to
the respective wavelength range within the C- or L band each module
variant covers. The module contains two optical filters which allows ac-
cess (add/drop) to specific channel groups of the C- or L band from a net-
work fiber while passing the remaining channels onto the upgrade port.
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy modules work in conjunction with the corresponding
group splitter modules on the client side. All module variants feature the
same design. They differ in their optical filters.
Each of the module variants consist of one channel group which belongs
to the C- or L band as shown in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8: 1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Channel Group Allocation
Channel Groups of the C Band Channel Groups of the L Band

Variants Client port C Variants Client port C

1GSM+#D01-#D04 #D01-#D04 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D33-#D36 #D33-#D36 (C-M; C-D)
1GSM+#D05-#D08 #D05-#D08 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D37-#D40 #D37-#D40 (C-M; C-D)
1GSM+#D09-#D12 #D09-#D12 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D41-#D44 #D41-#D44 (C-M; C-D)
1GSM+#D13-#D16 #D13-#D16 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D45-#D48 #D45-#D48 (C-M; C-D)
1GSM+#D17-#D20 #D17-#D20 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D49-#D52 #D49-#D52 (C-M; C-D)
1GSM+#D21-#D24 #D21-#D24 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D53-#D56 #D53-#D56 (C-M; C-D)
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

1GSM+#D25-#D28 #D25-#D28 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D57-#D60 #D57-#D60 (C-M; C-D)

1GSM+#D29-#D32 #D29-#D32 (C-M; C-D) 1GSM+#D61-#D64 #D61-#D64 (C-M; C-D)

Document Version 7.1.5 7-21

Hardware Description

Features • Support of 32 wavelengths in the C band and 32 wavelengths in the

L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• Adding/dropping a single DWDM wavelength
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-22 shows the operating scheme of the 1GSM+#D01-#D04 as an
example and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network Client
port N 1GSM+#D01-#D04 port C

N-D C-D
C band #D01 to #D04
(channels #D01 to #D32) (channel group of the C band)

N-M C-M
C band #D01 to #D04
(channels #D01 to #D32) (channel group of the C band)

U-M U-D Upgrade Port U

Fig. 7-22: 1GSM+#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme

Dropping a channel The 1GSM+#D01-#D04 receives over a single fiber different C band chan-
group nel group signals through the common network port N-D. A specific chan-
nel group (e.g. #D01-#D04) can be dropped out by an optical filter from
the input fiber into the client output fiber C-D for transmission to the
corresponding group splitter module. The same filter reflects all remain-
ing channels onto the upgrade port U-D.

Adding a channel The 1GSM+#D01-#D04 receives the channel groups (e.g. #D01-#D04)
group through the C-M port. The channel group is added by the optical filter in
the direction of data flow to the channel signal coming from the U-M
port. The combined signals are then transmitted through the N-M port.
The same principle applies to the other module variants.

Placement The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-23, Figure 7-24 and Figure 7-25.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
1GSM-
#D01-#D04
Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
U Upgrade
C Client
Passive Module

Fig. 7-23: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-24: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-25: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-23

Hardware Description

7.6 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
4CSM-
#D01-#D04 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the C- or L band network signal
Input (N-D) for the C- or L band network signal

Client port 4:
Input (C4-M) for the specific channel signals
Output (C4-D) for the specific channel signals

The description of the client port 4 applies for the client ports 1 to 3
accordingly.
For channel group allocation, see Table 7-10, p. 7-25 and Table 7-11,
p. 7-26.

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-26: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-9 list all abbreviations on the 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-9: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C1 - C4 client ports
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module (4-port Channel Splitter Module for C- or L

band) is available in 16 variants covering 32 C band and 32 L band chan-
nels:
• 4CSM-#D01-#D04 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D05-#D08 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D09-#D12 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D13-#D16 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D17-#D20 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D21-#D24 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D25-#D28 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D29-#D32 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM-#D33-#D36 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D37-#D40 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D41-#D44 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D45-#D48 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D49-#D52 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D53-#D56 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D57-#D60 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM-#D61-#D64 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
The faceplate of the 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is shown in Figure 7-26, p. 7-24.

Description The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a channel

splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications. The mod-
ule provides four ports on the client side. The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the name
refers to the total channel spectrum within the C- or L band each module
variant covers.
The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module comprises a combination of MUX and DEMUX
filters that handle the multiplexing/demultiplexing of up to four separate
channels within the C band or the L band into/from the composite signal.
4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy modules work in conjunction with the corresponding
channel modules on the client side. All module variants feature the same
design. They differ in their optical filters. Each of the four channels of
the C- or L band is assigned to a specific client port as shown in
Table 7-10 and Table 7-11.
Table 7-10: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation
C Band

Variants Channel Names Client ports

4CSM-#D01-#D04 #D4 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D3 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D2 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D1 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-25

Hardware Description

Table 7-10: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation (Continued)

C Band

Variants Channel Names Client ports

4CSM-#D05-#D08 #D8 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D7 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D6 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D5 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D09-#D12 #D12 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D11 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D10 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D09 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D13-#D16 #D16 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D15 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D14 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D13 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D17-#D20 #D20 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D19 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D18 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D17 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D21-#D24 #D24 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D23 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D22 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D21 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D25-#D28 #D28 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D27 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D26 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D25 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D29-#D32 #D32 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D31 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D30 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D29 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)

Table 7-11: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation

L Band

Variants Channel Names Client ports

4CSM-#D33-#D36 #D36 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D35 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D34 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D33 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Table 7-11: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation (Continued)

L Band

Variants Channel Names Client ports

4CSM-#D37-#D40 #D40 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D39 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D38 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D37 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D41-#D44 #D44 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D43 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D42 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D41 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D45-#D48 #D48 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D47 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D46 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D45 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D49-#D52 #D52 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D51 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D50 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D49 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D53-#D56 #D56 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D55 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D54 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D53 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D57-#D60 #D60 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D59 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D58 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D57 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM-#D61-#D64 #D64 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D63 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D62 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D61 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)

Features • Support of eight channel groups with a total of 32 wavelengths in

the C band and eight channel groups with a total of 32 wavelengths
in the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Paths Figure 7-27 shows the operating scheme of the 4CSM-#D01-#D04 as an ex-
ample and illustrates the signal path which is described.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-27

Hardware Description

Network Client
port N ports C
4CSM-#D01-#D04

C4-D

channels of the
#D04
C3-D

DEMUX
N-D #D03
C band C2-D
#D02

C band
(channels #D01 to #D32)
C1-D
#D01

C4-M

channels of the
#D04
N-M C3-M #D03

MUX
C band
C2-M

C band
(channels #D01 to #D32) #D02
C1-M
#D01

Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 7-27: 4CSM-#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 4CSM-#D01-#D04 receives over a single fiber different C band channel
signals through the input N-D. The DEMUX filter splits the incoming sig-
nal into four separate channels.
The individual channels are passed then through the outputs C1-D to C4-
D onto the corresponding DWDM channel modules.

Transmit Direction The 4CSM-#D01-#D04 receives up to four channels within the C band from
the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to
C4-M. The MUX filter combines the incoming channel signals into one
output signal. This signal is coupled into a single fiber and directed to
the output N-M for transmission over the network fiber.
The same principle applies to the other module variants.

Placement The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU

slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-28, Figure 7-29 and Figure 7-30.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4CSM-
#D01-#D04 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C4 #D04
C3 #D03
C2 #D02
C1 #D01

Passive Module

Fig. 7-28: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-29: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-30: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-29

Hardware Description

7.7 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
4CSM+
#D01-#D04 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the C- or L band network signal
Input (N-D) for the C- or L band network signal
Upgrade port:
Input (U-M) for the remaining DWDM channels
Output (U-D) for the remaining DWDM channels

Client port 4:
Input (C4-M) for the specific channel signal to be added
Output (C4-D) for the specific channel signal to be dropped

The description of the client port 4 applies for the client ports 1 to 3
accordingly.
For channel group allocation, see Table 7-13, p. 7-32 and Table 7-14,
p. 7-33.

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-31: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-12 list all abbreviations on the 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-12: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
U upgrade port
C1 - C4 client ports
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy module (4-port Channel Splitter Module with up-
grade port for C- or L band) is available in 16 variants covering 32 C band
and 32 L band channels:
• 4CSM+#D01-#D04 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D05-#D08 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D09-#D12 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D13-#D16 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D17-#D20 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D21-#D24 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D25-#D28 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D29-#D32 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (C band))
• 4CSM+#D33-#D36 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D37-#D40 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D41-#D44 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D45-#D48 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D49-#D52 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D53-#D56 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D57-#D60 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
• 4CSM+#D61-#D64 (4-port Channel Splitter Module (L band))
The faceplate of the 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is shown in Figure 7-31, p. 7-30.

Description The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a channel

splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications. The mod-
ule provides four ports on the client side. The part #Dxx-#Dyy of the name
refers to the total channel spectrum within the C- or L band each module
variant covers. The module contains two optical filters which allows ac-
cess (add/drop) to four specific channels of the C- or L band from a net-
work fiber while passing the remaining channels onto the upgrade port.
Additional the module comprises a combination of MUX and DEMUX filters
that handle the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the specific channel sig-
nals within the C band or the L band to/from the optical filters.
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy modules work in conjunction with the corresponding
channel modules on the client side. All module variants feature the same
design. They differ in their filters. Each of the four channels of the C- or
L band is assigned to a specific client port as shown in Table 7-13 and
Table 7-14.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-31

Hardware Description

Table 7-13: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation

C Band

Variants Channel Names Client ports

4CSM+#D01-#D04 #D4 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D3 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D2 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D1 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D05-#D08 #D8 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D7 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D6 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D5 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D09-#D12 #D12 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D11 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D10 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D09 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D13-#D16 #D16 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D15 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D14 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D13 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D17-#D20 #D20 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D19 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D18 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D17 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D21-#D24 #D24 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D23 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D22 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D21 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D25-#D28 #D28 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D27 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D26 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D25 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D29-#D32 #D32 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D31 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D30 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D29 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
* The input and output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly labeled on the
faceplates.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Table 7-14: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation

L Band

Variants Channel Names Client ports

4CSM+#D33-#D36 #D36 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D35 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D34 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D33 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D37-#D40 #D40 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D39 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D38 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D37 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D41-#D44 #D44 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D43 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D42 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D41 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D45-#D48 #D48 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D47 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D46 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D45 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D49-#D52 #D52 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D51 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D50 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D49 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D53-#D56 #D56 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D55 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D54 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D53 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D57-#D60 #D60 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D59 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D58 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D57 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
4CSM+#D61-#D64 #D64 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D63 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D62 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D61 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)

Features • Support of eight channel groups with a total of 32 wavelengths in

the C band and eight channel groups with a total of 32 wavelengths
in the L band according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

• Full management support

Document Version 7.1.5 7-33

Hardware Description

Signal Path Figure 7-32 shows the operating scheme of the 4CSM+#D01-#D04 as an
example and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network Client ports

port N 4CSM+#D01-#D04 C1 to C4

C4-D

channels of the
#D04
C3-D

DEMUX
N-D #D03
C band C2-D
#D02

C band
(channels #D01 to #D32)
C1-D
#D01

C4-M

channels of the
#D04
N-M C3-M #D03

MUX
C band
C2-M

C band
(channels #D01 to #D32) #D02
C1-M
#D01

Receive direction
U-M U-D Upgrade port U Transmit direction
Dropping channel signal
Adding channel signal

Fig. 7-32: 4CSM+#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme

Receive/Drop The 4CSM+#D01-#D04 receives over a single fiber different C band channel
Direction signals through the common network port N-D. A specific channel group
can be dropped out by an optical filter from the input fiber to the DEMUX
filter. The same optical filter reflects all remaining channels onto the up-
grade port U-D. The DEMUX filter splits the dropped channel group into
four separate channels. The individual channels are passed then through
the output C1-D to C4-D onto the corresponding DWDM channel modules.

Transmit/Add The 4CSM+#D01-#D04 receives up to four channels within the C band from
Direction the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs C1-M to
C4-M to the MUX filter. The MUX filter combines the incoming channel
signals into one output signal. The output signal is passed through an op-
tical filter in the direction of data flow to add the optical signals coming
from the U-M port. All signals are then combined and transmitted through
the N-M.
The same principle applies to other module variants.

Placement The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf. and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-33, Figure 7-34 and Figure 7-35.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4CSM+
#D01-#D04 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
U Upgrade
C4 #D04
C3 #D03
C2 #D02
C1 #D01

Passive Module

Fig. 7-33: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-34: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-35: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-35

Hardware Description

7.8 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Module name
Serial number
LED indicator
Channel allocation
For channel allocation of all
module variants, see
Table 7-16, p. 7-37
Network port:
Output (N-M) for the C- or
L band signal
Input (N-D) for the C- or
L band signal

Client port 1:
Input (C1-M) for channel
signal
Output (C1-D) for channel
signal

Item number

Fig. 7-36: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-15 lists all abbreviations on the 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-15: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
C1 to C40 client ports 1 to 40
N network port
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Variants The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module (40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C-

or L-band) is available in two variants:
• 40CSM-#D02-#D32 (40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter C-band)
• 40CSM-#D34-#D64 (40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter L-band)
Figure 7.8, p. 7-36 shows the faceplate of the 40CSM-#D02-#D32 as an ex-
ample.

Description The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is a passive optical module that acts as a channel

splitter and combiner for linear add/drop applications. Specifically it is
designed for DWDM in 40-channel dual-fiber point-to-point configura-
tions. The module provides 40 ports on the client side. The part #Dxx-#Dyy
of the name refers to the total channel spectrum within the C or L band
each module variant covers, either in the C band (40CSM-#D02-#D32), or
in the L band (40CSM-#D34-#D64).
The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy module comprises a combination of specific optical
filters that handle the multiplexing/demultiplexing of up to 40 separate
channels within the C band or the L band into/from the composite signal.
Both module variants feature the same design. They differ in their optical
filters. Each of the 40 separate DWDM channels of the C or L band is as-
signed to a specific client port as shown in Table 7-16.

Table 7-16: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation

40CSM-#D02-#D32 (C Band) 40CSM-#D34-#D64 (L Band)
Channel Name Client ports* Channel Name Client ports*
#DC9 C1 (C1-M; C1-D) #DL9 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)
#D02 C2 (C2-M; C2-D) #D34 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#D03 C3 (C3-M; C3-D) #D35 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#D04 C4 (C4-M; C4-D) #D36 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#D05 C5 (C5-M; C5-D) #D37 C5 (C5-M; C5-D)
#D06 C6 (C6-M; C6-D) #D38 C6 (C6-M; C6-D)
#D07 C7 (C7-M; C7-D) #D39 C7 (C7-M; C7-D)
#D08 C8 (C8-M; C8-D) #D40 C8 (C8-M; C8-D)
#D09 C9 (C9-M; C9-D) #D41 C9 (C9-M; C9-D)
#D10 C10 (C10-M; C10-D) #D42 C10 (C10-M; C10-D)
#D11 C11 (C11-M; C11-D) #D43 C11 (C11-M; C11-D)
#D12 C12 (C12-M; C12-D) #D44 C12 (C12-M; C12-D)
#D13 C13 (C13-M; C13-D) #D45 C13 (C13-M; C13-D)
#D14 C14 (C14-M; C14-D) #D46 C14 (C14-M; C14-D)
#D15 C15 (C15-M; C15-D) #D47 C15 (C15-M; C15-D)
#D16 C16 (C16-M; C16-D) #D48 C16 (C16-M; C16-D)
#D17 C17 (C17-M; C17-D) #D49 C17 (C17-M; C17-D)
#D18 C18 (C18-M; C18-D) #D50 C18 (C18-M; C18-D)
#D19 C19 (C19-M; C19-D) #D51 C19 (C19-M; C19-D)
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

#D20 C20 (C20-M; C20-D) #D52 C20 (C20-M; C20-D)

#D21 C21 (C21-M; C21-D) #D53 C21 (C21-M; C21-D)

Document Version 7.1.5 7-37

Hardware Description

Table 7-16: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation (Continued)

40CSM-#D02-#D32 (C Band) 40CSM-#D34-#D64 (L Band)
Channel Name Client ports* Channel Name Client ports*
#D22 C22 (C22-M; C22-D) #D54 C22 (C22-M; C22-D)
#D23 C23 (C23-M; C23-D) #D55 C23 (C23-M; C23-D)
#D24 C24 (C24-M; C24-D) #D56 C24 (C24-M; C24-D)
#D25 C25 (C25-M; C25-D) #D57 C25 (C25-M; C25-D)
#D26 C26 (C26-M; C26-D) #D58 C26 (C26-M; C26-D)
#C27 C27 (C27-M; C27-D) #D59 C27 (C27-M; C27-D)
#D28 C28 (C28-M; C28-D) #D60 C28 (C28-M; C28-D)
#D29 C29 (C29-M; C29-D) #D61 C29 (C29-M; C29-D)
#D30 C30 (C30-M; C30-D) #D62 C30 (C30-M; C30-D)
#D31 C31 (C31-M; C31-D) #D63 C31 (C31-M; C31-D)
#D32 C32 (C32-M; C32-D) #D64 C32 (C32-M; C32-D)
#DC1 C33 (C33-M; C33-D) #DL1 C33 (C33-M; C33-D)
#DC2 C34 (C34-M; C34-D) #DL2 C34 (C34-M; C34-D)
#DC3 C35 (C35-M; C35-D) #DL3 C35 (C35-M; C35-D)
#DC4 C36 (C36-M; C36-D) #DL4 C36 (C36-M; C36-D)
#DC5 C37 (C37-M; C37-D) #DL5 C37 (C37-M; C37-D)
#DC6 C38 (C38-M; C38-D) #DL6 C38 (C38-M; C38-D)
#DC7 C39 (C39-M; C39-D) #DL7 C39 (C39-M; C39-D)
#DC8 C40 (C40-M; C40-D) #DL8 C40 (C40-M; C40-D)
* The input and output connectors of the client ports are not explicitly labeled on the
faceplates.

The 40CSM-#D02-#D32 and 40CSM-#D34-#D64 can be combined with a

2CLSM-#D01-#D64 to form an 80-channel bidirectional transmission sys-
tem, thus resulting in 40 channel granularity. Other configurations
should be avoided due to the limited isolation values of the filters used
in these modules.

Features • Support of up to 40 different wavelengths within the C- or L band

according to ITU-T G.694.1 (100 GHz channel spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-37, p. 7-39 shows the operating scheme of the 40CSM-#D02-#D32
as an example and illustrates the signal path which is described.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy

Network Client ports

port N 40CSM-#D02-#D32 C1 through C40
C40-D
#DC8
C39-D
#DC7

DEMUX
N-D
C band
(channels #D02 to #D32
C2-D
and #DC1 to #DC9 #D02
C1-D
#DC9
C40-M
#DC8
C39-M
#DC7
N-M

MUX
C band
(channels #D02 to #D32 C2-M
and #DC1 to #DC9 #D02
C1-M
#DC9
Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 7-37: 40CSM-#D02-#D32 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 40CSM-#D02-#D32 receives the composite C band signals through the
input N-D. The DEMUX filter splits the incoming signals into up to 40 sep-
arate channels. The individual channels are passed then through the out-
puts C1-D to C40-D onto the corresponding DWDM channel modules.

Transmit Direction The 40CSM-#D02-#D32 receives up to 40 individual channels within the C

band from the corresponding DWDM channel modules through the inputs
C1-M to C40-M. The MUX filter combines the incoming channel signals
into one output signal. The signal is coupled into a single fiber and di-
rected to the output N-M for transmission over the network fiber.
Using the channel spectrum of the L band, the 40CSM-#D34-#D64 works
in exactly the same manner.

Placement The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy is 32 HP wide and therefore occupy eight regular

slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-38, Figure 7-39 and Figure 7-40.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-39

Hardware Description

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
40CSM-
#D02-#D32 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C1 - C40 #D02-#D32

Passive Module

Fig. 7-38: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-39: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-40: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-40 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W

7.9 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W

Module name
1CSM+
#D01-E/W
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED Indicator

Network port West:

Output (NW-M) for traffic in westward direction
Input (NW-D) for traffic from the West direction
Network port East:
Output (NE-M) for traffic in eastward direction
Input (NE-D) for traffic from the East direction

Upgrade port West:

Input (UW-M) for traffic from the West direction
Output (UW-D) for traffic in westward direction

Upgrade port East:

Input (UE-M) for traffic from the East direction
Output (UE-D) for traffic in eastward direction

Client port West:

Input West (CW-M) for single channel to be added
Output West (CW-D) for single channel to be dropped

Client port East:

Output East (CE-D) for single channel to be dropped
Input East (CE-M) for single channel to be added

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-41: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-17 list all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-17: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
NW network ports West
NE network ports East
UW upgrade ports West
UE upgrade ports East
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

CW client ports West

CE client ports East

Document Version 7.1.5 7-41

Hardware Description

Variants: The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W is available in 64 variants, one for each of the 64 FSP
3000R7 DWDM channels is supported: 1CSM+#D01-E/W to 1CSM+#D64-
E/W. (#Dxx stands for DWDM channel number 01 through 64.)
Figure 7.8, p. 7-36 shows the faceplate of the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W as an ex-
ample.

Description The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W is a dual sided East/West Single Channel Splitter

Module specifically designed for DWDM fiber ring configurations. It con-
tains two identical optical filters which allow access (add/drop) to a spe-
cific channel from a network fiber while passing the remaining channels
onto the upgrade port. The module’s design maps the added and dropped
channel into separate two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into
the network (East/West). Added/dropped channel is interfaced to the
corresponding channel module on the equipment side. Using the upgrade
ports the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W module can be cascaded to terminate and in-
sert specific channels at a certain site. Otherwise the upgrade ports UW-
D and U-EM as well as UW-M and UE-D has to be interconnected using
patch cables.

Features • Support of 64 wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.1

(100 GHz wavelength spacing)
• Adding/dropping a single DWDM wavelength
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Supports full management

Signal path Figure 7-42 shows the operating scheme of the 1CSM+#D01-E/W as an ex-
ample and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network Network
ports NW 1CSM+#D01-E/W ports NE
West side East side

Filter Filter
NW-D UW-D UE-M NE-M

Upgrade Upgrade
ports UW ports UE
Filter Filter
NW-M UW-M UE-D NE-D

CW-M CW-D CE-M CE-D

Client ports CW Client ports CE
West -East direction
#D01 #D01 East - West direction #D01 #D01
Fig. 7-42: 1CSM+#D01-E/W Operating Scheme

Dropping a single The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W receives over two single fibers two different multi-
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

channel channel signals through the common input ports NW-D from the West di-
rection and NE-D from the East direction.

7-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W

A specific channel (e.g. #D01) can be dropped on a per-wavelength basis

from either of the input fibers into the client output ports CW-D and CE-
D for transmission to the corresponding West or East channel module.
The same filter reflects all remaining channels onto the upgrade output
ports UW-D and UE-D.

Adding a single The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W receives the single channels (e.g. #D01) from the
channel West and East channel modules through the CW-M and CE-M ports. Both
channels are added by the appropriate optical filters in the direction of
data flow to the multi-channel signals coming from the UW-M and UW-
M ports. The combined signals are then transmitted through the NW-M
port in a westward direction and through the NE-M port in an eastward
direction.

Placement The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W has one LED indicator on its faceplate. Its colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-43, Figure 7-44 and Figure 7-45.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
1CSM+
#D01-EW
Serial Number:
Port Description
NW Network West xxxxxxxxxxxx
NE Network East
UW Upgrade West
UE Upgrade East
CW Client West
CE Client East
Passive Module

Fig. 7-43: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Module Type Label

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-43

Hardware Description

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-44: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-45: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610

7.10 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610

Module name
2ABSM-
#C1470-#C1610 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
LED indicator

Network port N:
Output (N-M) for the A and B band signals (#C1470 - #C1610)
Input (N-D) for the A and B band signals (#C1470 - #C1610)

Client port C2:

Input (C2-M) for the B band signal (#C1510 - #C1570)
Output (C2-D) for the B band signal (#C1510 - #C1570)

Client port C1:

Input (C1-M) for the A band signal (#C1470 - #C1610)
Output (C1-D) for the A band signal (#C1470 - #C1610)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-46: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-18 list all abbreviations on the 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 7-18: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C1 client port for A band signals
C2 client port for B band signals
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-45

Hardware Description

Description The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 is a passive optical module that acts as a sub-

band splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications.
The module provides two ports on the client side. It comprises a combi-
nation of specific A/B band MUX and DEMUX filters that perform the split-
ting and combining of the bands A and B. The band A supports the
channels #C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and #C1610 with the corresponding
center wavelengths 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm. The band
B supports the channels #C1510, #C1530, #C1550 and #C1570 with the
center wavelengths 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm. The center
wavelengths of both bands are equivalent to ITU-T G.694.2.
The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 works in conjunction with the appropriate
optical filter modules on the client side.

Features • Support of up to eight different CWDM wavelengths according to

ITU-T G.694.2 (20 mm channel spacing). Each band (A and B) covers
four wavelengths.
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-47, p. 7-46 shows the operating scheme of the 2ABSM-#C1470-
#C1610 and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network Client
port N 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 ports C1 and C2

C2-D
B band
DEMUX

N-D (#C1510 - #C1570)

A/B band
(#C1470, #C1490 , #C1510, #C1530, C1-D
A band
#C1550, #C1570, #C1590, #C1610)
(#C1470 - #C1610)

C2-M
B band
N-M (#C1510 - #C1570)
MUX

A/B band
(#C1470, #C1490 , #C1510, #C1530, C1-M
A band
#C1550, #C1570, #C1590, #C1610) (#C1470 - #C1610)

Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 7-47: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives over a single fiber up to eight CWDM
channel signals (#C1470 - #C1610) through the input N-D. The DEMUX fil-
ter splits the incoming wavelengths into the band A (#C1470, #C1490,
#C1590, #C1610) and the band B (#C1510, #C1530, #C1550, #C1570) to
have two separate bands at the C1-D and C2-D output for subsequent de-
multiplexing in the corresponding optical filter modules.

Transmit Direction The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives the band A (#C1470, #C1490,

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

#C1590, #C1610) and band B (#C1510, #C1530, #C1550, #C1570) from the
corresponding optical filter modules through the inputs C1-M and C2-M.

7-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610

The MUX filter combines the incoming band signals into one output sig-
nal. This signal is directed to the output N-M for transmission over one
fiber.

Placement The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU

slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 has one LED indicator on its faceplate. Its
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-48, Figure 7-49 and Figure 7-50.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2ABSM-
#C1470-#C1610
Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C2 #C1510-#C1570
C1 #C1470-#C1610
Passive Module

Fig. 7-48: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-49: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-50: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Warranty Label
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

Document Version 7.1.5 7-47

Hardware Description

7.11 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610

Module name Variants:

Serial number none

LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for network signals
Input (N-D) for network signals

Client port 3:
Input (C3-M) for channels #C1510–#C1570
Output (C3-D) for channels #C1510–#C1570
Client port 2:
Input (C2-M) for channels #C1470–#C1610
Output (C2-D) for channels #C1470–#C1610
Client port 1:
Input (C1-M) for channel #G1310
Output (C1-D) for channel #G1310

Item number

Fig. 7-51: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-19 lists all abbreviations on the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 7-19: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing (combining)
D demultiplexing (splitting)
N network interface
C1 client interface 1
C2 client interface 2
C3 client interface 3
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-48 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610

Description The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 is a Band Splitter Module specifically designed

for CWDM in 9-channel dual-fiber point-to-point and ring configurations.
It enables the transmission of an additional broadband 1310 nm channel
(#G1310) over the CWDM network without having to upgrade existing in-
frastructure and without affecting running services. For this purpose, this
module contains a set of optical filters which perform the combining and
splitting of two groups of CWDM channels and the 1310 nm. Combining
and splitting of up to nine channels is executed in one stage. Connecting
the 1310 nm channel to the client equipment without using a channel
module requires special attention. The broadband channel #G1310 covers
pre-defined wavelengths around 1310 nm.

If third party equipment with a wavelength of 1310 nm is connected

Caution to the interface C1 of the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610, the operating
organization of the network has to make sure that the output power
of this equipment does not exceed the power limit of laser hazard
level 1 as specified in IEC 60825. The operating organization is
solely responsible for the safety of the end-to-end system.

Features • Support of up to 8 different wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.2

(20 nm channel spacing) in two groups of 4 wavelengths each
• Provides 1310 nm connectivity
• LC type connectors
• Supports full management

One group includes the center wavelengths 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm
and 1611 nm, while the other group contains the center wavelengths
1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm.

Signal Path Figure 7-52, p. 7-49 shows the operating scheme of the 3BSM-#G1310-
#C1610 and illustrates the signal path which is described.

Network Client ports

ports N 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 C1 to cC3
#C1510, #C1530, C3-D
#C1550, #C1570, #C1510, #C1530, #C1550, #C1570
#C1470, #C1490,
DEMUX

N-D C2-D
#C1590, #C1610, #C1470, #C1490, #C1590, #C1610
#G1310
C1-D
#G1310

#C1510, #C1530, C3-M

#C1550, #C1570, #C1510, #C1530, #C1550, #C1570
#C1470, #C1490, N-M C2-M
MUX

#C1590, #C1610, #C1470, #C1490, #C1590, #C1610

#G1310
C1-M
#G1310
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 7-52: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Operating Scheme

Document Version 7.1.5 7-49

Hardware Description

Receive direction The module receives from the far end of the link over a single fiber the
combined optical signal through the common input port N-D. The band
demultiplexer (DEMUX) splits the incoming signal into two sets of four
different channels each and the 1310 nm channel to have them separated
at the output ports C1-D to C3-D for transmission to the 4CSMs and third
party equipment.

Transmit direction The module receives the entire CWDM channel spectrum (two sets of four
different channels each) along with the optional #G1310 channel through
the input ports C1-M to C3-M. The band multiplexer (MUX) combines the
two sets of channels and the 1310 nm channel into one output signal.
The resulting signal which can consist of up to 9 channels, is coupled into
a single fiber for transportation through the common output port N-M to
the far-end of the link.

Placement The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot

of the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 has one LED indicator on its faceplate. Its col-
ors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trouble-
shooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-53, Figure 7-54 and Figure 7-55.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
3BSM-
#G1310-#C1610
Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C3 #C1510-#C1570
C2 #C1470-#C1610
C1 #G1310
Passive Module

Fig. 7-53: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Module Type Label

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-50 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-54: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-55: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-51

Hardware Description

7.12 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy

Module name
4CSM-
#C1470-#C1610 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the CWDM network signals
Input (N-D) for the CWDM network signals

Client port 4:
Input (C4-M) for the specific CWDM channel
Output (C4-D) for the specific CWDM channel

The description of the client port 4 applies for the client ports 1 to 3
accordingly.
For channel allocation, see Table 7-21, p. 7-53.

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-56: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-20 list all abbreviations on the 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-20: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
C1 - C4 client ports
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-52 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy

Variants The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy (4-port Channel Splitter Module) is available in

two variants. Each variant covers four different CWDM wavelengths:
• 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610
(4-port Channel Splitter Module (#C1470, #C1490, #C1590, #C1610))
• 4CSM-#C1510-#C1570
(4-port Channel Splitter Module (#C1510, #C1530, #C1550, #C1590))
Figure 7.8, p. 7-36 shows the faceplate of the 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy as an
example.

Description The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy is a passive optical module that acts as a

channel splitter and combiner for linear add/drop and ring applications.
The module provides four ports on the client side. The part #Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
of the name refers to the center wavelengths each module variant covers.
The variant 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 includes the wavelengths 1471 nm,
1491 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm, while the 4CSM-#C1510-#C1570 con-
tains the wavelengths 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm and 1571 nm.
Both module variants base on the ITU-T G.694.2 grid.
Both 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy modules comprise a combination of MUX and
DEMUX filters that handle the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the specific
wavelengths into/from the composite signal.
4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy modules work in conjunction with the corresponding
channel modules on the client side. Both module variants feature the
same design. They differ in their optical filters. Each of the four separate
channels is assigned to a specific client port as shown in Table 7-21.
Table 7-21: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Client Port Allocation
4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 4CSM-#C1510-#C1570
Channel Name Client ports Channel Name Client ports
#C1610 C4 (C4-M; C4-D) #C1570 C4 (C4-M; C4-D)
#C1590 C3 (C3-M; C3-D) #C1550 C3 (C3-M; C3-D)
#C1490 C2 (C2-M; C2-D) #C1530 C2 (C2-M; C2-D)
#C1470 C1 (C1-M; C1-D) #C1510 C1 (C1-M; C1-D)

Features • Support of up to four different wavelengths within one module

variant according to ITU-T G.694.2 (20 mm channel spacing)
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-57, p. 7-54 shows the operating scheme of the
4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 and illustrates the signal path.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-53

Hardware Description

Network Client ports

port N C1 to C4
4CSM-#C1470-#C1610
C4-D
#C1610 (1611 nm)
C3-D
#C1470, #C1490,

DEMUX
N-D #C1590 (1591 nm)
#C1590, #C1610 C2-D
#C1490 (1491 nm)
C1-D
#C1470 (1471 nm)

C4-M
#C1610 (1611 nm)
#C1470, #C1490, C3-M
N-M #C1590 (1591 nm)

MUX
#C1590, #C1610 C2-M
#C1490 (1491 nm)
C1-M
#C1470 (1471 nm)

Receive direction
Transmit direction

Fig. 7-57: 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme

Receive Direction The 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives over a single fiber the module covered
wavelengths 1611 nm, 1591 nm, 1571 nm and 1411 nm through the input
N-D. The DEMUX filter splits the incoming wavelengths into four separate
channels.
The individual channels pass through the outputs C1-D to C4-D onto the
corresponding CWDM channel modules.

Transmit Direction The 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 receives over the four channels C1-M to C4-M
(#C1470, #C1490, #C1590 and #C1610) the corresponding CWDM wave-
lengths. The MUX filter combines the incoming wavelengths into one out-
put signal. This signal is coupled into a single fiber and directed to the
output N-M for transmission over the network fiber.
The same principle applies to the other module variant.

Placement The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot

of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its col-
ors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trouble-
shooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-58, Figure 7-59 and Figure 7-60.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-54 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4CSM-
#C1470-#C1610 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
C4 #C1610
C3 #C1590
C2 #C1490
C1 #C1470

Passive Module

Fig. 7-58: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-59: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-60: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-55

Hardware Description

7.13 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610

Module name
Serial number
LED indicator

Network port N:
Output (N-M) for the CWDM channels and the gray #G1310 channel
Input (N-D) for the CWDM channels and the gray #G1310 channel

Upgrade port U:
Output (U-D) for the channel #G1310
Input (U-M) for the channel #G1310
Client port C8:
Input (C8-M) for the specific CWDM channel
Output (C8-D) for the specific CWDM channel

The description of the client port 8 applies for the client ports 1 to 7
accordingly.
For channel allocation, see Table 7-23, p. 7-57.

Item number

Fig. 7-61: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-22 list all abbreviations on the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 faceplate
and their meanings.

Table 7-22: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
U upgrade port
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

C1 - C8 client ports

7-56 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610

Description The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 is a passive optical module that adds/drops a

single broadband channel (#G1310) and splits/combines the CWDM wave-
length spectrum in a serial.
The broadband channel #G1310 covers pre-defined wavelengths around
1310 nm.
The module contains two upgrade filters that enable the add/drop of a
single broadband 1310 nm channel (#G1310) into/from the network fiber.
Additional the module includes a combination of MUX and DEMUX filters
that handle the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the CWDM wavelength
spectrum. This wavelength spectrum ranges from 1471 nm through 1611
nm on the CWDM ITU-T G 694.2 grid (with 20 nm spacing).
The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 has to be connected to the corresponding
channel module on the client side. The upgrade side has to be connected
to the optical filter modules or to the client equipment without using a
channel module requires special attention.

If third party equipment with a wavelength of 1310 nm is connected

Caution to the 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610, the operating organization of the
network has to make sure that the output power of this equipment
does not exceed the power limit of laser hazard level 1 as specified
in IEC 60825. The operating organization is solely responsible for
the safety of the end-to-end system.

Table 7-23: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Client Port Allocation

Channel Names* Client Ports
C8 (C8-M; C8-D) #C1610
C7 (C7-M; C7-D) #C1590
C6 (C6-M; C6-D) #C1570
C5 (C5-M; C5-D) #C1550
C4 (C4-M; C4-D) #C1530
C3 (C3-M; C3-D) #C1510
C2 (C2-M; C2-D) #C1490
C1 (C1-M; C1-D) #C1470

Features • Support of a single broadband (#G1310) and up to eight different

CWDM wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.2
• LC type connectors
• Provides 1310 nm connectivity
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-57

Hardware Description

Signal Path
Network port N 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Client ports C
C8-D
#C1610 (1611 nm)
C7-D #C1590 (1591 nm)
C6-D
#C1570 (1571 nm)

DEMUX
N-D C5-D #C1550 (1551 nm)
#G1310 C4-D
#C1530 (1531 nm)
#C1470-#C1610 C3-D #C1510 (1511 nm)
C2-D #C1490 (1491 nm)
C1-D
#C1470 (1471 nm)
C8-M
#C1610 (1611 nm)
C7-M #C1590 (1591 nm)
C6-M #C1570 (1571 nm)
N-M C5-M #C1550 (1551 nm)

MUX
#G1310 C4-M #C1530 (1531 nm)
#C1470-#C1610 C3-M #C1510 (1511 nm)
C2-M #C1490 (1491 nm)
C1-M #C1470 (1471 nm)

U-M U-D Upgrade port U

#G1310

Receive direction
#G1310

Transmit direction

Fig. 7-62: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme

Receive/Drop The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 receives over a single fiber up to eight CWDM

Direction channels and an #G1310 channel through the common network port N-D.
The #G1310 is dropped out by the upgrade filter and directed to the U-D
port. The DEMUX filter splits the CWDM signal into eight separate chan-
nels. The CWDM channels are passed then through the output C1-D to C8-
D onto the corresponding channel module.

Transmit/Add The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 receives from an optical filter module the

Direction CWDM channels through the input ports C1-M to C8-M to the MUX filter.
The MUX filter combines the incoming channels into one output channel
signal. This channel signal is passed then through an upgrade filter in the
direction of data flow to add the #G1310 channel. The resulting signal
which can consists of up to eight channel plus the #G1310 channel, is
coupled into a single fiber for transportation through the common output
port N-M to the far-end of the link.

Placement The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot

of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its col-
ors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trouble-
shooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-63, Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-58 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8CSM+
#C1470-#C1610 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
U Upgrade
C8 #C1610
C7 #C1590
C6 #C1570
C5 #C1550
C4 #C1530
C3 #C1510
C2 #C1490
C1 #C1470
Passive Module

Fig. 7-63: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-64: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-65: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-59

Hardware Description

7.14 1CSM+#G1310

Module name
Serial number
LED indicator

Network port N:
Output (N-M) for up to 8 CWDM channels and the #G1310 channel
Input port (N-D) for CWDM channels + the #G1310 channel
Upgrade ports U:
Output (U-D) for the entire CWDM channel spectrum
Input (U-M) for the entire CWDM channel spectrum

Client port C:
Input (C-M) for the channel #G1310
Output (C-D) for the channel #G1310

Item number

Fig. 7-66: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View

Fig. 7-67: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-25 list all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#G1310 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-24: 1CSM+#G1310 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network interface
U upgrade ports
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

C client interface

7-60 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#G1310

Description The 1CSM+#G1310 is a Channel Splitter Module that enable access to a

single broadband 1310 nm channel (#G1310) from a network fiber while
passing the CWDM wavelengths onto the upgrade port. For this purpose,
the module contains a set of identical 1310 nm filters performing the
add/drop function on the pre-defined wavelengths around 1310 nm.
The 1CSM+#G1310 is transparent for the CWDM wavelengths spectrum
which ranges from 1471 nm through 1611 nm on the CWDM ITU-T G.694.2
grid (with 20 nm spacing). The 1CSM+#G1310 has to be connected to op-
tical filter modules to access individual CWDM wavelengths.
Connecting the 1310 nm channel to the client equipment without using
a channel module requires special attention.

If third party equipment with a wavelength of 1310 nm is connected

Caution to the 1CSM+#G1310, the operating organization of the network has
to make sure that the output power of this equipment does not
exceed the power limit of laser hazard level 1 as specified in IEC
60825. The operating organization is solely responsible for the
safety of the end-to-end system.

The 1CSM+#G1310 is deployed at sites where future access to a single

wavelength of 1310 nm may be required. It can be used in virtually all
types of CWDM networks, unless a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 is part of the
configuration.

Features • Support of up to 8 different wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.2

(20 nm channel spacing)
• Implementation of the #G1310 channel without affecting running
services
• LC type connectors
• Supports full management

Signal Path Figure 7-68 shows the operating scheme of the 1CSM+#G1310 and illus-
trates the signal path which is described.
Network Upgrade
ports 1CSM+#G1310 ports

Filter
N-D U-D

#C1470-#C1610 #C1470-#C1610
#G1310

Filter
#C1470-#C1610 #C1470-#C1610
#G1310
N-M U-M

C-M C-D Client ports

Receive direction
Transmit direction
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

#G1310 #G1310

Fig. 7-68: Operating Scheme of the 1CSM+#G1310

Document Version 7.1.5 7-61

Hardware Description

Receive direction The 1CSM+#G1310 receives from the far end of the link over a single fiber
the network signal through the common input port N-D. The #G1310
channel is dropped out of the CWDM channels by the 1310 nm filter and
directed to the C-D port for transmission to the client equipment. The re-
maining channels (#C1470 – #C1610) are passed through the module to
be transmitted via the upgrade port U-D to an optical filter module.

Transmit direction The 1CSM+#G1310 receives from an optical filter module a set of CWDM
channels through the U-M port and passes it through the module. The
#G1310 channel is received through the input port C-M. It is added by
the 1310 nm filter in the same direction of data flow to the incoming set
of CWDM channels. The resulting signal which can consist of up to nine
channels, is coupled into a single fiber for transportation through the
common output port N-M to the far-end of the link.

Placement The 1CSM+#G1310 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the

7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 1CSM+#G1310 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-69, Figure 7-70 and Figure 7-71.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
1CSM+
#G1310 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
U Upgrade
C Client
Passive Module

Fig. 7-69: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Module Type Label

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-62 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#G1310

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-70: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-71: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-63

Hardware Description

7.15 1CSM+#Cxxxx

Module name
1CSM+
#C1510
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Network port N:
Output (N-M) for the CWDM network signal
Input (N-D) for the CWDM network signal
Upgrade port U:
Output (U-M) for the remaining channels
Input (U-D) for the remaining channels

Client port C:
Input (C-M) for the specific single CWDM channel
Output (C-D) for the specific single CWDM channel

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-72: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-25 list all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#Cxxxx for faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-25: 1CSM+ for CWDM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
U upgrade port
C client port
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-64 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#Cxxxx

Variants The 1CSM+#Cxxxx is available in eight variants, one each of the FSP
3000R7 CWDM channels is supported:
• 1CSM+#C1470
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1471 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1490
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1491 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1510
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1511 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1530
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1531 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1550
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1551 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1570
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1571 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1590
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1591 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1610
(Single Channel Splitter which covers the wavelength 1611 nm)
The faceplate of the 1CSM+#Cxxxx is shown in Figure 7-72, p. 7-64.

Description The 1CSM+#Cxxxx is a Single Channel Splitter Module specifically de-

signed for CWDM linear add/drop and ring applications. It contains two
optical filters which allow access (add/drop) to a specific channel from a
network fiber while passing the remaining channels onto the upgrade
port.
The part #Cxxxx of the name refers on the ITU-T G 694.2 grid to the re-
spective CWDM channel modules each module variant covers.
The 1CSM+#Cxxxx works in conjunction with the corresponding channel
modules on the client side. All module variants feature the same design.
They differ only in their optical filters.

Features • Support of 8 wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.2

(20 nm wavelength spacing)
• Adding/dropping a single CWDM wavelength
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Supports full management

Signal Path Figure 7-73, p. 7-66 shows the operating scheme of the 1CSM+#C1510 and
illustrates the signal path which is described.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-65

Hardware Description

Network Upgrade
ports N 1CSM+#C1510 ports U
Filter
N-D U-D
CWDM channels

Filter
N-M U-M
CWDM channels

C-M C-D
Client ports C
Receive direction
#C1510 #C1510 Transmit direction

Fig. 7-73: 1CSM+#C1510 Operating Scheme

Dropping a single The 1CSM+#C1510 receives over a single fiber CWDM channels through the
channel common network port N-D. A specific channel (#C1510) is dropped out by
an optical filter and directed to the C-D port for transmission to the cor-
responding channel module. The same filter reflects all remaining chan-
nels onto the upgrade port U-D.

Adding a single The 1CSM+#C1510 receives the single channel (#C1510) through the C-M
channel port to the optical filter in the direction of data flow to add the optical
signal coming from the U-M port. All signals are then combined and trans-
mitted through the N-M.

Placement The 1CSM+#Cxxxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the

7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 1CSM+#Cxxxx has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-74, Figure 7-75 and Figure 7-76.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
1CSM+
#C1510 Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
U Upgrade
C Client
Passive Module
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Fig. 7-74: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Module Type Label

7-66 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#Cxxxx

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-75: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-76: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-67

Hardware Description

7.16 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W

Module name
Serial number
LED indicator
Network ports West:
Output (NW-M) for traffic in westward direction
Input (NW-D) for traffic from the West direction

Network ports East:

Output (NE-M) for traffic in eastward direction
Input (NE-D) for traffic from the East direction

Upgrade ports West:

Input (UW-M) for traffic from the East direction
Output (UW-D) for traffic in eastward direction

Upgrade ports East:

Input (UE-M) for traffic from the West direction
Output (UE-D) for traffic in westward direction

Client ports West:

Output West (CW-D) for single channel to be dropped
Input West (CW-M) for single channel to be added

Client ports East:

Output East (CE-D) for single channel to be dropped
Input East (CE-M) for single channel to be added

Item number

Fig. 7-77: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-26 list all abbreviations on the 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-26: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
NW network ports West
NE network ports East
UW upgrade ports West
UE upgrade port East
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

CW client port West

CE client port East

7-68 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W

Variants The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W is available in eight variants, one each of the FSP
3000R7 CWDM channels is supported:
• 1CSM+#C1470 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1471 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1490 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1491 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1510 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1511 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1530 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1531 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1550 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1551 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1570 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1571 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1590 (East/West Single Channel Splitter which covers the
wavelength 1591 nm)
• 1CSM+#C1610 (East/West Single Channel Splitter Channel Splitter
which covers the wavelength 1611 nm)
The faceplate of the 1CSM+#Cxxxx is shown in Figure 7-77, p. 7-68.

Description The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W is a dual sided East/West Single Channel Splitter

Module specifically designed for CWDM fiber ring configurations. It con-
tains two identical optical filters which allow access (add/drop) to a spe-
cific channel from a network fiber while passing the remaining channels
onto the upgrade ports. The part #Cxxxx of the name refers to the respec-
tive CWDM channel number each module variant covers.
The module’s design maps the added and dropped channel into separate
two-fiber paths, going in opposite directions into the network
(East/West).
Added/dropped channel is interfaced to the corresponding channel mod-
ule on the equipment side. Using the upgrade ports the 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
module can be cascaded to terminate and insert specific channels at a
certain site. Otherwise the upgrade ports UW-D and UE-M as well as UW-
M and UE-D has to be interconnected using patch cables.

Features • Support of 8 wavelengths according to ITU-T G.694.2

(20 nm wavelength spacing)
• Adding/dropping a single CWDM wavelength
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Supports full management
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-69

Hardware Description

Signal path Figure 7-78 shows the operating scheme of the 1CSM+#C1510-E/W as an
example and illustrates the signal path.

Dropping a single The 1CSM+#C1510-E/W receives over two single fibers two different multi-
channel channel signals through the common input ports NW-D from the West di-
rection and NE-D from the East direction. A specific channel (#C1510) can
be dropped on a per-wavelength basis from either of the input fibers into
the client output ports CW-D and CE-D for transmission to the corre-
sponding West or East channel module. The same filter reflects all remain-
ing channels onto the upgrade output ports UW-D and UE-D.

Adding a single The 1CSM+#C1510-E/W receives the single channels (#C1510) from the
channel West and East channel modules through the CW-M and CE-M ports. Both
channels are added by the appropriate optical filters in the direction of
data flow to the multi-channel signal coming from the UW-M and UE-M
ports. The combined signals are then transmitted through the NW-M port
in a westward direction and through the NE-M port in an eastward direc-
tion.

Network Network
ports NW 1CSM+#C1510-E/W ports NE
West side East side

Filter Filter
NW-D UW-D UE-M NE-M

Upgrade Upgrade
ports UW ports UE
Filter Filter NE-D
NW-M UW-M UE-D

CW-M CW-D CE-M CE-D

Client ports CW Client ports CE
West -East direction
#C1510 #C1510 East - West direction #C1510 #C1510
Fig. 7-78: 1CSM+#C1510-E/W Operating Scheme

Placement The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-79, Figure 7-80 and Figure 7-81.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-70 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
1CSM+
#C1510-EW Serial Number:
Port Description
NW Network West xxxxxxxxxxxx
NE Network East
UW Upgrade West
UE Upgrade East
CW Client West
CE Client East
Passive Module

Fig. 7-79: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-80: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-81: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-71

Hardware Description

7.17 OSFM+#1630

Module name
OSFM
#1630
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator
Network port:
Output (N-M) for the network DWDM/CWDM channels and the
OSC channel #1630
Input (N-D) for the network DWDM/CWDM channels and the
OSC channel #1630
Upgrade port:
Output (U-D) for the DWDM/CWDM channels
Input (U-M) for the DWDM/CWDM channels

Client port:
Input (C-M) for the OSC channel #1630
Output (C-D) for the OSC channel #1630

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-82: OSFM#1630 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-27 list all abbreviations on the OSFM+#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-27: OSFM#1630 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
N network port
U upgrade port
C client port
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-72 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 OSFM+#1630

Description The OSFM#1630 is a Supervisory Channel Module that is used to add/drop

an Optical Supervisory Channel (#1630) into/from the network fiber while
the remaining DWDM/CWDM channels are passed onto the upgrade port.
For this purpose, the module contains a set of identical 1630 nm filters
performing the add/drop function on the pre-defined wavelength of 1630
nm. The OSFM#1630 is transparent for the 64 DWDM channels and for the
8 CWDM channels.

Features • Support of the wavelength 1630 nm according to ITU-T G.694.2

• Adding/dropping 1630 nm
• Transparent for DWDM and CWDM signals
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Supports full management

The module has to be connected on the upgrade port to optical filter

modules to access individual DWDM/CWDM channels and on the client
port to an OSCM-V#1630 module.

Signal Path Figure 7-83 shows the operating scheme of the OSFM#1630 as an example
and illustrates the signal path.

Network Upgrade
ports N OSFM+#1630 ports U

N-D Filter
DWDM/CWDM channels + U-D
OSC channel DWDM/CWDM channels

N-M Filter U-M

DWDM/CWDM channels +
OSC channel DWDM/CWDM channels

C-M C-D
Client ports C
Transmit direction
Receive direction
OSC channel
OSC channel

Fig. 7-83: OSFM#1630 Operating Scheme

Dropping an OSC The OSFM#1630 receives over a single fiber DWDM/CWDM channels and
channel one OSC channel (#1630) through the common network port N-D. The OSC
channel is dropped out by an optical filter and directed to the C-D port
for transmission to the OSCM-V#1630 module. The same filter reflects all
remaining DWDM/CWDM channels onto the upgrade port U-D.

Adding an OSC The OSFM#1630 receives one OSC channel (#1630) through C-M port to
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

channel the optical filter in the direction of data flow to add the optical signal
coming from the U-M port. All signals are then combined and transmitted
through the N-M.

Document Version 7.1.5 7-73

Hardware Description

Placement The OSFM#1630 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU
Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The OSFM#1630 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors repre-
sent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-84, Figure 7-85 and Figure 7-86.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
OSFM+
#1630
Serial Number:
Port Description
N Network xxxxxxxxxxxx
U Upgrade
C Common
Passive Module

Fig. 7-84: Example of a OSFM#1630 Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-85: Example of a OSFM#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-86: Example of a OSFM#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-74 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 PSM-95/5

7.18 PSM-95/5

Module name
Serial number

LED indicator

not connected
Output Monitor port (Mon-T) for 5% of the incoming power signal to the
power meter or OSA

Output port (1-T) for 95% of the incoming power signal to the CPE
Input port (1-R) for the incoming power signal

Item number
Fig. 7-87: PSM-95/5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-28 lists all abbreviations on the PSM-95/5 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-28: PSM-95/5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module R receive
T transmit
1 input/output port
Mon monitor port
nc connector is not connected
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-75

Hardware Description

Description The PSM-95/5 is a power splitter module specifically designed for power
monitoring and optical spectrum analysis. It consists of one power split-
ter that splits the incoming signal into two portions. One portion is
passed onto the data line and the other onto the monitor line to provide
monitor functionality.
No power supply is required for the use of the PSM-95/5. The signal traffic
is passed through the module unidirectionally.
The data line is used to connect the module to the client equipment
(CPE). The monitor line is used to connect the module to the power meter
or OSA.

Features • Support of power signal without using any power supply

• Splits the incoming power signal into 95% and 5% for the outgoing
signals
• Provides monitor functionality
• LC type connectors
• Connector Mon-R is not connected
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-88 shows the operating scheme of the PSM-95/5 and illustrates
the signal path.

Input port 1-R Output ports

PSM-95/5
Data line 1-T
95% of power
Splitter
100%
Power signal
Monitor line Mon-T
5% of power

Ingress direction

Fig. 7-88: PSM-95/5 Operating Scheme

The PSM-95/5 receives a power signal over a single fiber through the in-
put port 1-R. The power signal is splitted by an optical filter into 95%
and 5%. The 95% of the power signal is directed onto the data line 1-T
to the client equipment (CPE).
The 5% of the power signal is passing onto the monitor line Mon-T to the
power meter or OSA.

The PSM-95/5 adds an additional insertion loss to the input port (1-T)
and thus decreases the link budget.
Note
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-76 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 PSM-95/5

Placement The PSM-95/5 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU
Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The PSM-95/5 has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors represent
different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide,
Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-89, Figure 7-90 and Figure 7-91.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PSM-
95/5 Serial Number:
Port Description
R T xxxxxxxxxxxx

N In Out
U n t
Passive Module

Fig. 7-89: Example of a PSM-95/5 Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-90: Example of a PSM-95/5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-91: Example of a PSM-95/5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-77

Hardware Description

7.19 1PM/SM
Module name
1PM
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Client port:
Output (C-M) for the client signal to the CPE
Input (C-D) for the client signal from the CPE

Network port west:

Input (NW-M) for the client signal from the west direction
Output (NW-D) for the client signal to the west direction

Network port east:

Input (NE-M) for the client signal from the east direction
Output (NE-D) for the client signal to the east direction

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-92: 1PM/SM Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-29 lists all abbreviations on the 1PM/SM faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-29: 1PM/SM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
C client port
NW network port west
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

NE network port east

7-78 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1PM/SM

Description The 1PM/SM (Single-port Protection Module Single Mode) is a passive op-
tical module that provides channel card protection. It has one client port
and accepts single-mode signals. The 1PM/SM contains an optical splitter
and an optical coupler. One client signal is splitted to produce two optical
paths (channels) with identical data. In the other direction, the light of
two channels is combined into one client signal.
Both channels on the network side are connected to a pair of channel
modules which are ultimately connected through filter modules to a du-
plicated pair of network fiber pairs. The fiber pairs (in a ring system) carry
the channels in the east and west directions. The 1PM/SM exclusively
works in conjunction with channel modules supporting channel card pro-
tection.
The maximum client link attenuation is reduced by the insertion loss of
the 1PM/SM. The network link is not affected.

Features • Support of wavelengths in the 1310 nm range over single-mode fiber

(9 µm, G.652)
• Support of one protected service
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-93 shows the operating scheme of the 1PM/SM and illustrates the
signal path which is described.

Network
1PM/SM NW-M port west
Network line
west direction
Client e.g. working path
NW-D
port C-M
Coupler

Network
Client line C-D
Splitter port east
NE-M Network line
Protected
service east direction
NE-D e.g. protection path

Bidirectional data paths are provided from two Ingress direction

channel modules to the single client interface. Egress direction

Fig. 7-93: 1PM/SM Operating Scheme

Transmit Direction The 1PM/SM receives the client signal from the CPE over a single fiber
through the input C-D. The client input signal is splitted equally and
transmitted in parallel through the outputs NW-D and NE-D to the pair
of channel modules.

Receive Direction The 1PM/SM receives the network signal from the active channel module
through the inputs NW-M or NE-M. The network input signal is passed
through the coupler and transmitted through the output C-M to the CPE.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Placement The 1PM/SM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU
Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

Document Version 7.1.5 7-79

Hardware Description

LED Indicator The 1PM/SM has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors represent
different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide,
Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-94, Figure 7-95 and Figure 7-96.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

1PM/SM Serial Number:

Port Description
C Common xxxxxxxxxxxx
NW Network West
NE Network East

Fiber Type: SM G.652

Operating Wavelengths: 1260 to 1360 nm
Insertion Loss: 3.0 to 4.0 dB
Passive Module

Fig. 7-94: Example of a 1PM/SM Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-95: Example of a 1PM/SM Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-96: Example of a 1PM/SM Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-80 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1PM/MM

7.20 1PM/MM

Module name
1PM
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Client port:
Output (C-M) for the client signal to the CPE
Input (C-D) for the client signal from the CPE

Network port west:

Input (NW-M) for the client signal from the west direction
Output (NW-D) for the client signal to the west direction

Network port east:

Input (NE-M) for the client signal from the east direction
Output (NE-D) for the client signal to the east direction

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-97: 1PM/MM Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-30 lists all abbreviations on the 1PM/MM faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-30: 1PM/MM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
C client port
NW network port west
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

NE network port east

Document Version 7.1.5 7-81

Hardware Description

Description The 1PM/MM (Single-port Protection Module Multimode) is a passive op-

tical module that provides channel card protection. It has one client port
and accepts single-mode and multimode signals. The 1PM/MM contains
an optical splitter and an optical coupler. One client signal is splitted to
produce two optical paths (channels) with identical data. In the other di-
rection, the light of two channels is combined into one client signal.
Both channels on the network side are connected to a pair of channel
modules which are ultimately connected through filter modules to a du-
plicated pair of network fiber pairs. The fiber pairs (in a ring system) carry
the channels in the east and west directions. The 1PM/MM exclusively
works in conjunction with channel modules supporting channel card pro-
tection.
The maximum client link attenuation is reduced by the insertion loss of
the 1PM/MM. The network link is not affected.

Features • Support of wavelengths in 850 nm and 1310 nm ranges over

multimode fiber (62.5 µm, G.651)
• Support of one protected service
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-98 shows the operating scheme of the 1PM/MM and illustrates
the signal path which is described.

Network
1PM/MM NW-M port west
Network line
west direction
Client e.g. working path
NW-D
port C-M
Coupler

Network
Client line C-D
Splitter port east
NE-M Network line
Protected
service east direction
NE-D e.g. protection path

Bidirectional data paths are provided from two Ingress direction

channel modules to the single client interface. Egress direction
Fig. 7-98: 1PM/MM Operating Scheme

Transmit Direction The 1PM/MM receives the client signal from the CPE over a single fiber
through the input C-D. The client input signal is splitted equally and
transmitted in parallel through the outputs NW-D and NE-D to the pair
of channel modules.

Receive Direction The 1PM/MM receives the network signal from the active channel module
through the inputs NW-M or NE-M. The input signal is passed through the
coupler and transmitted through the output C-M to the CPE.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Placement The 1PM/MM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU
Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

7-82 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 1PM/MM

LED Indicator The 1PM/MM has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors represent
different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide,
Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-99, Figure 7-100 and Figure 7-101.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

1PM/MM Serial Number:

Port Description
C Common xxxxxxxxxxxx
NW Network West
NE Network East

Fiber Type: 62.5 ym MM G.651

Operating Wavelengths:
830 to 860 nm / 1260 to 1360 nm
Insertion Loss: min. 3.0 dB (fulfilled launch condition)
Passive Module

Fig. 7-99: Example of a 1PM/MM Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-100: Example of a 1PM/MM Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-101: Example of a 1PM/MM Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-83

Hardware Description

7.21 2PM/SM

Module name
2PM
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator
Client port 2:
Output (2C-M) for the client signal to the CPE
Input (2C-D) for the client signal from the CPE

Client port 1:
Output (1C-M) for the client signal to the CPE
Input (1C-D) for the client signal from the CPE

Network port west 2:

Input (2NW-M) for the client signal from the west direction
Output (2NW-D) for the client signal to the west direction

Network port west 1:

Input (1NW-M) for the client signal from the west direction
Output (1NW-D) for the client signal to the west direction

Network port east 2:

Input (2NE-M) for the client signal from the east direction
Output (2NE-D) for the client signal to the east direction

Network port east 1:

Input (2NE-M) for the client signal from the east direction
Output (1NE-D) for the client signal to the east direction

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-102: 2PM/SM Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-31 lists all abbreviations on the 2PM/SM faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-31: 2PM/SM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
2C client port 2
1C client port 1
2NW network port west 2
1NW network port west 1
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

2NE network port east 2

1NE network port east 1

7-84 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2PM/SM

Description The 2PM/SM (2-port Protection Module Single Mode) is a passive optical
module that provides channel card protection. It has two client ports and
accepts single-mode signals. The 2PM/SM handles two client signals per
module. Correspondingly, the 2PM/SM contains two optical splitters and
two optical couplers. Each of the two client signals are splitted into two
optical paths (channels) with identical data. In the other direction, the
light of the egress channels is combined into two client signals.
The four ports on the network side are connected to the corresponding
pairs of channel modules which are ultimately connected through filter
modules to a duplicated pair of network fiber pairs. The fiber pairs (in a
ring system) carry the channels in the east and west directions.
The 2PM/SM exclusively works in conjunction with channel modules sup-
porting channel card protection. The maximum client link attenuation is
reduced by the insertion loss of the 2PM/SM. The network link is not af-
fected. All output ports of the module use multimode fibers.

Features • Support of wavelengths in the 1310 nm range over single-mode

fibers (9 µm, G.652)
• Support of two protected services
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-103 shows the operating scheme of the 2PM/SM and illustrates
the signal path which is described.

Network
2PM/SM 1NW-M port west 1
Network line 1
west direction
Client e.g. working path
1NW-D
port 1 1C-M
Coupler

Network
Client line 1 1C-D Splitter port east 1
1NE-M Network line 1
Protected
service east direction
1NE-D e.g. protection path
Network
2NW-M port west 2
Network line 2
west direction
Client e.g. working path
2NW-D
port 2 2C-M
Coupler

Network
Client line 2 2C-D Splitter port east 2
2NE-M Network line 2
Protected
service east direction
2NE-D e.g. protection path

Bidirectional data paths are provided from two Ingress direction

channel module pairs to the dual client interface. Egress direction
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Fig. 7-103: 2PM/SM Operating Scheme

Document Version 7.1.5 7-85

Hardware Description

Transmit Direction The 2PM/SM receives two client signals from the CPE over two fibers
through the inputs 1C-D and 2C-D. The client input signals are split
equally and transmitted in parallel through the outputs 1NW-D and
1NE-D as well as 2NW-D and 2NE-D to the corresponding pair of channel
modules.

Receive Direction The 2PM/SM receives the network signals from the active channel mod-
ules through the inputs 1NW-M or 1NE-M and 2NE-M or 2NE-M. The in-
put signals are passed through the appropriate couplers and transmitted
through the output 1C-M and 2C-M to the CPE.

Placement The 2PM/SM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU
Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 2PM/SM has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors represent
different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide,
Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-104, Figure 7-105 and Figure 7-106.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

2PM/SM Serial Number:

Port Description
2C Common xxxxxxxxxxxx
1C Common
2NW Network West
1NW Network West
2NE Network East
1NE Network East

Fiber Type: SM G.651

Operating Wavelengths: 1260 to 1360 nm
Insertion Loss: min. 3.0 to 4.0 dB
Passive Module

Fig. 7-104: Example of a 2PM/SM Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-105: Example of a 2PM/SM Certification Label

7-86 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2PM/SM

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-106: Example of a 2PM/SM Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-87

Hardware Description

7.22 2PM/MM

Module name
2PM
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Client port 2:
Output (2C-M) for the client signal to the CPE
Input (2C-D) for the client signal from the CPE

Client port 1:
Output (1C-M) for the client signal to the CPE
Input (1C-D) for the client signal from the CPE

Network port west 2:

Input (2NW-M) for the client signal from the west direction
Output (2NW-D) for the client signal to the west direction

Network port west 1:

Input (1NW-M) for the client signal from the west direction
Output (1NW-D) for the client signal to the west direction

Network port east 2:

Input (2NE-M) for the client signal from the east direction
Output (2NE-D) for the client signal to the east direction

Network port east 1:

Input (2NE-M) for the client signal from the east direction
Output (1NE-D) for the client signal to the east direction

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-107: 2PM/MM Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-32 lists all abbreviations on the 2PM/MM faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 7-32: 2PM/MM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing
2C client port 2
1C client port 1
2NW network port west 2
1NW network port west 1
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

2NE network port east 2

1NE network port east 1

7-88 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2PM/MM

Description The 2PM/MM (2-port Protection Module Multimode) is a passive optical

module that provides channel card protection. It has two client ports and
accepts multimode signals. The 2PM/MM handles two client signals per
module. Correspondingly, the 2PM/MM contains two optical splitters and
two optical couplers. Each of the two client signals are splitted into two
optical paths (channels) with identical data. In the other direction, the
light of the egress channels is combined into two client signals.
The four ports on the network side are connected to the corresponding
pairs of channel modules which are ultimately connected through filter
modules to a duplicated pair of network fiber pairs. The fiber pairs (in a
ring system) carry the channels in the east and west directions. The
2PM/MM exclusively works in conjunction with channel modules support-
ing channel card protection. The maximum client link attenuation is re-
duced by the insertion loss of the 2PM/MM. The network link is not
affected. All output ports of the module use multimode fibers.

Features • Support of wavelengths in the 850 nm and 1310 nm ranges over

multimode fibers (62.5 µm, G.651)
• Support of two protected services
• LC type connectors
• Transport protocol independent
• Full management support

Signal Path Figure 7-108 shows the operating scheme of the 2PM/MM and illustrates
the signal path which is described.

Network
2PM/MM 1NW-M port west 1
Network line 1
west direction
Client e.g. working path
1NW-D
port 1 1C-M
Coupler

Network
Client line 1 1C-D Splitter port east 1
1NE-M Network line 1
Protected
service east di rection
1NE-D e.g. protection path
Network
2NW-M port west 2
Network line 2
west direction
Client e.g. working path
2NW-D
port 2 2C-M
Coupler

Network
Client line 2 2C-D Splitter port east 2
2NE-M Network line 2
Protected
service east direction
2NE-D e.g. protection path

Bidirectional data paths are provided from two Ingress direction

channel module pairs to the dual client interface. Egress direction
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Fig. 7-108: 2PM/MM Operating Scheme

Document Version 7.1.5 7-89

Hardware Description

Transmit Direction The 2PM/MM receives two client signals from the CPE over two fibers
through the inputs 1C-D and 2C-D. The client input signals are split
equally and transmitted in parallel through the outputs 1NW-D and
1NE-D as well as 2NW-D and 2NE-D to the corresponding pair of channel
modules.

Receive Direction The 2PM/MM receives the network signals from the active channel mod-
ules through the inputs 1NW-M or 1NE-M and 2NE-M or 2NE-M. The in-
put signals are passed through the appropriate couplers and transmitted
through the output 1C-M and 2C-M to the CPE.

Placement The 2PM/MM is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU
Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The 2PM/MM has one LED indicator on the faceplate. Its colors represent
different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide,
Chapter 3, Section 3.5 ‚ p. 3-27.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 7-109, Figure 7-110 and Figure 7-111.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

2PM/MM Serial Number:

Port Description
2C Client xxxxxxxxxxxx
1C Client
2NW Network West
1NW Network West
2NE Network East
1NE Network East

Fiber Type: 62.5 ym MM G.651

Operating Wavelengths:
830 to 860 nm / 1260 to 1360 nm
Insertion Loss: min. 3.0 dB (fulfilled launch condition) Passive Module

Fig. 7-109: Example of a 2PM/MM Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 7-110: Example of a 2PM/MM Certification Label

7-90 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 2PM/MM

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 7-111: Example of a 2PM/MM Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-91

Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-92 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 8
Optical Amplifiers
This chapter contains the descriptions of all optical amplifiers available
at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports and the simplified block diagram. Moreover, the signal path
within the module is briefly discussed, an example of the module’s label-
ing is presented, and references to the description of each LED indicator’s
operating state and to module specific details are given.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:

8.1 EDFA-C-S10
8.2 EDFA-L-S10
8.3 EDFA-C-S18-GC
8.4 EDFA-C-D20-GC
8.5 EDFA-C-D17-GC
8.6 EDFA-L-D17-GC

General Optical amplifiers allow to extend the reach of an optical fiber system
without any electrical processing. By design these optical amplifiers are
specified for a wavelength band (C-band/L-band) and are transparent for
any transmission speeds or protocols.
A special, Erbium-doped fiber is pumped by a laser with a slightly shorter
wavelength than the processed optical spectrum, thus the name Erbium
Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA).
The optical amplifier modules described below have special EMC contact
strips attached to them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring mod-
ules. The EMC contact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromag-
netic energy towards the external environment that might disrupt other
equipment.

Automatic Laser If a transmission fiber breaks, the EDFA detects a loss of signal. If the
Shutdown (ALS) LOS persists, the automatic power reduction (APR)/automatic power
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

shutdown (APS) will reduce the output power to a safe level as defined
by a Class 1M Hazard level product.

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 8-1

Hardware Description

Module Design Optical amplifiers are designed as a plug-in modules that are compatible
with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf (SH1HU). The modules fully
conform to the requirements of all relevant SDH ITU-T and SONET AN-
SI/Telcordia standards.
All optical amplifiers have special EMC contact strips attached to them,
which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC contact
strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy towards
the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 optical amplifiers have the same faceplate markings. LED
indicator and optical port markings of the individual modules are ex-
plained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All optical amplifiers have tri-color LED indicators that are visible through
the faceplates. The colors of the LED indicators display different operat-
ing states. The status that each color of the LED indicators represents is
described in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Optical amplifiers have several printed labels (module type label, certifi-
cation label and warranty label) on the board cover, which contain spe-
cific module information. The labels of the individual modules are shown
in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as

• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• port descriptions and functions
• technical specifications (total input power, minimum gain, total
output power and noise figure)
Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-S10

8.1 EDFA-C-S10
Variants:
Module name
Serial number none

LED indicators

Input port (1R)

Output port (1T)

Item number
Fig. 8-1: EDFA-C-S10 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 8-1 list all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S10 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 8-1: EDFA-C-S10 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
On power supply status of the module T output port
Err operating states of the module R input port
1/R operating states of the Input port
1/T operating states of the Output port
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-3

Hardware Description

The EDFA-C-S10 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as indicated

by the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides full FSP
2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow
FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED behavior.

Description The EDFA-C-S10 is a fixed-power Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier that am-

plifies up to 4 channels of a DWDM C-band group suitable for inline or
preamplifier applications. The module supports LC connectors.

Signal Path • First, the input power level is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN and is used for ALS.
• An isolator prevents back-scattered pump laser light to leave the
module.
• The Er3+ fiber converts a part of the pump laser energy to energy in
sync with the input signal, i.e. the fiber amplifies the input signal.
• An isolator prevents the pump laser light to leave the module.
• Finally, the output power is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN.

Controller
Weak signal Input

Amplified signal
pump laser
Input power Output power

Output
monitor monitor

1R 1T
3+
Er fiber
isolator isolator

Fig. 8-2: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-S10

Placement The EDFA-C-S10 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It
can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The EDFA-C-S10 has several LED indicators on the faceplate. The colors of
the LED indicators represent different operating states. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.6.1 ‚ p. 3-28.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 8-3, Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-S10

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

EDFA-C-S10 Serial Number:

R T
1 Amplifier In Amplifier Out xxxxxxxxxxxx

Total Input Power: -31 to -14 dBm

Minimum Gain: 23 dB
Total Output Power: 10 to 13 dBm
Noise Figure: 6 dB
Laser Module

Fig. 8-3: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 8-4: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 8-5: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-5

Hardware Description

8.2 EDFA-L-S10

Module name Variants:

Serial number none

LED indicators

Input port (1R)

Output port (1T)

Item number

Fig. 8-6: EDFA-L-S10 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 8-2 list all abbreviations on the EDFA-L-S10 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 8-2: EDFA-L-S10 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
On power supply status of the module T output port
Err operating states of the module R input port
1/R operating states of the Input port
1/T operating states of the Output port2
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-L-S10

The EDFA-L-S10 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as indicated

by the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides full FSP
2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow
FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED behavior.

Description The EDFA-L-S10 is a fixed-power Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier that am-

plifies up to 4 channels of a DWDM L-band group suitable for inline or
preamplifier applications. The module supports LC connectors.

Signal Paths • First, the input power level is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN and is used for ALS.
• An isolator prevents back-scattered pump laser light to leave the
module.
• The Er3+ fiber converts a part of the pump laser energy to energy in
sync with the input signal, i.e. the fiber amplifies the input signal.
• An isolator prevents the pump laser light to leave the module.
• Finally, the output power is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN.

Controller
Weak signal Input

Amplified signal
pump laser
Input power Output power

Output
monitor monitor

1R 1T
3+
Er fiber
isolator isolator

Fig. 8-7: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-L-S10

Placement The EDFA-L-S10 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots. It
can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The EDFA-L-S10 has several LED indicators on the faceplate. The colors of
the LED indicators represent different operating states. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.6.1 ‚ p. 3-28.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 8-8, Figure 8-9 and Figure 8-10.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-7

Hardware Description

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

EDFA-L-S10 Serial Number:

R T
1 Amplifier In Amplifier Out xxxxxxxxxxxx

Total Input Power: -31 to -14 dBm

Minimum Gain: 20 dB
Total Output Power: 10 to 14 dBm
Noise Figure: 7 dB
Laser Module

Fig. 8-8: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 8-9: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 8-10: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-S18-GC

8.3 EDFA-C-S18-GC

Module name Variants:

EDFA none
C-S18-GC
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

not connected
Output Monitor (Mon)

Amplifier Input (1R)

Amplifier Output (1T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 8-11: EDFA-C-S18-GC Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 8-3 list all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-S18-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 8-3: EDFA-C-S18-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module Mon monitoring port
Mod operating states of the module R input port
1 amplifier port T output port

Description The EDFA-C-S18-GC is a gain-controlled single-stage Erbium-Doped Fiber

Amplifier to amplify up to 40 channel in the C-band suitable for booster,
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

inline or preamplifier applications.

Document Version 7.1.5 8-9

Hardware Description

Read and understand the user manual as well as the Deployment Rules
Notice before installing and using this device. Failure to follow operating
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.

Signal paths The module contains an amplifier stage works as follows:

• First, the input power level is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN and is used for ALS.
• An isolator prevents back-scattered pump laser light to leave the
module.
• The Er3+ fiber converts a part of the pump laser energy to energy in
sync with the input signal, i.e. the fiber amplifies the input signal.
• An isolator prevents the pump laser light to leave the module.
• Finally, the output power is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN.
• The Gain and Transient Controller regulates the pump laser to
stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e the gain of
the amplification stage.

Controller
Weak signal Input

Amplified signal
pump laser
Input power Output power

Output
monitor monitor

1R 1T
3+
Er fiber
isolator isolator coupler
Mon

Fig. 8-12: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-S18-GC

Placement An EDFA-C-S18-GC can be placed in any 5 HU slot.

LED indicators The EDFA-C-S18-GC has several LED indicators on the faceplate. The colors
of the LED indicators represent different operating states. For details, re-
fer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.6.2 ‚ p. 3-30.

Only configurations approved by ADVA AG Optical Networking are

guaranteed to comply with laser class 1.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-S18-GC

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 8-13, Figure 8-14 and Figure 8-15.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

EDFA-C-S18-GC Serial Number:

R T
Mon NC Monitor xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Amplifier In Amplifier Out

Total Input Power: -31 to -5.5 dBm

Minimum Gain: 25.5 dB
Total Output Power: <21.3 dBm
Noise Figure: 6 dB
Laser Module

Fig. 8-13: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 8-14: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 8-15: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-11

Hardware Description

8.4 EDFA-C-D20-GC

Module name Variants:

EDFA
C-D20-GC
Serial number none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

not connected
Output Monitor (Mon)

Amplifier Input (1R)

Amplifier Output (1T)

Midstage Input (2R)

Midstage Output (2T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 8-16: EDFA-C-D20-GC Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 8-4 list all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D20-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 8-4: EDFA-C-D20-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module Mon monitoring port
Mod operating states of the module R input port
1 amplifier port T output port
2 midstage port
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-D20-GC

Description The EDFA-C-D20-GC is a gain-controlled double-stage Erbium-Doped Fiber

Amplifier that amplifies up to 40 channels in the C-band. The first gain
block works as preamplifier, the second as a booster amplifier. The mid-
stage access allows to insert a dispersion compensation module without
effecting the line budget.

Read and understand the user manual as well as the Deployment Rules
Notice before installing and using this device. Failure to follow operating
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.

Signal paths The module contains two amplifier stages that work as follows:
• First, the input power level is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN and is used for ALS.
• An isolator prevents back-scattered pump laser light to leave the
module.
• The Er3+ fiber converts a part of the pump laser energy to energy in
sync with the input signal, i.e. the fiber amplifies the input signal.
• An isolator prevents the pump laser light to leave the module.
• Finally, the output power is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN.
• The Gain and Transient Controller regulates the pump laser to
stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e. the gain of
the amplification stage.
The output of the first amplification stage and the input of the second
stage will be connected through a dispersion compensation module (DCM)
or a jumper with an attenuator (attenuation < 10 dB).

Gain and Transient Controller

Weak signal input

pump laser pump laser Amplified signal

Output
Power Power Ouput power
monitor monitor monitor
Input power
monitor
1R 1T

isolator Er3+ fiber isolator isolator Er3+ fiber isolator coupler

Mon

2T 2R
Midstage Out Midstage In
to DCM from DCM
Fig. 8-17: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-D20-GC

If the input signal gets lost (LOS) the EDFA will enter a special operating
mode. Noise at a reduced output power level will be provided and the ALS
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

pulses from the channel modules will be amplified. For an illustration of

the operating scheme please refer to Figure 8-17.

Document Version 7.1.5 8-13

Hardware Description

If the optical midstage loss is less than 3 dB (e.g. a jumper instead of a

DCM) the midstage connection should be made before any signal is fed
to the input of the first stage. Otherwise the transient controller might
switch off the module requiring a module reboot.

Placement The EDFA-C-D20-GC can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

If used in an SH7HU: This module consumes more than 20 W.

Check the power consumption of the shelf to be below 400 W.

LED Indicators The EDFA-C-D20-GC has several LED indicators on the faceplate. The colors
of the LED indicators represent different operating states. For details, re-
fer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.6.2 ‚ p. 3-30.

Only configurations approved by ADVA AG Optical Networking are

guaranteed to comply with laser class 1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 8-18, Figure 8-19 and Figure 8-20.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

EDFA-C-D20-GC Serial Number:

R T
Mon NC Monitor xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Amplifier In Amplifier Out
2 Midstage In Midstage Out

Total Input Power: -32 to -5 dBm

Minimum Gain: 24 dB
Total Output Power: <21.3 dBm
Noise Figure: 6 dB
Laser Module

Fig. 8-18: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Module Type Label

HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-D20-GC

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 8-19: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 8-20: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-15

Hardware Description

8.5 EDFA-C-D17-GC
Variants:
Module name
EDFA
C-D17-GC Serial number none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

not connected
Output Monitor (Mon)

Amplifier Input (1R)

Amplifier Output (1T)

Midstage Input (2R)

Midstage Output (2T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 8-21: EDFA-C-D17-GC Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 8-5 list all abbreviations on the EDFA-C-D17-GC faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 8-5: EDFA-C-D17-GC Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module Mon monitoring port
Mod operating states of the module R input port
1 amplifier port T output port
2 midstage port
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-D17-GC

Description The EDFA-C-D17-GC is a gain-controlled double-stage Erbium-Doped Fiber

Amplifier supporting amplification of up to 40 channels in the C-band.
The first gain block works as preamplifier, the second as booster amplifi-
er. The midstage access allows to insert a dispersion compensation mod-
ule without effecting the line budget. The EDFA-C-D17-GC can be used as
preamplifier, booster or inline amplifier.

Read and understand the user manual as well as the Deployment Rules
Notice before installing and using this device. Failure to follow operating
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.

Signal Paths The module contains two amplifier stages which work as follows:
• First, the input power level is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN and is used for ALS.
• An isolator prevents back-scattered pump laser light to leave the
module.
• The Er3+ fiber converts a part of the pump laser energy to energy in
sync with the input signal, i.e. the fiber amplifies the input signal.
• An isolator prevents the pump laser light to leave the module.
• Finally, the output power is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN.
• The Gain and Transient Controller regulates the pump laser to
stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e. the gain of
the amplification stage.
The output of the first amplification stage and the input of the second
stage will be connected through a dispersion compensation module (DCM)
or a jumper with an attenuator (attenuation < 10 dB).

Gain and Transient Controller

Weak signal input

Amplified signal
pump laser pump laser Output

Power Power Ouput power

monitor monitor monitor
Input power
monitor
1R 1T
3+ 3+
isolator Er fiber isolator isolator Er fiber isolator coupler
Mon

2T 2R
Midstage Out Midstage In
to DCM from DCM

Fig. 8-22: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-D17-GC

HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

If the input signal gets lost (LOS) the EDFA will enter a special operating
mode. Noise at a reduced output power level will be provided and the ALS
pulses from the channel modules will be amplified.

Document Version 7.1.5 8-17

Hardware Description

If the optical midstage loss is less than 3 dB (e.g. a jumper instead of a

DCM) the midstage connection should be made before any signal is fed
to the input of the first stage. Otherwise the transient controller might
switch off the module requiring a module reboot.

Placement An EDFA-C-D17-GC can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

If used in an SH7HU: This module consumes more than 20 W. Check the

power consumption of the shelf to be below 400 W.

LED Indicators The EDFA-C-D17-GC has several LED indicators on the faceplate. The colors
of the LED indicators represent different operating states. For details, re-
fer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.6.2 ‚ p. 3-30.

Only configurations approved by ADVA AG Optical Networking are

guaranteed to comply with laser class 1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 8-23, Figure 8-24 and Figure 8-25.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

EDFA-C-D17-GC Serial Number:

R T
Mon NC Monitor xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Amplifier In Amplifier Out
2 Midstage In Midstage Out

Total Input Power: -32 to -8 dBm

Minimum Gain: 25 dB
Total Output Power: <21.3 dBm
Noise Figure: 6 dB
Laser Module

Fig. 8-23: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Module Type Label

HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-C-D17-GC

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 8-24: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 8-25: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-19

Hardware Description

8.6 EDFA-L-D17-GC

Module name Variants:

EDFA-L-D17-GC Serial number none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

not connected
Output Monitor (Mon)

Amplifier Input (1R)

Amplifier Output (1T)

Midstage Input (2R)

Midstage Output (2T)

This page intentionally left blank

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 8-26: EDFA-L-D17-GC Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 8-6 list all abbreviations on the EDFA-L-D17-GC faceplate and their
meanings.

Table 8-6: EDFA-L-D17-GC Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module Mon monitoring port
Mod operating states of the module R input port
1 amplifier port T output port
2 midstage port
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-L-D17-GC

Description The EDFA-L-D17-GC is a gain-controlled double-stage Erbium-Doped Fiber

Amplifier to amplify up to 40 channels in the L-band. The first gain block
works as preamplifier, the second as booster amplifier. The midstage
access allows to insert a dispersion compensation module without
effecting the line budget.

Read and understand the user manual as well as the Deployment Rules
Notice before installing and using this device. Failure to follow operating
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.

Signal Path The module contains two amplifier stages which work as follows:
• First, the input power level is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN and is used for ALS.
• An isolator prevents back-scattered pump laser light to leave the
module.
• The Er3+ fiber converts a part of the pump laser energy to energy in
sync with the input signal, i.e. the fiber amplifies the input signal.
• An isolator prevents the pump laser light to leave the module.
• Finally, the output power is monitored. This value can be accessed
through DCN.
• The Gain and Transient Controller regulates the pump laser to
stabilize the ratio between output and input power, i.e. the gain of
the amplification stage.
The output of the first amplification stage and the input of the second
stage will be connected through a dispersion compensation module (DCM)
or a jumper with an attenuator (attenuation < 10 dB).

Gain and Transient Controller

Weak signal input

pump laser pump laser Amplified signal

Output
Power Power Ouput power
monitor monitor monitor
Input power
monitor
1R 1T

isolator Er3+ fiber isolator isolator Er3+ fiber isolator coupler

Mon

2T 2R
Midstage Out Midstage In
to DCM from DCM
Fig. 8-27: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-L-D17-GC

If the input signal gets lost (LOS) the EDFA will enter a special operating
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

mode. Noise at a reduced output power level will be provided and the ALS
pulses from the channel modules will be amplified. For an illustration of
the operating scheme please refer to Figure 8-27.

Document Version 7.1.5 8-21

Hardware Description

If the optical midstage loss is less than 3 dB (e.g. a jumper instead of a

DCM) the midstage connection should be made before any signal is fed
to the input of the first stage. Otherwise the transient controller might
switch off the module requiring a module reboot.

Placement An EDFA-L-D17-GC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots.

It can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

If used in an SH7HU: This module consumes more than 20 W. Check the

power consumption of the shelf to be below 400 W.

LED Indicators The EDFA-L-D17-GC has several LED indicators on the faceplate. The colors
of the LED indicators represent different operating states. For details, re-
fer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.6.2 ‚ p. 3-30.

Only configurations approved by ADVA AG Optical Networking are

guaranteed as laser class 1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 8-28, Figure 8-29 and Figure 8-30.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx

EDFA-L-D17-GC Serial Number:

R T
Mon NC Monitor xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Amplifier In Amplifier Out
2 Midstage In Midstage Out

Total Input Power: -32 to -8 dBm

Minimum Gain: 24.5 dB
Total Output Power: <21.3 dBm
Noise Figure: 6.8 dB
Laser Module

Fig. 8-28: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Module Type Label

HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 EDFA-L-D17-GC

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 8-29: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 8-30: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 8-23

Hardware Description

HWD_8_OptAmp.fm

8-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 9
Dispersion Compensation Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all dispersion compensation
modules available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports and module specific details. Moreover, the module’s key fea-
tures are presented, the signal path within the module is briefly dis-
cussed, and an example of the module’s labeling are given.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:

9.1 DCM-P/xx
9.2 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy
9.3 DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
9.4 DCF1HU-P Shelf

Dispersion Chromatic dispersion is the traveling speed of optical signals along an op-
Compensation tical fiber varies with the wavelength. This effect leads to signal disper-
Modules (DCMs) sion. DCMs provide an inverse dispersion compared to standard G.652
fiber and therefore regenerate the optical signals in the time domain.
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 9-1

Hardware Description

9.1 DCM-P/xx
Input connector (In) for Output connector (Out)
Module name the incoming signal for the outgoing signal

DCM-P/80
In Out

Fig. 9-1: Example of a DCM-P/80 Front View

Description The DCM-P/xx (Plug-In Dispersion Compensation Module) is a totally pas-

sive optical module. It is used for overcoming the effects of chromatic
dispersion of conventional single-mode transmission fibers according to
G.652. or G.652.c in DWDM networks. Accumulated chromatic dispersion
in the fiber is compensated for different length of fiber span regardless
of the wavelength (channel number). The part /xx of the module name
refers to the compensation capability. An example of a module front view
is shown in Figure 9-1. With this module it is not necessary to drop and
regenerate the wavelengths on the link.
The DCM-P/xx contains a spooled length of dispersion compensating fiber
(DCF) whose ends are spliced to optical connectors on the faceplate as
shown in Figure 9-2.

DCF Fiber spool

Manufacturer label

Mounting plate

Faceplate

Front label

Fiber tray
Input connector Output connector
Fig. 9-2: Example of DCM-P/80 Top View

The DCF has special dispersion characteristics that eliminate the wave-
length dispersion and return signals to their original state.
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

At the front there is a fiber tray to hold the optical fibers.

9-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 DCM-P/xx

Features • Plug-in module that enables flexible solutions

• Full dispersion slope compensation
• Operation over the entire C- and L- bands (from 1530 nm through
1603 nm)
• Low insertion loss and low PMD
• Not manageable from the management system

Optical Connectors The DCM-P/xx module has MU type receptacles, non-angled for fiber ter-
mination on its faceplate. Each optical connector has a blind plug that
provides protection from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs also
protect against dirt and dust.

Variants The DCM-P/xx module is available with different fiber lengths. Each mod-
ule variant is designed to compensate for a specific amount of dispersion.
Table 9-1 lists the module variants currently available and their compen-
sation capabilities.
Table 9-1: DCM-P/xx Module Variants
Compensation Type DCM-P/xx Variants Compensation Capabilities
SSMF (G.652) DCM-P/20 min. 18 km (min. 11.16 mi.)
SSMF (G.652) DCM-P/40 min. 38 km (min. 23.56 mi.)
SSMF (G.652) DCM-P/80 min. 78 km (min. 48.36 mi.)

Signal Path When the DCM-P/xx is connected to a conventional transmission fiber

(G.652 SSMF), light enters via the input connector In and passes through
the DCF for compensation. Accumulated chromatic dispersion in this fiber
is compensated for a specific fiber span. The light is again coupled into
the transmission fiber via the output connector Out.

Placement The DCM-P/xx is placed in the DCM Shelf.

Labeling The DCM-P/xx is identified by the front label, module type label and cer-
tification label.

Front label For a quick identification, a front label is affixed to the right-hand side
of the faceplate. The module name, item number with information on the
hardware revision and the serial number are printed on the label. Figure
9-3 shows an example.

DCM-P/80 Module name

Item number-Hardware revision

0063300070-1.01
FA70054901752
Serial number
Fig. 9-3: Example of a DCM-P/80 Front Label
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

Module type label The module type label is located at the bottom of the module (mounting
plate). It provides module specific information. Figure 9-4 shows an ex-
ample.

Document Version 7.1.5 9-3

Hardware Description

Item Number:
Total Input Power:
Max. 24.0 dBm
Maerzenquelle 1–3 Per Channel Input Power:
98617 Meiningen 0063300070
Tel.: +49 3693 450 0 Max. 0.0 dBm
Fax: +49 3693 450 499
Optical Insertion Loss: Official Name:
8.6 dB DCM-P/80

Compensation Capability: HW Revision:

1.01
Min. 78.0 km
Version of Spec.: Fiber Type to be used with: Serial Number:
R 7.06 V 1.01 SM G. 652
Wavelength Range:
FA70054901752
1530 to 1603 nm

Fig. 9-4: Example of a DCM-P/80 Module Type Label

Certification label The certification label is located at the bottom of the module (mounting
plate) as well. It indicates the current certification marks for this module.
Figure 9-5 shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 9-5: Example of a DCM-P/80 Certification Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

9-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy

9.2 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy

Module name

Serial number

LED indicator

Optical port 1:
Output (1-T) for the outgoing signal
Input (1-R) for the incoming signal

Item number

Fig. 9-6: Example of DCF-M/010/SSMF Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 9-2 lists all abbreviations on the DCF-M/xxx/yyyy faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 9-2: DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module R receive
T transmit
1 optical port named 1

Description The DCF-M/xxx/yyyy is a managed Dispersion Compensation Fiber Module.

In the FSP 3000R7 DWDM transmission system, it provides a flexible so-
lution for overcoming the effects of dispersion in standard single-mode
fiber according to G.652, and enabling operation in the C-and L-band up
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

to 10 Gbit/s per channel. The DCF-M/xxx/yyyy contains a spooled length

of dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) whose ends are spliced to the op-
tical connectors on the faceplate. The DCFs have special dispersion char-

Document Version 7.1.5 9-5

Hardware Description

acteristics that eliminate the wavelength dispersion and return signals to

their original state. Accumulated chromatic dispersion in the fiber is com-
pensated for different length of fiber span regardless of the wavelength
(channel number). The DCF-M/xxx/yyyy module does not exceed the at-
tenuation of 10 dB.
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability,
and /yyyy relates to the DCF type.
An example of a module front view is shown in Figure 9-6, p. 9-5.

Features • Small size plug-in module that enables flexible solutions

• Full dispersion slope compensation
• Operation over the entire C- and L- bands (from 1529 nm through
1602 nm)

Optical Connectors The DCF-M/xxx/yyyy module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fiber
termination on its faceplate. Each optical connector has a blind plug that
provides protection from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs also
protect against dirt and dust.

Variants The Standard Single-Mode Fiber (SSMF acc. to G.652) of the DCF-M/xxx/
yyyy module is available with different fiber lengths. Each module variant
is designed to compensate for a specific amount of dispersion. Table 9-3
lists the module variants currently available and their compensation ca-
pabilities.
Table 9-3: DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Module Variants
Compensation Type DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Variants Compensation Capabilities
SSMF (G.652) DCF-M/010/SSMF ca. 10 km (ca. 6.2 mi.)
DCF-M/020/SSMF ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF-M/040/SSMF ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF-M/060/SSMF ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
DCF-M/080/SSMF ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF-M/100/SSMF ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)

Signal Path When the DCF-M/xxx/yyyy is connected to a conventional transmission fi-

ber (G.652 SSMF), light enters via the input connector (1-R) and passes
through the DCF for compensation. Accumulated chromatic dispersion in
this fiber is compensated for a specific fiber span. The light is again cou-
pled into the transmission fiber via the output connector (1-T).

Placement The DCF-M/xxx/yyyy is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular

slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appro-
priate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of
the module. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3”,
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

p. 3-1 (if available).

9-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 9-7, Figure 9-8 and Figure 9-9.

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
DCF-M
010/SSMF
Serial Number:
Port Description

R T
xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 In Out

Passive Module

Fig. 9-7: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 9-8: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 9-9: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 9-7

Hardware Description

9.3 DCG-M/xxx/SSMF

Module name

Serial number

LED indicator

Optical port 1:
Output (1-T) for the outgoing signal
Input (1-R) for the incoming signal

Item number

Fig. 9-10: Example of DCG-M/060/SSMF Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 9-4 lists all abbreviations on the DCG-M/xxx/SSMF faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 9-4: DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module R receive
T transmit
1 optical port named 1

Description The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is a managed Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Com-

pensation Module. In the FSP 3000R7 DWDM transmission system, it is ca-
pable of compensating the chromatic dispersion of standard single-mode
fiber according to G.652 in the C-band only with a data rate of up to
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

11.3 Gbit/s per channel. The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF contains a spooled length

of dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) whose ends are spliced to the op-
tical connectors on the faceplate.

9-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 DCG-M/xxx/SSMF

The DCF has a high negative dispersion and a dispersion slope that match-
es that of a conventional single-mode fiber according to G.652.
Accumulated chromatic dispersion in the fiber is compensated for differ-
ent length of fiber span regardless of the wavelength (channel number).
Up to 4 modules can be cascaded in one link.
The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is designed to be used on SSMF according to G.652
only. The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capa-
bility.
An example of a module front view is shown in Figure 9-10, p. 9-8.

Compensation for chromatic dispersion can be provided on the basis of

dispersion compensating fiber or fiber bragg gratings. The latter, while
exiting lower cost, delay and insertion loss, have lifted cascadability at
Note
higher data rates due to the effects of phase ripple.

Features • Small size plug-in module that enables flexible solutions

• Full dispersion slope compensation
• Operation over the entire C-band (from 1529 nm through 1562 nm)

Optical Connectors The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF module has LC type receptacles, non-angled for fi-
ber termination on its faceplate. Each optical connector has a blind plug
that provides protection from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs
also protect against dirt and dust.

Variants The Standard Single-Mode Fiber of the Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion

Compensation Module is available in two module variants. Each module
variant compensates for a specific amount of dispersion.
• DCG-M/060/SSMF that compensates for ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.) of
G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber
• DCG-M/100/SSMF that compensates for ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.) of
G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber

Signal Path When the DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is connected to a conventional transmission

fiber (G.652 SSMF), light enters via the input connector (1-R) and passes
through the DCF for compensation. Accumulated chromatic dispersion in
this fiber is compensated for a specific fiber span. The light is again cou-
pled into the transmission fiber via the output connector (1-T).

Placement The DCG-M/xxx/SSMF is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of

the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicator The LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating status of
the module. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3”,
p. 3-1 (if available).
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 9-11, Figure 9-12 and Figure 9-13.

Document Version 7.1.5 9-9

Hardware Description

Module Type Label

Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
DCG-M
060/SSMF
Serial Number:
Port Description
R T
xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 In Out

Passive Module

Fig. 9-11: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Module Type Label

Certification Label
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 9-12: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 9-13: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

9-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 DCF1HU-P Shelf

9.4 DCF1HU-P Shelf

Input connector (In) for
Bracket the incoming signal Bracket

Paddle Output connector (Out) Shelf name Paddle

latch for the outgoing signal latch
Fig. 9-14: Front View DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF Shelf

Description The DCF1HU-P is an all passive and unmanaged Dispersion Compensation

Module Shelf. It consists of the rack-mountable, 1 HU high case and a re-
movable box with a spooled length of a specific dispersion compensating
fiber (DCF) spliced to LC type connectors on its front. The box is inserted
into the case. The paddle latches locate the box in position.
The DCF1HU-P provides a flexible solution for overcoming the effects of
accumulated chromatic dispersion in transmission fibers operating in the
C-band without dropping and regenerating the wavelengths on the link.
The DCF has special dispersion characteristics that eliminate the wave-
length dispersion and return signals to their original state. Accumulated
chromatic dispersion in the fiber is compensated for different fiber types
(SSMF, TrueWaver, Leaf) and different lengths of fiber span regardless of
the wavelength (channel number).
This shelf is a modular platform that enables you to easily add/remove
the DCF spools to/from a network element as needed to support changing
requirements.
Figure 9-14 shows an example of the front view of the DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF
Shelf.

Features • Modular rack-mountable design

• Dimensions of the case: width x height x depth
442 mm x 44 mm x 267 mm; (17.40 in x 1.73 in x 10.51 in)
• Robust and compact case
• Access to the DCF spool from the front of the shelf
• Field-replaceable
• Dispersion compensation across the 1529 nm to 1562 nm
wavelength range (C-band)

Optical Connectors The DCF1HU-P Shelf has LC type receptacles for fiber termination on its
front face. Each optical connector has a blind plug that provides protec-
tion from potential laser radiation. The blind plugs also protect against
dirt and dust.
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 9-11

Hardware Description

Variants The compensation capability of the DCF1HU-P Shelf is determined by the

type and length of the integrated DCF spool. The shelf is available with a
box for compensation of Standard Single-Mode Fiber (SSMF; G.652), Large
Effective Area Fiber (LEAF; G.655) and True Wave Reduced Slope Fiber
(TWRS; G.655). Table 9-5, p. 9-12 lists the shelf variants currently avail-
able and their compensation capabilities.
Table 9-5: DCF1HU-P Shelf Variants
Compensation Types DCF1HU-P Shelf Variants Compensation Capabilities
SSMF (G.652) DCF1HU-P/10/SSMF ca. 10 km (ca. 6.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/20/SSMF ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/60/SSMF ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/80/SSMF ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/100/SSMF ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/120/SSMF ca. 120 km (ca. 74.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/140/SSMF ca. 140 km (ca. 86.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/160/SSMF ca. 160 km (ca. 99.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/180/SSMF ca. 180 km (ca. 111.6 mi.)
LEAF (G.655) DCF1HU-P/20/LEAF ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/LEAF ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/60/LEAF ca. 60 km (ca. 37.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/80/LEAF ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/100/LEAF ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/120/LEAF ca. 120 km (ca. 74.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/140/LEAF ca. 140 km (ca. 86.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/160/LEAF ca. 160 km (ca. 99.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/180/LEAF ca. 180 km (ca. 111.6 mi.)
TWRS (G.655) DCF1HU-P/20/TWRS ca. 20 km (ca. 12.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/40/TWRS ca. 40 km (ca. 24.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/80/TWRS ca. 80 km (ca. 49.6 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/100/TWRS ca. 100 km (ca. 62.0 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/120/TWRS ca. 120 km (ca. 74.4 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/140/TWRS ca. 140 km (ca. 86.8 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/160/TWRS ca. 160 km (ca. 99.2 mi.)
DCF1HU-P/180/TWRS ca. 180 km (ca. 111.6 mi.)

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rack-mount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI customized brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

9-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 DCF1HU-P Shelf

The bracket pairs are included in the shipping box. The appropriate brack-
et pair must be fitted on the outside of the left-hand and right-hand side
walls of the case. The procedures for fitting the different adaptor brackets
are described in the Installation Guide (if available).

Signal Path When the DCF1HU-P is connected to an appropriate transmission fiber

type, light enters via the input connector In and passes through the DCF
for compensation. Accumulated chromatic dispersion in this fiber is com-
pensated for a specific fiber span (or link) regardless of the wavelength
(channel number). The light is again coupled into the transmission fiber
via the output connector Out.

Placement The DCF1HU-P can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack by
using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm
(0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.

Due to its greater depth, the DCF1HU-P Shelf has always to be mounted
in the lowest position in the case of cabinet mounting, so that the air
flow in the cabinet is not inhibited.

Note When placing the DCF1HU-P Shelf beneath a 7HU Shelf, ensure that there
is at least 1 HU of space between the bottom of a 7HU Shelf and the top
of the DCF1HU-P Shelf to allow a free flow of air to the 7HU Shelf above.

Labeling the Shelf Each DCF1HU-P Shelf can be identified by several labels located on the
top of the shelf.

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 9-13

Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_9_DispCompMod.fm

9-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Chapter 10
Dummy Modules
This chapter describes the dummy modules used by the FSP shelves.

A 7HU Shelf or a 1HU Shelf must never be operated with open or empty
slots. Each unoccupied shelf slot must be filled with an appropriate dum-
my module to
• ensure continued EMC and safety compliance
• prevent dust and debris from entering the shelf
• to maintain proper flow of cooling air through the shelf.
Dummy modules are passive devices and therefore cannot be monitored
by the management system. They have neither connectors nor LEDs on
their frontplates. Dummy modules are delivered with the shelf when not
fully populated with optical modules. They can also be ordered separately.
Figure 10-1 shows an example of a dummy module.

Air flow guide

EMC contact strip

HWD_10_DumMod.fm

Fig. 10-1: View of a DM/5HU

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 10-1

Hardware Description

The EMC contact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic

energy towards the external environment that might disrupt other equip-
ment.

Variants Two dummy module variants are available. Table 10-1 lists the mechanical
specifications of the modules.

Table 10-1: Dummy Module Specifications

Variants Sizes Sales Code Usage
DM/5HU 4 HP* wide and 0063709901 Used for populating each 5 HU
5 HU** high shelf slot
DM/2HU5 4 HP* wide and 0063709902 Used for populating each 2.5 HU
2.5 HU** high shelf slot
* HP stands for Horizontal Pitch (1 HP = 5.08 mm = 1/5 in)
** HU stands for Height Unit (1 HU = 44.45 mm = 1.75 in)

Placement Dummy modules can be placed in any slot of the 7HU Shelf and the ap-
propriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

Identification Each dummy module is identified by a printed label that is affixed to its
board. The label contains the item number and the bar code.

HWD_10_DumMod.fm

10-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Appendix A
Electrical Cables
This appendix provides details about FSP 3000R7 power cords, the earth-
ing kit, and serial and Ethernet cables.
It includes the following sections:
A.1 Power Cords which describes the AC and DC power supply cords pro-
vided by ADVA Optical Networking AG. In addition, the earthing kit for
grounding a shelf is described.
A.2 Serial and Ethernet Cables which describes usage of a serial null mo-
dem cable, USB cable and Ethernet cables, and lists the pin-to-pin con-
nections for these cables used by the FSP 3000R7. Also provided are
wiring methods for Ethernet cables using Cat 5 and Cat 6.
HWD_AppA.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 A-1

Hardware Description

A.1 Power Cords

AC and DC power cords provided by ADVA Optical Networking AG are brief-
ly described in the following subsections. This information is given as an
aid to determine which type of power cords has to be used to power the
FSP 3000R7. In addition, it is to assist you in selecting properly rated and
assembled power cords in case the power cords are not be delivered by
ADVA Optical Networking AG.

A.1.1 AC Power Cords

For redundancy, two AC power cords are required per AC powered shelf.
The type of the power cord depends on the region or country where the
FSP 3000R7 is employed and the line power voltage available at the in-
stallation site. One power cord is used for primary power supply (Power
A), and the other for backup power supply (Power B). Two power cords of
the same length and with the same attachment plugs constitute a cord
set that belongs to a specific shelf.
For Europe and International, the cord must be flexible, VDE certified or
HAR (harmonized) and rated 250 V/16 A. The cord should have tree con-
ductors of minimum 1.5 mm2 cross sectional area and should be assem-
bled with an IEC-320-C13 appliance coupler on its female end. The AC wall
attachment plug on the male end of the cord must be a country-specific,
three-conductor grounding type that fits only the corresponding ground-
ing-type power outlet. It is not allowed to circumvent this safety feature.
The AC wall attachment plug must be certified and approved in the spe-
cific country.

If necessary, the customer is responsible for assembling the

WARNING appropriate AC wall attachment plug at the end that is connected
to the line power outlet.

For North America, the cord must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, SVT type and
rated 105°C (221°F). The cord should have tree conductors of minimum
No.18 AWG and should be fitted with a female IEC-320-C13 appliance cou-
pler and a NEMA 5-15P or NEMA 6-20P attachment plug. To comply with
the regulations of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and Canadian Elec-
trical Code (CEC) the AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 meters (14.76
ft.) in length.

Suitable AC power cords can be delivered with each shelf but must be
ordered separately.
Note
HWD_AppA.fm

A-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Power Cords

ADVA Optical Networking AG offers AC power cords for the following re-
gions:
• Continental Europe
• United Kingdom (UK)
• North America

A.1.1.1 AC Power Cords for Operation in Continental Europe

The AC power cord for operation in European countries is assembled with
an angled device plug of the C13 type according to IEC 60320 standard
at the female end and with a CEE 7/7 (“Schuko”) attachment plug at the
male end. Both plugs are molded. This power cord is approximately 1.5 m
(4.9 ft.) long. Figure A-1 shows an example.
Female coupler of C13 type
(IEC 60320)

European CEE 7/7 (Schuko)

attachment plug

Fig. A-1: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to CEE 7/7

The device plug (female coupler) inserts into the appliance inlet on the
faceplate of the AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC). The CEE 7/7 attach-
ment plug fits into the grounded outlets that are standard for the major-
ity of European countries. This “Schuko” attachment plug has two round
pins, each are 4.8 mm in diameter, and are 19 mm apart. In addition, it
has earthing clips on both sides to connect with the CEE 7/4 outlet and
a female contact to accept the male earth pin found in the type E outlet.

A.1.1.2 AC Power Cable for Operation in UK

The AC power cord for operation in United Kingdom is assembled with an
device plug of the C13 type according to IEC 60320 standard at the female
end and with a BS 1363 UK power plug at the male end. Both plugs are
molded. This power cord is ASTA-approved and designed to carry 250 V
AC/50Hz. It is approximately 2.0 m (6.5 ft.) long. Figure A-2 shows an
example.
Female coupler of C13 type
(IEC 60320)

BS 1363 UK power plug

HWD_AppA.fm

Fig. A-2: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to BS 1363

Document Version 7.1.5 A-3

Hardware Description

The device plug (female coupler) inserts into the appliance inlet on the
faceplate of the AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC). The BS 1363 power
plug is compatible with the BS1363 type wall sockets that are normally
used in the United Kingdom, Ireland, and many former British colonies.
A BS 1363 plug has three rectangular prongs forming a triangle. The two
horizontal, rectangular pins for phase and neutral are 4 × 6 × 18 mm
spaced 22 mm apart. The larger, vertical pin is 4 × 8 × 23 mm and used
for an earth connection.
The power plug incorporates a replaceable fuse, the value of which is in-
dicated on the pin face of the plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced,
an ASTA approved BS1362 fuse must be used of the same rating, marked
thus “ASTA“. If the fuse cover is detachable, never use the plug with the
cover omitted. If a replacement fuse cover is required, ensure it is of the
same color as that visible on the pin face of the plug (i.e. red or orange).
Fuse covers are available from the Parts Department indicated in your user
instructions.

Risk of electric shock!

WARNING The BS 1363 plug is not waterproof. Keep try.

A.1.1.3 AC Power Cord for Operation in North America

The AC power cord for operation in North America is assembled with an
angled device plug of the C13 type according to IEC 60320 standard at
the female end and with a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug at the male end.
Both plugs are molded. This power cord is UL compliant and designed to
carry 125 V AC/10 A. It is approximately 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) long. Figure A-3
shows an example.

Female coupler of C13 type

(IEC 60320)

Grounding type attach-

ment plug (NEMA 5-15P)

Fig. A-3: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P

The device plug (female coupler) inserts into the appliance inlet on the
faceplate of the AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC). The NEMA 5-15P at-
tachment plug is compatible with the NEMA 5-15 wall outlets that are
standard in the United States, Canada and Mexico. If the electrical and
safety requirements are fulfilled, this cord could also be employed in var-
ious other countries that use the same type of outlet. The NEMA 5-15 has
two flat parallel blades (live and neutral) and a round ground pin which
is longer than the blades. This allows the PSU/7HU-AC to be grounded be-
HWD_AppA.fm

fore the power is connected.

A-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Power Cords

A.1.2 DC Power Cords

For redundancy, two detachable DC flexible power cords are needed per
DC powered shelf. One cord is used for primary power supply (Power A),
and the other for backup power supply (Power B). Two power cords of the
same length and with the same terminal ends constitute a cord set that
belongs to a specific shelf. Depending on the altitude of the site of op-
eration and the voltages used, and depending on the shelf type 2- or 3-
conductor power cords are required.
One end of the cords is assembled with ring lugs that connect to the
screw terminals of the Power Supply Units (PSUs) of the shelf. Ring lugs
provide an easy and reliable connection to the screw terminals of the ter-
minal block and the necessary high degree of contact reliability.
The wires at the other end of the cords that attach to the external power
source, e.g. a Power Distribution Unit (PDU), have no terminal ends as
shown in Figure A-4.

2-Conductor DC Power Cord 3-Conductor DC Power Cord

Open end

Ring lugs

Grounding wire
Fig. A-4: DC Power Cord Types

However, the terminal ends are required. They depend on the type of con-
nectors installed on the power source. Therefore, wire terminals that meet
the required power source must be assembled by the customer. The wires
must be in accordance with the color code described in Table A-1, p. A-6
and Table A-2, p. A-7.

The customer is responsible for assembling the appropriate terminal ends

at the wiring end that is connected to the external power source.
HWD_AppA.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 A-5

Hardware Description

For determination of the conductors, the cords use a cipher code speci-
fied by the manufacturer of the cords. Either the cipher 1 or 2 is printed
on the black insulation of the wires. The ciphers appear when the sheath
is removed from the open end of the cable. An example of a 2-conductor
power cord (equipment end) is shown in Figure A-5.

Red heat-shrinkable plastic Cipher 1 printed on the wire

tubing: 0 V insulation (here not visible)

Ring lugs, isolated,

for terminal screw
M3

Blue heat-shrinkable plastic Cipher 2 printed on the wire,

tubing: -48 V insulation (here not visible)
Fig. A-5: Example of an Equipment End of a 2-Conductor DC Power Cord

The ends of the 3-conductor cord are based on the same principle, but
the insulation of the grounding wire is colored yellow/green.
Table A-1, p. A-6 and Table A-2, p. A-7 describe the meaning of the ci-
phers and list the cord specifications.
Table A-1: Wire Coding and Specifications of the 2-Conductor DC Power Cords
Shrink Tubing
Conductor Voltage Polarity Wire Gage Connector Type Length Use
Color
Wire labeled Red 0V + (positive 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated,
with 1 (return) pole) (16AWG) for terminal screw Depends on
M3.5 at one end the distances DC-powered
between the
Wire labeled Blue -48 V – (negative 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated, PSUs and the 7HU Shelf*
with 2 pole) (16AWG) for terminal screw power source
M3.5 at one end
Wire labeled Red 0V + (positive 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated, Depends on
with 1 (return) pole) (16AWG) for terminal screw the distances
M3 at one end between the
1HU Shelf
Wire labeled Blue -48 V – (negative 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated, 1HU Shelf
with 2 pole) (16AWG) for terminal screw and the
M3 at one end power source
* The 2-conductor power cord can be used for altitudes of site below 2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages below 60 V dc.

The exposed wires at the equipment end of the DC power cord for a 1HU
Shelf are a little longer than the exposed wires at the equipment end of
Note the DC power cord for a 7HU Shelf.
HWD_AppA.fm

A-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Power Cords

Table A-2: Wire Coding and Specifications of a 3-Conductor DC Power Cord

Shrink Tubing
Conductor Voltage Polarity Wire Gage Connector Type Length Use
Color
Wire labeled Red 0V + (positive 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated,
with 1 (return) pole) (16AWG) for terminal screw
M3.5 at one end Depends on
Wire labeled Blue -48 V – (negative 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated, the distances
DC-powered
with 2 pole) (16AWG) for terminal screw between the
7HU Shelf*
M3.5 at one end PSUs and the
Grounding Yellow/green Protective 1.5 mm2 Ring lug, isolated, power source
wire or yellow ground (16AWG) for terminal screw
M3.5 at one end
* The 3-conductor power cord must be used for altitudes of site higher than 2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages higher
than 60 V DC.

The power cords delivered by ADVA Optical Networking AG are UL Listed

flexible cords, jacketed with plastic or rubber. All the cords are 3 meters
(9.84 ft.) long. The length of the DC power cords depends on the location
of the shelf within the rack and its proximity to the DC power source.
Therefore the cords should be cut to the proper lengths and assembled
with the appropriate connectors.

The DC power cords for the 1HU Shelf are delivered with the equipment.
The DC power cords for the 7HU Shelf can be delivered with the equipment
Note but must be ordered separately.

ADVA recommends labeling each DC power cord for easy identification.

The label should include the following minimum information on each end
of the cord:
• Designation of the shelf (to which the cord will be connected)
• Cord number
• To/from information
• Power A and Power B

A.1.3 Earthing Kit

The Earthing Kit can be used to ground a shelf to the rack (functional
earth connection). The Earthing Kit includes the following:
• 1 grounding (earthing) wire (length of 30 cm (0.984 ft.), cross
section area of 3.31 mm2 (12 AWG))
• 3 cage nuts (consisting of 2 parts)
• 4 washers
• 2 lock washers
• 2 hexagon screws (M6x12)
• 2 pozidrive screws (M6x16)
HWD_AppA.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 A-7

Hardware Description

2 parts of the
Lock washer Pozidrive screw Cage nut Hexagon screw

Grounding wire Washer Ring lugs

Fig. A-6: Example of an Earthing Kit

The grounding wire is assembled with 2 ring lug terminals. One ring lug
must be attached to the shelf and one ring lug must be attached to the
rack. The ring lug terminals are intended for grounding bolt/screws sizes
of M4 to M6.

The Earthing Kit is delivered with each shelf.

Note

If the Earthing Kit cannot be used, a minimum 12AWG (ø 2.05 mm, cross
section area of 3.31 mm2) solid or stranded copper wire with green or
green/yellow insulation color as a ground wire is required. Shelf
Note grounding must be performed according to local and national electrical
codes.
HWD_AppA.fm

A-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Serial and Ethernet Cables

A.2 Serial and Ethernet Cables

This section is intended to provide information about standard serial and
Ethernet cables required for the management of the FSP 3000R7. The
types of interfaces are important considerations. Port and cable pinouts
must be compatible. The following information is to assist you in choos-
ing the appropriate cables. Please be aware that modifying or creating se-
rial and Ethernet cables incorrectly will cause loss of network connec-
tivity. Make sure that all plugs and cables are in accordance with the rel-
evant standards.

A.2.1 Overview
Table A-3 lists the cable types which are used for a complete rack.
Table A-3: Serial and Ethernet Cable Types
Cable Types Connections
Serial null modem from a NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS to a Management PC
cable
USB cable from a NCU to a Management PC
from an OSCM to a Management PC
Ethernet Straight-
from an OSCM to a NCU, NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS
through cable
from CPE to an SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 of a channel module
Ethernet crossover from a NCU to a Management PC
cable

For details on each cable type, see separate subsections.

The cables listed in Table A-3 can be delivered with the equipment but
must be ordered separately.

A.2.2 Serial Null Modem Cable

The easiest way to connect the NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS to the man-
agement PC is using a serial null modem cable. The only problem is the
large variety of serial null modem cables available. Use the information
in this subsection to find the proper cable. All null-modem cables are not
alike. Many null-modem cables merely trick the computer into thinking
that all the appropriate signals are present by swapping the transmit and
receive data. This behavior means that software flow control (XON/XOFF),
which is less efficient than hardware flow control, must be used. A serial
null-modem cable provides the best possible signaling between machines
and allows the use of hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control.
Table A-4, p. A-10 shows how the serial null modem cable must be wired.
Note that the transmit and receive lines are crosslinked. The cable must
be assembled with two female SUB-D9 connectors.
HWD_AppA.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 A-9

Hardware Description

Table A-4: Wiring for Serial Null Modem Cable

Pin Signal Pin X-Link Pin Pin Signal
CD (Data Carrier Detect) 1 -------------- 4 DTR
RxD (Receive Data) 2 -------------- 3 TxD
TxD (Transmit Data) 3 -------------- 2 RxD
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 4 -------------- 1 DCD
GND (Ground) 5 -------------- 5 GNGD
DSR (Data Set Ready) 6
RTS (Request To Send) 7 -------------- 8 CTS
CTS (Clear To Send) 8 -------------- 7 RTS
RI (Ring Indicator) 9 -------------- 9 RI

A.2.3 USB Cable

For creating a direct serial connection between a management PC and the
NCU a USB cable can be used instead of a serial null modem cable. The
USB cable must be assembled with a 5-pin Mini-USB type A plug on one
end and a standard USB type A plug on the other end. Table A-5 and
Table A-6 show the pinouts of the plugs.
Table A-5: Standard USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code
Standard A-Plug Pin Function Description Wire Color
1 V BUS USB power Red
2 D- Negative Data signal White
4 3 2 1 3 D+ Positive Data signal Green
4 GND Signal ground Black
Shell Shield Drain

Table A-6: Mini-USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code
Mini-A USB Plug Pin Function Description Wire Color
1 V BUS USB power Red
2 D- Negative Data signal White
3 D+ Positive Data signal Green
4 ID Identification Joined to pin 5
5 GND Shield Black

The standard USB type A plug has 4 contacts and is rectangular in shape.
The contact opening on this plug measures approximately 13.1(W) x
5.5(H) mm. The Mini-USB type A plug has 5 contacts. Pin 4 is called "ID"
and, in the Mini-A plug, is connected to ground (contacts 4 and 5 joined
together on the inside). This Mini-USB plug is rectangular in shape, with
the contact opening measuring approximately 6.8(W) x 3.1(H) mm.
HWD_AppA.fm

A-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Serial and Ethernet Cables

Data signals are transmitted on a twisted pair of the data cable, labelled
D+ and D-. These collectively use half-duplex differential signaling to
combat the effects of electromagnetic noise on longer lines. D+ and D-
usually operate together; they are not separate simplex connections.
The twisted pair data wires and the drain wire are 28AWG with the non-
twisted power wires being from 28AWG to 20AWG. A USB cable with
20AWG power conductors will give a maximum usable length of 5 meters;
greater lengths require hubs.

A USB connection requires a respective driver in the management PC. This

driver is available on the User Documentation Set CD or can be obtained
from ADVA.

A.2.4 Ethernet Cables

This subsection provides information about color coding and wiring of
Ethernet cables. Table A-7 lists the cable types that are required for Ether-
net connections.

Table A-7: Ethernet Cable Types Used by the FSP 3000R7

Cable Category Level Cable Type Frequency Bandwidth Uses
Cat 5e* 4-pair STP up to 100 MHz 100BASE-TX
(TIA/EIA-568-B.2) 10Base-T
Cat 6* 4-pair STP up to 250 MHz 1000Base-T
(ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1) 100BASE-TX
10Base-T
* Maximum segment distance = 100 meters (328 ft.)

Category 6 (Cat 6) cables have been designed specifically for Gigabit

Ethernet applications. They deliver improved performance over standard
Category 5e (Cat 5e) cables. ADVA strongly recommends using Cat 6 cable
for Gigabit Ethernet over copper installations. Cat 6 is backward compat-
ible with Cat 5e, Cat 5 and Cat 3 cable standards. Cat 5e and Cat 6 cables
support full duplex communication.
The 8 wires inside the Cat 5e and Cat 6 cables are twisted into 4 pairs of
wires. Each pair has a specific color code. Pair 1 (on pins 4 + 5) is the
blue pair, pair 2 (on pins 3 + 6) is orange, pair 3 (on pins 1 + 2) is green,
and pair 4 (on pins 7 + 8) is brown. Odd numbered pins are always striped,
even numbered pins are always solid colored.
Two male RJ-45 plugs (correctly referred to as male 8-position modular
connectors) terminate a Cat 5e and Cat 6 cable.

Cable Wiring The TIA/EIA-568-A standard specifies two wiring schemes for RJ-45
plugs: 568-A and 568-B. 568-A wiring is identical to 568-B wiring except
that pairs 2 and 3 are interchanged. Choice may depend on which wiring
scheme your system uses. Check your system before you begin to adapt
HWD_AppA.fm

or build your own Ethernet cable.

Document Version 7.1.5 A-11

Hardware Description

All male and female RJ-45 connectors on the installation concerning must
be wired for the same wiring scheme. A mix of 568-A and 568-B wiring is
Note not allowed.

Follow one of the wiring schemes but stay consistent. When used as a
patch cable, both ends must be the same. Otherwise it will not work.
Table A-8 describes the color-coding and the pin assignments to the pairs
of an Ethernet cable for both 568A and 568B wiring scheme.

Table A-8: RJ-45 Connector Wiring Schemes

RJ-45 Plug Pinouts Pin# 568A Pair 568B Pair Wire* 568A Wire Color 568B Wire Color
P2 4 Ring Blue solid Blue solid
P3 P1 P4 1 1
5 Tip White/blue stripe White/blue stripe
T568A

T R T R T R T R 3 Tip White/orange stripe White/green stripe

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3
6 Ring Orange solid Green solid
P3 1 Tip White/green stripe White/orange stripe
P2 P1 P4 3 2
2 Ring Green solid Orange solid
T568B

T R T R T R T R 7 Tip White/brown stripe White/brown stripe

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 4
8 Ring Brown solid Brown solid
*Tip (T) refers to the positive (+) side, and ring (R) refers to the negative side of the circuit.

Wires referred to as tip transmit and receive data. Wires called ring pro-
vide grounding.
There is no specified color coding for cables under 10Base-T, 100BASE-TX
and 1000BASE-T. Color coding for wiring under the EIA/TIA-568B stan-
dard is given for use with striped twisted pair. Whether you are using
striped twisted pair or solid color twisted pair, follow the appropriate wir-
ing specifications listed in Table A-9, p. A-13 and Table A-12, p. A-15.

It is important that wiring for Ethernet cables is done using twisted pairs.
For 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX pins 1 and 2 should be wired using one
twisted pair and pins 3 and 6 should be wired using a second twisted pair.
A cable for 1000Base-T uses all four wire pairs available in a Cat 6 cable.
Note
Make sure you count the pins in the right order. Use a cable tester to
verify the proper connectivity of the cable.

Identifying Pin Figure A-7 show the pin numbering of a male RJ-45 plug with the pins on
Numbering the bottom and the tab on the top. In this position, pin 1 is always the
leftmost and pin 8 is the rightmost.
HWD_AppA.fm

A-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Serial and Ethernet Cables

1 8
Fig. A-7: Pin Positioning of a Male RJ-45 Plug

There are RJ-45 plugs for both braided/stranded wires and solid wires.
Choosing the wrong one will make difficulties when wiring the cable.
Note

A.2.4.1 Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Pinouts

Standard straight-through Ethernet cables are used in a star-based setup
to connect systems to a hub. A straight-through cable (STP Cat-6) is also
used when connecting a channel module with a SFP/GBE/ELECTRI-
CAL/RJ45 to the CPE.
A straight-through Ethernet cable has identical wiring in both ends. Both
cable ends follow either 568A or 568B termination. That is, each pin of
the plug on one end is connected to the corresponding pin of the plug on
the other end. Table A-9 describes the wiring for a straight-through
10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX Ethernet cable.

Table A-9: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Straight-Through Cable

Pinout according to 568B
Cable End 1 Cable End 2

Striped Color RJ45* 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Signal RJ45* Striped Color

White/Orange Pin 1 TX+ (Data Transmit+) ------------ TX+ Pin 1 White/Orange
Orange Pin 2 TX- (Data Transmit-) ------------- TX- Pin 2 Orange
White/Green Pin 3 RX+ (Data Receive+) ------------- RX+ Pin 3 White/Green
Blue Pin 4 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 4 Blue
White/Blue Pin 5 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 5 White/Blue
Green Pin 6 RX- (Data Receive-) ------------- RX- Pin 6 Green
White/Brown Pin 7 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 7 White/Brown
Brown Pin 8 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 8 Brown
* Incorrectly connected unused wires generate noise on long lengths.

1000BASE-T uses all four cable pairs for simultaneous transmission in

both directions. A 1000Base-T straight-through cable is wired as shown
in Table A-10, p. A-14.
HWD_AppA.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 A-13

Hardware Description

Table A-10: Example of a 1000Base-T Straight-Through Cable Pinout according to 568B

Cable End 1 Cable End 2

Striped Color RJ45* 1000BASE-T Signal RJ45* Striped Color

White/Orange Pin 1 BI_DA+ (Bi-directional Data pair +A) ----------------- BI_DA+ Pin 1 White/Orange
Orange Pin 2 BI_DA- (Bi-directional Data pair -A) ----------------- BI_DA- Pin 2 Orange
White/Green Pin 3 BI_DB+ (Bi-directional Data pair +B) ----------------- BI_DB+ Pin 3 White/Green
Blue Pin 4 BI_DC+ (Bi-directional Data pair +C) ----------------- BI_DC+ Pin 4 Blue
White/Blue Pin 5 BI_DC- (Bi-directional Data pair -C) ----------------- BI_DC- Pin 5 White/Blue
Green Pin 6 BI_DB- (Bi-directional Data pair -B) ----------------- BI_DB- Pin 6 Green
White/Brown Pin 7 BI_DD+ (Bi-directional Data pair +D) ----------------- BI_DD+ Pin 7 White/Brown
Brown Pin 8 BI_DD- (Bi-directional Data pair -D) ----------------- BI_DD- Pin 8 Brown
* Incorrectly connected unused wires generate noise on long lengths.

A.2.4.2 Crossover Ethernet Cable

Crossover Ethernet cables are normally used to directly connect two de-
vices of the same type to each other without using a hub, or can be used
to cascade two hubs without using an uplink port. Sometimes crossover
cables are also used for connecting stacked 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX
hubs.
A crossover cable has different wiring in both ends. A 100Base-TX Cross-
over Cable swaps pairs 2 and 3 (not the wires within each pair), and a GbE
crossover cable crosses all four pairs. One cable end follows 568A and the
other 568B. That is, the send and receive wires are crossed.
Table A-11 describes the wiring for the crossover 10Base-T and 100Base-
TX Ethernet cable.

Table A-11: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Crossover Cable Pinout

according to 568B
Cable End 1 Cable End 2

Striped Color RJ45* 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Signal RJ45* Striped Color

White/Orange Pin 1 TX+ (Data Transmit+) ------------ RX+ Pin 3 White/Orange
Orange Pin 2 TX- (Data Transmit-) ------------- RX- Pin 6 Orange
White/Green Pin 3 RX+ (Data Receive+) ------------- RX+ Pin 1 White/Green
Blue Pin 4 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 4 White/Brown
White/Blue Pin 5 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 5 Brown
Green Pin 6 RX- (Data Receive-) -------------- TX- Pin 2 Green
White/Brown Pin 7 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 7 Blue
Brown Pin 8 Not used by 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Pin 8 White/Blue
* Incorrectly connected unused wires generate noise on long lengths.
HWD_AppA.fm

A-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Serial and Ethernet Cables

1000BASE-T uses all four cable pairs for simultaneous transmission in

both directions. A 1000Base-T crossover cable is wired as shown in
Table A-12.

Table A-12: Example of a 1000Base-T Crossover Cable Pinout according

to 568B
Cable End 1 Cable End 2

Striped Color RJ45* 1000BASE-T Signal RJ45* Striped Color

White/Orange Pin 1 BI_DA+ ------------- BI_DB+ Pin 3 White/Orange
Orange Pin 2 BI_DA+ -------------- BI_DB- Pin 6 Orange
White/Green Pin 3 BI_DB+ -------------- BI_DA+ Pin 1 White/Green
Blue Pin 4 BI_DC+ -------------- BI_DC+ Pin 7 Blue
White/Blue Pin 5 BI_DC- -------------- BI_DC- Pin 8 White/Blue
Green Pin 6 BI_DB- -------------- BI_DA+ Pin 2 Green
White/Brown Pin 7 BI_DD+ -------------- BI_DD+ Pin 4 White/Brown
Brown Pin 8 BI_DD- -------------- BI_DD- Pin 5 Brown
* Incorrectly connected unused wires generate noise on long lengths.
HWD_AppA.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 A-15

Hardware Description

HWD_AppA.fm

A-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Appendix B
SCU-Intercom-Kit
This section provides information on the SCU-Intercom-Kit.

ADVA provides an SCU-Intercom-Kit to interconnect SCU (Shelf Control

Unit) modules or SCU-E (Extension Shelf Control Unit) modules. It can
also be used to connect one SCU module to one SCU-E module.

The SCU-Intercom-Kit can be delivered with the equipment, but you have
to order it separately. For ordering, contact ADVA.

Each shelf requires an SCU-Intercom-Kit.

Equipment of the The SCU-Intercom-Kit includes:

SCU-Intercom-Kit • four SFP Transceiver (SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC)
• one duplex patch cable with LC connector
(J/MM62/LC/DUP/0090/RED) with a length of 90 cm (2.953 ft.)
• one duplex patch cable with LC connector
(J/MM62/LC/DUP/0500/RED) with a length of 5.0 m (16.405 ft.)
The patch cables are assembled with duplex LC multi-mode connectors on
both ends. See Figure B-1, p. B-2.
Four red markers identify the connection from the transmitter to the re-
ceiver of the SCU and SCU-E modules. One marker is located behind the
both connectors and two markers are slipped on the cables.
See Figure B-2, p. B-2.
Two transceivers and the short patch cable (J/MM62/LC/DUP/0090/RED)
have to be used to interconnect two SCU or SCU-E modules. It can also
connect one SCU to one SCU-E.
HWD_AppB.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 B-1

Hardware Description

SFP Transceiver

Patch cable
(J/MM62/LC/DUP/
0500/RED)

Patch cable
(J/MM62/LC/DUP/
090/RED)

Duplex LC multi-mode connectors

Fig. B-1: Example of an SCU-Intercom-Kit

Red markers

Protective cap

Fig. B-2: Connecting Patch Cables to the SCU or SCU-E

HWD_AppB.fm

B-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Index

Numerics placement 7-10

port description 7-8
1310-nm SFP transceiver. See pluggable signal path 7-9
transceiver 2CLSM-#D01-#D64
1CSM+#Cxxxx front view 7-5
labeling 7-66 labeling 7-7
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W LED description 7-7
labeling 7-70 module description 7-6
1CSM+#Dxx-E/W placement 7-7
labeling 7-43 port description 7-5
1CSM+#G1310 signal path 7-6
labeling 7-62 2PM/MM
1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy front view 7-88
channel group allocation 7-21 labeling 7-90
1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy LED description 7-90
labeling 7-22 module description 7-89
1HU Shelf. See SH1HU/2DC placement 7-90
1PM/MM port description 7-88
front view 7-81 signal path 7-89
labeling 7-83 2PM/SM
LED description 7-83 front view 7-84
module description 7-82 labeling 7-86
placement 7-82 LED description 7-86
port description 7-81 module description 7-85
signal path 7-82 placement 7-86
1PM/SM port description 7-84
front view 7-78 signal path 7-85
labeling 7-80 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
LED description 7-77, 7-80 labeling 7-50
module description 7-79 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
placement 7-77, 7-79 client port allocation 7-37, 7-53
port description 7-78 front view 7-36
signal path 7-79 labeling 7-39
2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 LED description 7-39
labeling 7-47 module description 7-37
2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy placement 7-39
front view 7-8 port description 7-36
labeling 7-10 signal path 7-38
LED description 7-10 variants 7-37
module description 7-9 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
module variants 7-9 labeling 7-54
HWDIX.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 I-1

Index

4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Ethernet crossover A-14

labeling 7-28 Ethernet straight-through A-13
4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy serial null modem A-9
labeling 7-34 USB A-10
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy channel card protection 7-79, 7-82, 7-85,
channel group allocation 7-13 7-89
front view 7-12 channel modules, overview 0-1 to 0-2
labeling 7-14 channel splitter modules, overview 0-2, 7-2
LED description 7-14 contact ADVA, details 1-xxvi
module description 7-13 core type channel modules, overview 0-1
module variants 7-13 CWDM SFP transceiver. See pluggable trans-
placement 7-14 ceiver
port description 7-12
signal path 7-14 D
7HU Shelf. See SH7HU
850-nm SFP transceiver. See pluggable trans- DCF1HU-P
ceiver adaptor brackets 9-12
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 front view 9-11
labeling 7-58 general description 9-11
8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy labeling 9-13
chlient port allocation 7-17 placement 9-13
front view 7-16 signal path 9-13
labeling 7-18 specifications 9-13
LED description 7-18 variants 9-12
module description 7-17 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy
module variants 7-17 description 9-5
placement 7-18 labeling 9-7
port description 7-16 LED description 9-6
signal path 7-17 placement 9-6
signal path 9-6
A variants 9-6
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF
abbreviations and acronyms 1-xxxiii description 9-8
access type channel modules, overview 0-1 front view 9-5
air filter pad 1-4 labeling 9-9
air filter unit 1-2 LED description 9-9
placement 9-9
B signal path 9-9
variants 9-9
band splitter modules, overview 0-2, 7-2 DCM-P/xx
basic system structure of FSP 3000R7 0-1 features 9-3
front view 9-2
labeling 9-3
C module description 9-2
C-/L-band splitter module. See 2CLSM-#D01- placement 9-3
#D64 signal path 9-3
cables specifications 9-4
AC power cords A-2 topview 9-2
DC power cords A-5 variants 9-3
HWDIX.fm

I-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Index

Dispersion Compensation Module Shelf. See FAN/Plug-In 1-2

SH1HU-P/DCM and DCF1HU-P fan LED 1-15
dispersion compensation modules front view 1-15
See DCM-P/xx, DCG-M/xxx/SSMF, DCF-M/ general description 1-15
xxx/yyyy and DCF1HU-P labeling 1-17
overview 0-3 LED description 1-16
disposal shelf display 1-16
batteries 0-4 signal path 1-16
FSP 3000R7 equipment 0-4 specifications 1-17
pluggable transceivers 0-4 front cover 1-5
documentation
audience 1-xix G
conventions 1-xxii
history of changes 1-xxix group splitter modules, overview 0-2, 7-2
obtaining 1-xxiv
organization 1-xix
related 1-xxiv
M
dummy module management module, overview 0-2
description 10-1
of a 1HU Shelf 1-18
of an 7HU Shelf 1-2 N
DWDM SFP transceiver. See pluggable trans-
ceiver NCU
front view 6-19
NCU-A
E front view 6-13
NCU-B
earthing kit A-7 front view 6-13
EDFA-C-D17-GC NCU-GDPS
labeling 8-18 front view 6-13
EDFA-C-D20-GC
labeling 8-14
EDFA-C-S10 O
labeling 8-4
EDFA-C-S18-GC optical amplifiers, overview 0-3
labeling 8-11 optical filter modules, overview 0-2
EDFA-L-D17-GC optical power splitter modules,
labeling 8-22 overview 0-3, 7-2
EDFA-L-S10 optical protection switch modules,
labeling 8-7 overview 0-2
enterprise type channel modules, optical supervision modules, overview 0-2
overview 0-2 OSFM#1630
Ethernet cables labeling 7-74
crossover, pinouts A-14
straight-through, pinouts A-13 P
types A-11
wiring A-11 pluggable transceiver
application notes 5-7
color code 5-3
F
disposal 0-4
fan unit. See FAN/Plug-In general description 5-5
HWDIX.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 I-3

Index

labeling 5-3 description 5-8

naming conventions 5-2 SH1HU/2DC
types and variants 5-5 adaptor brackets 1-21
power cords DC power cords A-6
AC A-2 description of the LEDs 1-20
AC for operation in Continental earthing kit A-7
Europe A-3 features 1-18
AC for operation in North America A-4 front view 1-18
AC for operation in UK A-3 general description 1-18
DC A-5 grounding 1-19
for SH1HU/2DC A-6 labeling 1-22
for SH7HU A-6, A-7 module cooling 1-19
power supply unit. See PSU/7HU-AC and PSU/ naming 1-21
7HU-DC placement 1-20
protection modules power supply 1-19
overview 0-3, 7-2 shelf display 1-21
PSM-95/5 signal path 1-20
labeling 7-77 slots 1-20
PSU/7HU-AC specifications 1-23
connecting 1-13 SH1HU-P/DCM
features 1-12 adaptor brackets 1-25
front view 1-12 front view 1-24
general description 1-12 general description 1-24
LED description 1-14 labeling 1-25
placement 1-14 placement 1-25
removing and replacing 1-13 specifications 1-26
specifications 1-14 SH7HU
PSU/7HU-DC AC power cords A-2
connecting 1-10 adaptor brackets 1-5
features 1-10 DC power cords A-6, A-7
front view 1-9 description of the LEDs. See Fan/Plug-In
general description 1-9 earthing kit A-7
LED description 1-11 front cover 1-5
monitoring 1-11 front view 1-2
placement 1-11 general description 1-2
removing and replacing 1-11 grounding 1-3
specifications 1-11 module cooling 1-4
naming 1-6
placement 1-5
R
power supply 1-3
RJ-45 plug A-12 signal path 1-5
wiring A-12 slots 1-4
specifications 1-8
shelves, overview 0-1
S
serial null modem cable A-9 T
SFP transceiver. See pluggable transceiver
SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 technical assistance 1-xxv
application notes 5-9
HWDIX.fm

I-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description

 Index

U
USB cable A-10

W
WEEE compliance statement 1-xxvii
wide band SFP transceiver. See pluggable
transceiver
Wiring A-11

X
XFP transceiver. See pluggable transceiver
HWDIX.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 I-5

Index

This page intentionally left blank

HWDIX.fm

I-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description